


PA 2087 






iMl 



WHIM 



S'iP 



1826 










I Wmw. 



^m 



III 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



00003T512Q0 



*«cr 







L * * • i l! ♦ ^ ^0 p " • ♦ " 



> ^ -J 






^V 









.<*>, 






^ 









,0* ••■•• *o A^ 






^ 















AN 

INTRODUCTION 

TO 

LATIN CONSTRUING; 

OR, 

EASY AND PROGRESSIVE LESSONS FOR READING ; 

TO BE USED BY THE PUPIL 

AS SOON AS THE FIRST DECLENSION HAS BEEN COMMITTED 

TO MEMORY, 

gfoaptexr to the most popular Grammars, 

BUT MORE PARTICULARLY TO THAT USED IN 

THE COLLEGE AT ETON; 

AND DESIGNED TO ILLUSTRATE 

THE INFLECTION OF THE DECLINABLE PARTS OF SPEECH, THE RULES 
FOR GENDER, FOR THE PRETEKPERFFCT TENSE, AND OF SYNTAX; 
HAVING THE QUANTITY OF THOSE SYLLABLES MARKED, ON WHICH 
THE PRONUNCIATION DEPENDS, WITH SUCH DIRECTIONS PRE- 
FIXED, AS WILL SHEW THE MANNER IN WHICH LATIN IS READ 
IN OUR UNIVERSITIES AND PUBLIC SCHOOLS, AND ACCOMPANIED 
WITH QUESTIONS. 

TO WHICH ARE ADDED 

SOME PLAIN RULES FOR CONSTRUING. 
By The Rev. J. BOSWORTH, M.A.RA.S. 

VICAR OF LITTLE HORWOOD, BUCKS; 

AUTHOR OF THE ELEMENTS OF ANGLO-SAXON GRAMMAR, 

LATIN CONSTRUING, &C. 

THIRD EDITION. 



I would not have the attention of the 3 r oung scholar confined during a veiy Jong 
time only to the Grammar. — Knox's Liberal Education. 
Usus magister est optimus. — Cic. 



LONDON : 

PRINTED FOR W. SIMPKIN AND R. MARSHALL, 

STATIONERS' HALL COURT, I UDGATE-STREET. 

1826. 






%1 



J. M'Creery, Tooks-court, 
Cbaucery-lane, Loudon. 



TO THE 

KEV. J. CHAMBERLAYNE, B.A. 

&c. &fi. &c. 

THIS LITTLE WORK 

IS DEDICATED, 

WITH A MOST GRATEFUL ACKNOWLEDGMENT 

OF THE ADVANTAGES 

WHICH HAVE BEEN DERIVED FROM 

THE USEFUL INSTRUCTION, 

AND JUDICIOUS ADVICE, THAT, IN EARLY YEARS, 

HE SO KINDLY GAVE TO 

HIS EVER TRULY OBLIGED, 

AND OBEDIENT SERVANT, 

JOSEPH BOSWORTH. 



PREFACE. 



The mental and physical powers of children are, at 
first, in a very weak state. It is by exercise, slowly 
increased, that the members of the body are strength- 
ened, and the powers of the mind developed. In the 
manner of cultivating them, there is a striking ana- 
logy, as every thing must be gradual. All can see 
that this is reasonable when applied to the body. In 
it's weakest state, every assistance is afforded; but, 
as strength is acquired, helps are withdrawn. Too 
much assistance, at this stage, would be equally pre- 
judicial with too little. In the former case the mem- 
bers would be contracted for want of exercise, and, 
in the latter, they would be distorted by preternatu- 
ral exertion. So much assistance is only given as 
will enable the child to help itself. 

The same method should be adopted with the un- 
derstanding. That study should be selected, which 
will bring into exercise and gradually unfold all the 
faculties of the mind. Probably nothing is better 

B 



11 



calculated to answer this end, than the study of Latin. 
The Grammar is regular and systematical ; in learn- 
ing it, the memory and understanding are constantly 
called into exercise ; the former in learning the inflec- 
tions and rules, and the latter in applying them. The 
memory, however, is often too much burdened;* for 
many boys are kept labouring at their Grammar, till 
they have passed through it in all its parts; and, for 
want of exercise in what they have learned, not un- 
frequently forget the preceding part while they are 
learning the subsequent. Would it not greatly con- 
duce to the strengthening of their understandings 
and memories, if they were to read sentences pro- 
perly selected to exemplify the inflections and rules? 
That this is not a singular opinion, but one derived 
from observing the actual wants of children, is evi- 
dent from the observations of an experienced and 
valuable writerf on Education, who says, u The 
young scholar should be introduced to the parsing 
and construing of some easy Latin, in order to exem- 
plify, by actual reading, the many rules he every day 
commits to memory. This not only enables him to 
understand them more clearly, and to remember them 
better, but renders the study of Grammar, which to 
a young mind is necessarily dry, somewhat entertain- 
ing. I have known boys quite wearied and disgusted 
with learning Grammar for a whole year without 

* " As the learner advances in bis progress, other powers should 
be exercised besides that of memory." — See Hill's Synonymes of the 
Latin Tongue, 

t See Knox on Education. 



Ill 



any variety. Neither were they so well grounded as 
others, who had opportunities of applying the vari- 
ous rules by reading." 

The following little compilation is arranged with 
a view to the observations just made, and designed 
for the use of those who are learning their Grammar. 

It is divided into two distinct parts, Etymology 
and Syntax. 

The definitions of the parts of speech in Etymo- 
logy, and exercises on them, though short, may be 
found useful to very young pupils. 

Questions are added to fix the attention upon the 
most important matter. The pupil should prepare 
an answer to every question in his lesson. 

That a copia verbormn might be acquired, with the 
knowledge of inflection, as many radical words as 
possible are contained in the examples. 

In the parsing notes, on the left-hand page in Ety- 
mology, the unchangeable part of the words is printed 
in Roman letters, and the terminations, which in de- 
clining give way to other syllables, are put in Italic, 
that the young scholar may more easily decline the 
words. 

In the twelfth page of this little work, the learner is 
shown the necessity of being acquainted with the va- 
rious terminations of Latin nouns, as the Romans ex- 
pressed that relation of words by terminations which 
we do by prepositions. This principle is illustrated 
by examples through the whole of Etymology. 

As the Grammar is understood and becomes fa- 
miliar, the scholar is taught to use bis Dictionary, 

b g 



IV 

first with rjouns, then adjectives, pronouns, &c. 
Thus he is gradually and practically brought to see 
the real use of his Grammar and Dictionary, and 
by degrees left to himself. 

Though what is said on the composition of words 
is very brief, it may tend to show the extensive use 
of that principle. 

The gender of nouns, the preterperfect tenses and 
supines of verbs, may be learned after the gramma- 
tical inflections are become familiar, according to 
the Eton* plan, or after the declension of nouns, as 
in Dr. Valpy's Elements of Latin Grammar. 

In Syntax the Eton arrangement is followed. The 
order of words is given, that the pupil's attention 
may not be diverted from Concord and Government^ 
the chief objects in Syntax. Very few words are 
translated, because, the use of the Grammar and 
Dictionary being familiar, by their aid the English 
will easily be discovered. In this view, Syntax will 
be a continued exercise on all that has been previ- 
ously learned in Etymology. 

* The 9th edition of the Eton Latin Grammar, with Notes by 
Dr. Mavor, is that to which reference is made throughout this In- 
troduction : but a correct edition of the Eton Grammar has been 
published, with the quantity of every syllable, and accent of every word, 
carefully marked, and also valuable and copious notes, by the Rev. 
T. Smith, of St. John's College, Cambridge. Another edition of 
this work has just appeared by T. W. C. Edwards, M. A. There 
is also " A Manual of Xatin Grammar,*' combining the Eton 
plan and the advantages of modern improvements, with a preface 
containing useful directions for acquiring a knowledge of Latin : By 
John Pye Smith, D. D. This little work is not only admirably per- 
spicuous and concise, but comprehensive. 



The few observations on Ellipsis will simplify 
some of the Rules in Syntax. 

The rules for construing are only intended for ge- 
neral directions. Those who wish to see the sub- 
ject more fully treated, and each rule illustrated by 
copious examples, may consult a little work called 
" Latin Construing," which is intended to follow 
this Introduction. 

While in* these works every obstacle is removed, 
they are intended to call forth the latent energies of 
the mind, by leaving sufficient cause for the pupil's 
own exertion. It has been a desire to avoid con- 
fusing by multiplicity, and to teach one thing at a 
time. Succeeding rules have, also, been anticipated 
as little as possible. 

It may perhaps be necessary to observe, that at first 
sight this little compilation may have some appear- 
ance of similarity with several introductory books 
now in use; but upon examination it will be found 
very different both in matter and arrangement. 



Little Horwood Vicarage^ 
May 14, 1821. 



u 3 



PREFACE 



TO 



THE THIRD EDITION. 



Much care has been taken in preparing this Edi- 
tion for the press. An attempt has now been made 
to explain the general manner of reading Latin in 
our Universities and Public Schools. Latin is read 
by accent, which, in words of more than two sylla- 
bles, is regulated by quantity. No pains have been 
spared to make the rules for accent and quantity as 
plain as possible : should illustrative examples to 
these Rules be deemed necessary, they are suffi- 
ciently numerous in the " Order, &c." through the 
whole of Syntax. For practical purposes, it is bet- 
ter to give Rules for accent than to mark the words ; 
because, if the accent were marked over every word 
in the text, the learner would depend on them with- 
out noticing the quantity; and, of course, he would 
find himself at a loss upon entering on another book, 
where he had not a similar help : but, being here 
necessarily accustomed to observe the quantity, and 



Vll 



to accent by the rules, which are universally appli- 
cable, he will easily apply them in any book he may 
subsequently read. 

Any suggestion, addressed to the Author or Pub- 
lishers, for the improvement of another Edition, 
will be thankfully received. 



Little Horwood Vicarage, 
Feb. 20, 1826. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 

nn stand for a noun. ■ 

m stands for masculine gender. 

f. feminine gender. 

n neuter gender. 

c. ..«. common gender. 

ae,f.l. stand for a noun of the feminine gender and first declension. 

i, m . 2 masculine gender and second declension. 

is, f . 3 feminine gender and third declension. 

us, m. 4 masculine gender aud fourth declension. 

ei, f • 5 feminine gender and fifth declension. 

nom stands for the nominative case. 

g genitive case. 

d dative case. 

ac accusative case. 

v vocative case. 

ab. ablative case. 

s. singular number. 

pi plural number. 

adj an adjective. 

comp in the comparative degree. 

sup in the superlative degree. 

pron a pronoun. 



THE MANNER IN WHICH LATIN IS READ IN 
OUR UNIVERSITIES AND PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 



On the Sound of the Letters in Latin. 

In Latin the diphthongs ae and oe must be sounded as e ; 
thus, musce and poena are pronounced mu'-se and pe'-na. 

C, is sounded, as in English, like s, before e, i,y 9 ce, and 
oe; and like k, before a, o, u, and consonants: thus, cicer 
is pronounced si r -ser; coccus, se'-kus; coenaculum, se-nak'- 
u-lum; cuticula, ku-tik '-u-la ; and classicus, Mas' -si-kus. 

The letter g is also sounded as in English. It is hard 
before a 9 o, u, and consonants, like g in give; and soft, 
like j, before e, i, and y 9 or another g followed by e: thus, 
gigno ispronouncedjig'-wo; gemma, j em -ma; agger, aj'-jer. 

Ch is always sounded like k; thus, chronica is pronounced 
kron'-i-ca. 

The syllables ti, ci 9 si, xi, before a vowel, are pronounced 
as in the English words nation, precious, invasion, noxious; 
thus, pretium, concio 9 incisio, and anxie\ are pronounced 
pre-shi-um, cori-shi-o, in-cizh r -i-o 9 ank'-shi-e: but ti at the 
beginning of a word, and after 5 or x, is pronounced like 
ti in tidy or satiety; as, istius, ?nixtio 9 and timor 9 pro- 
nounced ist'~i-vs 9 mix-ti-o, and ti-'mor. 

The Division of Words into Syllables. 

A syllable is one distinct sound, and may be either a 
vowel, a diphthong, or one or more consonants with a 
vowel. . 

In Latin the final vowel is always distinctly sounded ; 
indeed there are as many syllables in a word as there are 
vowels or diphthongs: as, corde 9 lupi, pennoz, al&, nata 9 
nautcp, which words are divided and read cor -de, lu-pi, 
pen'-nce, a!-l(Z, na'-ta 9 nau'-tw; but when the letters c, h, 

How are the diphthongs a and oe sounded ? 

What is the sound of c before e, «, y 9 ce, &c? 

What before a, o, w, &c? 

How is g sounded before a, o 9 u 9 &c? 

How before i, i, y, &t\ ? 

Like what letter ts ch sounded? 

How aie ti, d, &c. pronounced before a vowel? Give examples. 

How is ii pronounced at the beginning of a word, and after s? 

What is a syllable ? 

Is the final vowel always pronounced in Latin? Give an example. 



10 

g, q, or 5, are followed by two vowels, they generally 
form only one syllable : as, cut, huic, lingua, qua, qui, quo, 
suadeo, divided and read ki, hike, lin-gwa, kwa, kvoi, kivo, 
swa'-de-o. 

The following observations may be serviceable in di- 
viding words into syllables: 

1. A single consonant, between two vowels, must be 
joined to the latter vowel ; as, mo-rce, d-la, a -qua; ex- 
cept the accent falls on the last syllable but two (antepe- 
nult), then this syllable generally takes the following con- 
sonant; as, lit'-e-rce, an '~i-ma, fil f -i-a, &c. ; and x is joined 
to the vowel going before it; as, ex-ul, ax -is. Com- 
pound words must also be resolved into their constituent 
parts; as, ab'-est, iri-e-o, &c. 

2. Two consonants, between two vowels, are to be se- 
parated; as, for -ma, ter-ra: but when two consonants can 
begin a word, they may be sometimes joined to the fol- 
lowing syllable ; as, U'-bris, Lu-cre'-ti-i, &c. 

General Rules for Quantity. 

1* One vowel before another, or before h, followed by 
a vowel, is short; as, ineus, nihil, &c. 

2. The diphthongs, a, oe, au, eu, ei 9 are all long; as, 
poena, hcedus, &c. 

3. A vowel before two consonants, or before j, x, and 
s, is long ; as, forma, major, &c. 

Every penult not falling under these rules is marked 
thus: 

« over a vowel, shows tbat syllable to be short. 
- over a vowel, denotes that syllable to be long. 

Rules for Accent. 
Rule I. — In pronouncing Latin words of two syllables, 
the accent or stress of the voice is always on the former 
syllable, whether it be long or short : as, hit -jus, ho-rum, 
mu-sa, bo-nus, pa-rens, &c. 

How do you pronounce cui, lingua, &c? 

What is the first rule for dividing words into syllables? How are 
mora, exul, &c. divided? 

What is the second rule? 

Is one vowel before another long or short? — Is a diphthong long ? 
— Is a vowe), before two consonants, long or short?— What is the 
mark for a short syllable ? A loug ? 

What is accent ? What is the mark for accent? Where is the ac- 
cent, or stress of the voice, in Latin words of two syllables? 



11 

Rule IL — In words of three or more syllables, when the 
last syllable but one (penult) is long, that syllable has the 
accent; as, ma-gis-ter, mu-sa-rum, ma-gis-tro -rum, do-mi- 
no -rum, vi-rum- que, &c. : if the last syllable but one be short, 
the accent is on the preceding (antepenult) syllable: as, dorn- 
i-nus, fiX-i-us, op-e-ris % o -per -i- bus, me-li-or-i-bus, &c. 

Latin is read by accent, which, in words of three or 
more syllables, is "regulated by the quantity of the last 
syllable but one. When the quantity of the last syllable 
but one is known, either by the general rules, or by the 
mark over the vowel, you may ascertain where to place 
the accent by the two preceding rules. The stress of the 
voice is on the first syllable of for' -ma, cu-ra, poe'-na, mo- 
ra^, peri-noz, a-lx, a -qua, ter-r&, mu-l&, &c, because they 
are words of two syllables. The accent is on the antepe- 
nult, or last syllable but two, in lit'-e-raz, me-mor'-i-a, in- 
su-l&, an-i-ma, &c, because the penult, or last syllable 
but one, is short,: it is on the penult, or last syllable but 
one, in li-te-ra-fum, na-tu-rw, re-gi-na, e-qua-bus, A-lex- 
ari-dri, &c, because that syllable is long. 

'Examples to illustrate the Rules for Accent, and the Division 
of Syllables. 

For'-ma lit'-e-rae. 
For'- ma li-te-ra-rum. 
Cu'-ra me-mor'-i-se. 
Na-tu'-ra fa-bu-la -rum. 
Pce'-na mo'-ra?. 
Pen'-nae a'-la*. 
Re-gi'-na in'-su-lae. 



A'-qua ter'-rae. 
An'-i-ma mu'-lae. 
Na'-ta nau'-tae. 
Fil'-i-ae po-e-ta'-rum. 
Li-ber-ta'-bus scri'-bae. 
E-qua'-hus iE-ne'-ae. 
Men-sis An-chl'-see. 



CHAP. L—OF NOUNS. 

The learner should carefully observe the ending of Latin 
words. It is by the ending of the genitive case that the 

Where is the accent in words of three or more syllables ? Where 
when the last syllable but one is short ? Give an example. Which 
is the penult syllable? Which the antepenult? Where is the accent 
when the last syllable but one is long? Give an example. 

How is Latin read ? How do you know which syllable to ac- 
cent? Which syllable is accented in forma, cura, mora, &c. ? 
Why Which in literce, memorice, insula, &c. ? Why? Which in 
literarum, naturcc, &c? Why? 

What part of a Latin word should be carefully observed ? Why ? 



12 

declensions are distinguished; and what is expressed in 
English by of, to, for, with, &c. placed before nouns, is 
denoted in Latin by a difference in the termination; as 
will be seen by the following example : 

Plural. 
N. Form-tf, forms, 
G. Form-anm, of forms, 
D. FornWs, to forms, 
A. Form-as, forms, 
V. Form-tf, forms, 
A. Form -is, by forms. 



Singular. 
N. Form -a, a form, 
G. Form-tf, of a form, 
D. Form-tf, to a form, 
A. Form -aw, a form, 
V. Form -a, form, 
A. Form -a, by a form. 



Here ce, arum, &c. annexed to the radical Latin word 
Form, have the same effect as of a, of the, to, or by, put 
before the English word form. 

When a Latin word ends in arum, it will be the genitive 
plural, and of must be placed before the English word, as 
musarum, of songs. If a Latin word end in &, it may be 
the genitive or dative singular or the nominative or voca- 
tive plural, and it must have of, or to, &c. placed before 
the English word, as best suits the sense. 

Every syllable in Latin should have its full sound; but 
particular care should be taken distinctly to enunciate the 
terminating syllables, and to let the stress of the voice fall 
on the last syllable but one (penult), or the last syllable 
but two (antepenult), according to the rules of accent. 

OF A NOUN. 

A noun is the name of any thing we can see, touch, or 
conceive to subsist. 

You know that book, pens, paper, coat, and hat, are nouns, 
because you can see or touch them. You are also certain 
that love and respect are nouns, though you cannot see or 
touch them, because you can conceive such a thing to 
subsist as the love you have for your parents, and the re- 
spect you have for your instructors. 

When a Latin word ends in a, is, arum, &c. what must be put before 
the English ? What part of a word should be most distinctly spoken ? 
Where must the stress uf the voice or accent always fall in Latin words? 

What is a noun ? What part of speech is that which expresses the 
names of whatever you can see, touch, or conceive to subsist? 

What part of speech is book ? Why is it a noun ? What part of 
speech is love ? How do you know T love is a noun? 

Which are the nouns in these sentences ? It is a book. John 
runs. I have a respect for my instructor and a love for my parents. 



13 



NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION. 

1 Forma literse * 6 Poena morae 

2 Forma literarum 7 Pennae alas 

3 Formae literae 8 Regina insulae 

4 Cura memoriae 9 Aqua terrae. 

5 Natura fabularum 

IRREGULAR NOUNS, &C.f 

1 Anima mulae 4 Libertabus scribae 

2 Naia nautae 5 Equabus JEneae 

3 Filiae poetarum 6 Mensis Anchisae. 

How do you know when a noun is of the first declension ? What 
do you annex to the radical word to form the genitive singular, the 
genitive and dative plural, &c. ? Why does Anima, &c. make Ani- 
mabus in the d. and ab. pi. '! How is Mneas declined ? Have you 
observed the notes in your grammar ? What are they? Where is the 
accent informal in literarum! memorial By what rules do you 
prove that the accent is on the syllables for, ra, and mo? 



ETYMOLOGICAL PARSING TABLE FOR A NOUN. 

is a noun of the — declension because the genitive case sin- 
gular ends in — . Declined like . In the — Number, — Case, 

— Gender. From . I decline it, Singular, nom. — g. — . 

d. — ac. — v. — ab. — ; Plural, nom. — g. — d. — ac. — v. — ab. — ^ 

Example. Litera is a noun of theirs* declension because the ge- 
nitive case singular ends in cb ; declined like Musa: In the singular 
number, genitive case, feminine gender; from Litem. I decline it, 



* If these examples cannot be conveniently construed immedi- 
ately after the Grammar has been repeated, they may be translated, 
and the English written down on paper, as an evening's exercise, to 
be examined by the tutor the following morning, in addition to the 
declension of a word in that part of the accidence which the pu- 
pil is learning. After the translation is corrected, the pupil, with 
his English translation alone in his hand, should turn it again into 
Latin. This exercise will be a most effectual means of impressing 
the words and their inflections on the mind. 

t Perhaps it would be better to omit reading the irregular nouns 
till all the regular inflections of the five declensions are perfectly 
understood ; then the irregular nouns will not be so likely to con- 
fuse the pupil. 



u 

Nora. hcBc Litem, a letter : g. hujus Litera, of a letter : d. huie Liter*, 
to a letter: ac. hanc Literam, a letter: v. o Litera, o letter: ab. abhac 
Litera, by a letter. Plural, nom. hce Literce, letters ; £. karum Lite- 
varum, of letters : d. his Literis, to letters : ac. has Lileras, letters : 
v. o Literce, o letters ; ab. ab his Literis, from letters. 

When a noun is named to the pupil, he should be taught to go through 
it in this manner as quickly as possible without intemiption. 

THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF NOUNS IN THE FIRST 
DECLENSION. 

1 Forma the form litera?. of a letter .—Forma, nom, s, forma, ae, 
f. 1 : — Litera?, g. s. liters, ae, f. 1. 

2 Forma the form literarum of letters: — Forma, nom, s, forma, ae, 
f. 1 :— Literarum, g. pi. litera, ae, f. 1. 

3 Formae the forms literae o/a tetter. — Formae, nom, pi, forma, ae, 
f. 1 :— Literae, g\ s. litera, ae, f. 1. 

4 Cura the care memoriae of the memory :— Cura, nom, s, cura, ae, 
f. 1 : — Memoriae, g. s. memoria, ae, f. 1. 

5 Natura /fo nature fabnlaruni of fables ;— Natura, wowi. s. natura, 
ae, f. 1 : — Fabularum, g. pi, fabula, ae, f. 1. 

6 Poena the punishment morae of delay : — Poena, nom, s, poena, ae, 
f. 1 : — Mora?, g. s. mora, ae, f. 1. 

7 Pennae the quills alae o/ the wing: — Pennae, nom, pi, penna, ae, 
f. 1 :— Alae, g. s, ala, a?, f. J . 

8 Regina the queen insula? of an island: — Regina, nom, s, regina, ae, 
f. 1: — Insula?, g. s. insula, a?, f. 1. 

9 Aqua the water terra? of the earth: — Aqua, nom, s, aqua, ae, f. 1 ; 
— Terrae, g. s. terra, ae, f. 1. 

IRREGULAR NOUNS, &C. 

1 Anima the breath mulae of a mule: — Anima, nom, s. anima, ae, 
f. 1 : The d. and ab, pi. end in abus to distinguish it from the d. and 
ab. pi. of Animus: — Mulae, g, s. mula, ae, f. 1 : — the d. and ab. pi, end 
in abus. 

2 Nata the daughter nautae of a sailor: — Nata, nom, s. nata, ae, f. 1 : 
— Nautae, g. s. nauta, ae, m. 1. 

3 Filia?. the daughters poetarum of artists:— Filia?, nom.pl, filia, ae, 
f. 1: — Poetarum, g. pi. poeta, ae, m. 1. 

4 Libertabus to the female servants scribae of a writer: — Liberta- 
bus, d. pi. liberta, a?, f. 1 : — Scuba?, g. s. scriba, ae, m. 1. 

5 Equabus with the marcs JEnem of JEneas* : — Equabus, ab, pi. 
equa, ae, f. 1 : — /Eneae, g.s. JEneas, ae, m. 1. 

6 Mensis to the tables Anchisa? of Anchises: — Mentis, d.pl. men- 
sa, ae, f. 1 : — Anchisae, g. s. Anchises, ae *, m. 1. 



* See Edwards's or Mavor's Notes to the Eton Latin Grammar, 
under musa ; Valpy's under res ; and Ruddiman's under penna. 



15 



NOUNS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 

1 Libris magistri 

2 Cultro fabri 

3 Ministris Alexandri 

4 Amicus populi 

5 Anno Domini 

6 Humerus equi 

7 Socero pueri 

8 Periculum auri 

9 Telo belli 

10 Initio praelii 

11 Muri hortorum 
\2 Ostia templorum 

13 Exemplis studii 

14 Cura peculii Virg. 

IRREGULAR NOUNS, &C. 

1 Domus Dei 

2 Rami ficorum 

3 Filio Curtii 

4 Delicta vulgorum 

5 Alvo haedi 

6 Liberi Lucretii. 

Which is the long syllable in Ministris ? (Example 3.) Why is is 
long? Where is the accent or stress of the voice ? By what rule? 
How do yon know that i is long in delicta? (Example 4.) Why is 
the accent on ihe syllable lict, and on hu in humerus ? (Example 6.) 

How do yon know when a noun is of the second declension? 

What do you annex to the radical word to form the genitive, dative, 
and accusative singular, and the nominative, genitive, and ablative 
plural? What is the note upon puer, &c? 

What do Deus, Filius, and Curtius make in the vocative case ? 
What cases are alike in ail neuter nouns, and in what do these cases 
eud in the plural ? 

c 2 



16 



TKE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF NOUNS IN THE SECOND 
DECLENSION. 

1 Libris with the books raagistri of the master; — Libris, ab. pi. liber, 
ri, m. 2 : — Magistri, g. s. magister, ri, m. 2. 

2 Cultro with the knife fabri of the workman : — Cultro, ab. s. Culter, 
ri, m. 2 :— Fabri, g. s. faber, ri, m. 2. 

3 Ministris to the servants Alexandri of Alexander, the king of Ma* 
cedon: — Ministris, d.pl. minister, ri, m. 2: — Alexandri, g. s. Alex- 
ander, ri, m. 2. 

4 Amicus the friend populi of the people: — Amicus, nom. s. ami- 
cus, i, m. 2 : — Populi, g. s. populus, i, m. 2. 

5 Anno in the year Domini of the Lord : — Anno, ab. s. annus, i, 
m. 2 : — Domini, g. s. Dorainus, i, m. 2. 

6 Humerus the shoulder equi of a horse: — Humerus, nom. s. hu- 
merus, i, m. 2 : — Equi, g. s. eqims, i, m. 2. 

7 Socero to the father in law pueri of the child: — Socero, d. s. socer, 
eri, m. 2. — Pueri, g. s. puer, eri, m. 2. 

Note. Nouns of the second declension ending in er lose e in de- 
clining, except in puer, socer, and a few others. See Edwards's or 
Mavor's Notes to the Eton Grammar, and Ruddiman's Grammar in 
this declension. 

8 Periculum the danger &\\x\ of gold:— Periculum, nom. s. pericu- 
\um, i, n. 2 : — Auri, g. s. aurum, i, n. 2. 

9 Telw with a weapon belli of war: — Telo, ab. s. telum, i, n. 2: — 
Belli, g. s. beWutn, i, n. 2. 

10 Initio to the beginning praelii of battle: — Initio, d. s. initium, i, 
n. 2:-— Praelii, g. s. proeliuw, i, n. 2. 

11 Muri the walls hortorum of gardens ;— Muri, nom. pi. murns, i, 
in. 2 : — Hortorum, g. pi. hortus, i, m. 2. 

12 Ostia the doors templorum of the temples : — Ostia, nom. pi. os- 
tium, i, n. 2: — Templorum, g.pl. teraplum, i, n. 2. 

13 Exemplis with the examples studii of study: — Exemplis, ab, pU 
exempluw, i, n. 2 : — Studii, g. s. studium, i, n. 2. 

14 Cura the care, peculii of property : — Cura, nom. s. cura, ae, f. 1 : 
— Peculii, g. s. peculiww, i, u. 2. 

IRREGULAR NOUNS, &C. 

1 Domus the house Dei of God ;— Domus, nom. s. domus, i, f. 2 : — 
Dei, g. s. Deus, i, m. 2. 

2 Rami the branches flcorum of Jig-trees: — Rami, nom.pl. ramus, i, 
m. 2 : — Ficorum, g. pi. ficus, i, f. 2. 

3 Filio to the son Curtii of Curtius ;— Filio, d. s. filius, i, m. 2 :— 
Curtii, g. s. Curtiws, i, m. 2. 

4 Delicta the faults vulgorum of the common people : — Delicta, nom. 
pi. delictum, i, n, 2 : — Vulgorum, g. pi. vulgus, i, n. and m. 2. 

5 Alvo in the stomach hasdi of a kid : — Alvo, ab. s. alvtts, i, f. 2 : — 
Haedi, g. s. haedus, i, m. 2. 

6 Liberi the children Lucretii of Lucretius : — Liben, nom.pl. the 
g. is orum; it Las no singular : — Lucretii, g. s. Lucretiws, i, m. 2. 



17 



NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION, &c. 

1 Finis sermonis 

2 Cives Romae 

3 Pedibus gigantis 

4 Mos hominutn 

5 Flores horti 

6 Numa Pompilius rex Romanorum Eut. 

7 Amor matris 

8 Laude patris 

9 Origine mundi 

10 Defensorem pudicitiae Eut. 

11 Patriae conditor 

12 Munera forturoe 

13 Onerajugi 

14 Corpora leonum 

15 Luce solis 

16 Cura parentum 

17 Nomini bominis 

18 Lac vaccae 

19 Corde lupi 

20 Haeredi regni 

21 Dux hostium. 



What do all nouns of the third declension make in the genitive 
singular ? 

What must be added to the radical word to make *he dative and 
ablative plural, &c. &c. ? 

Is the a iu gigantis (Example 3.) long or short? Why? Where is 
the accent in gigantis] By what rule do you prove that the accent 
is on the syllable gun* 



18 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF NOUNS IN THE THIRD 
DECLENSION, &C. 

1 Finis the end sermonis of a speech : — Finis, nom. s. finis, is, c. 3 : 
— Sermonis, g. s. sermo, onis, m. 3. 

2 Cives the citizens Romae of Rome: — Cives, nom. pi. civis, is, c. 3: 
— Romae, g. s. Roma, ae, f. 1. 

3 Pedibus by the feet gigantis of a giant: — Pedibus, ah. pi. pes, 
edis, m.3: — Gigantis, g. s. gigas, ntis, m. 3. 

4 Mos the manner liominum of men ;— Mos, nom, s. mos, ris, m. 3 : 
— Hominunj, g. pi. homo, inis, c. 3. 

5 Flores the flowers liorti of the garden: — Fiores, nom.pl. flos, ris, 
m.3: Horti, g. s. hortus, i, in 2. 

6 Noma Pompilius Suma Pompilius, rex the king Romanorum of 
the Romayis: — Nnma, nom. s. Numa, ae, m. 1 : — Pompilius, nom.s. 
PompiliMs, i, id. 2;— Rex, nom. s. rex, gis, m. 3: — Romanorum, 
g. pi. Romam, urum, m. 2. 

7 Amor the love matris of a mother: — Amor, nom.s. amor, oris, 
m. 3: — Matris, g. s mat??*, ris, f. 3. 

8 Laude by the praise patris of a father: — Lande, ab. s. laus, dis, 
f 3: — Patris, g. s. pater, ris, m.3. 

9 Oriniue/rom the beginning mundi of the world : — Oiigine, ab. s. 
origo, ids, f. 3: — Mundi, g. s. mundus, i, ni. 2. 

10 Defensorem the defender pndicitiae of modesty: — Defensorem 
ac. s. defensor, oris, m. 3: — Pudicitiae, g. s. pudicitia, ae, f. 1. 

1 i Conditor the founder patriae of a country : — Conditor, nom. s. 
conditor, oris m. 3; — Patriae, g. s. patria, a?, f. I. 

12 Munera the gifts fortuna? of fortune: — Munera, nom.pl. muuws, 
eris, n. 3:— Fortm ae, g. s. fortuna, ae, f. 1. 

13 Onera the burdens juui of a yoke: — Onera, nom.pl. onus, eris, 
n. 3: — Jugi, g. s, ju^i/ra. i, n. 2. 

14 Corpora the bodies leonum of lions:— Corpora, nom.pl. corpws, 
oris, n. 3 : — Leonum, g. pi. leo, onis, m, 3. 

15 Luce by the light sous of the sun: — Luce, ab. s. Iv.x, cis, f. 3 : — 
Solis, g. s. so/, lis, m. 3. 

16 Cura the care parentum of parents: — Cura, nom. s. cura, ae, f. i : 
— Parentum, g. pi. parens, tis, c. 3. 

17 Nomini to the name hominis of a man:— Nomini, d. s. nomew, 
inis, ii. 3: — Hominis, g.s. homo, inis, c. 3. 

18 Lac the milk vaccae of a com':— Lac, nom. s. lac, tis, n. 3: — 
Vaccae, g. s. vacca, ae, f. l.« 

19 Corde with the heart lupi of a wolf:— Corde, ab. s. cor, dis, n. 
3 : — Lupi, g. s. lupus, i, m. 2. 

20 Haeredi to the heir regni of a kingdom: — Haeredi, d. s. haeres, 
dis, c. 3 : — Regni, g.s. regnum, i, n. 2. 

21 Dux a leader hostium of the enemies:— Dux, nom, s. dux, cis, 
c. 3 : — Hostium, g. pi. hostts, is, c. 3. 



19 



IRREGULAR NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION, &C. 
OF THE GENITIVE PLURAL, &C. 

Most words of the third Declension make the genitive plural in 
urn; except, 

1. Nouus ending in es, or is, not increasing in the genitive singu- 
lar, make the genitive plural to end in ium. 

1 Civium potentiam Nep. 

2 Urbis Romse territorio 

3 Auri fames Virg. 

4 Pelagi rupes Virg. 

5 Fame vulpis 

6 Pellibus ovium. 

2. Neuter nouns ending in e, al, ar, make i in the ablative singu- 
lar, ia in the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural, and ium 
in the genitive. 

1 Ovilis agno 

2 Vis retium 

3 Animalium vita. 

3. Words of one syllable ending in as, and in x, or s, after a con- 
sonant, have ium in the g. pi. ; and words of more than one syllable 
in ns ; but these are often contracted into um f as parentu?h } &c. 

1 Mas avium 

2 Gentis cives Nep. 

3 Urbium moenia Nep. 

4 Natura montis Cces. 

5 Rex Vejentium To] urn ni us. Eut. 

GREEK NOUNS. 

1 Olympias mater Alexandri Nep. 

2 Lampada Turni Virg. 

3 Phyliidis amor. Ov. 

What do nonns ending in is, and not increasing in the genitive, 
make in the genitive plural? Give some examples. 

What neuter nouns make i in the ablative singular, ia in the nom. 
pi. &c. and ium in the genitive plural? 

What other words make ium in the genitive plural? 

Do all words of more than one syllable ending in ns, make the 
genitive plural in ium ? 

What do you observe in the declining of Greek nouns in this de- 
clension ? 



20 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF IRREGULAR NOUNS OF 
THE THIRD DECLENSION, &C. 

1 Potentiam the power civium of the citizens ;—-Potentiam, ac. s. 
potentia, as, f. 1 : — Civinm, g. pi. e\\is> is, c. 3. 

2 Territorio to the territory urbis of the city Romae Rome : — Terri- 
'torio, d. s. territorial, i, n. 2 :— Urbis, g. s. urbs, is, f. 3 :— -Romae, 
g. s. Roma, a?, f. 1. 

3 Fames the hunger or desire auri of gold: — Fames, worn. s. fame*, 
is, f. 3: — Ami, g. s. am am, i, n. 2. 

4 Ropes the rocks pelagi of the sea ;— Rupes, nom. pi. ropes, is, 
f. 3 : — Pelagi, g. s. pelagas, i, n. 2. 

5 Fame by the hunger vulpis of a fox:— Fame, ab. s. fames, is, f. 3: 
— Vulpis, g. s. vulpes, is, f. 3. 

6 Pellibus with the skins ovium of sheep: — Pellibus, ab. pi. pellzs, 
is, f. 3 : — Ovium, g. pi. o\is> is, f. 3. 

1 Agno to a Zr/m&ovilis of the fold: — Agno, d. s. agnos, i, m. 2: — 
Ovilis, g. s. ovile, is, n. 3. 

2 Vis the strength retium of the 7iets: — Vis, nom. s. vis, g. vim, ac. 
vi, ab. PI. vires, ium, f. 3 : — Retium, g. pi. rete, is, n. 3. 

3 Vita Mf /i/e animalium of animals:— Vita, now. s. vita, a?, f . 1 : 
— Animalium, g. pi. anima/, alis. n. 3. 

1 Mas f/ie 7na/e avium of birds: — Mas, nom. s. mas, ris, m. 3 : — 
Avium, g. pi. avis, is, f. 3. 

2 Cives the citizens gentis of the nation: — Cives, ac. pi. civis, is, 
c. 3 : — Gentis, g. s. gens, tis, f. 3. 

3 Moenia the walls urbium of the cities: — Moenia, ac.pl. moenia, 
um, n. 3, no singular;— Urbium, g. pi. urbs, is, f. 3. 

4 Natura the nature montis of the mountain: — Natura, nom. s. na- 
tura, a?, f. 1 :— Montis, g. s. mons, tis, m. 3. 

V 5 Tolnmnius Tolumnius, rex the king Vejentium of the Vejentes: — 
Tolumnius, num. s. Tolumnius, i, m. 2 : — Rex, nom. s. rear, gis, m. 3 : 
— Vejentinm, g. pi. Vejens, tis, m. 3. 

GREEK NOUNS, &C. 

1 Olympias Olympian, mater the mother Alexandri of Alexander: 
— Olympias, nom. s. Olympias, £dis, f. See Edwards's or Mavor*s 
Notes to the Eton Grammar, Valpy, and Ruddiman in the Notes on 
Greek words in this declension: — Mater, nom. s. mater, ris, f. 3: — 
Alexandri, g. s. Alexander, ri, m. 2. 

2 Lampada the torch Turn i of Turnus: — Lampada, ac. s. Lampas, 
adis or ados. See Edwards's or Mavor's Notes to the Eton Gram- 
mar. Turni, g. s. Turn?(S, i, m. 2. 

3 Amor the love Phvllidis of Phyllis: — Amor, nom. s. amor, oris, 
m. 3 : — Phyllidis, g. s. PhyfKs, idis or idos, f. 3. See Eton Notes, &c. 



21 



NOUNS OF THE FOURTH DECLENSION, &c. 

1 Versus Simon idis Phced. 

2 Graduum templi Eut^ 

3 Strepitu pedum 

4 Aspectu urbis 

5 Metus populi 

6 Terroe motus 

7 Luctus fceminarum 

8 Sonitu tubae 

9 Ortus amicitioe 

10 Casu nivis Liv. 

11 Agitatio fluctuum 

12 Numerum senatorum Eut. 

13 Dolor artuum 

14 Lusus naturae. 

IRREGULAR NOUNS, &C. 

1 Sagittam arcus 

2 Manus pueri 

3 Cornibus tauri 

4 Domus fratris 

5 Specubus ferarum 

6 Rami quereus. 

What is the genitive case singular of all nouns in the fourth de- 
clension? 

What added to the radical word forms the genitive and dative 
plural, &c? 

What does arcus make in the ablative plural? Are nouns in u de- 
clined in the singular number? What gender are they ? Decline 
the plural. 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF NOUNS IN THE FOURTH 
DECLENSION, &C. 

1 Versus the verses Simonidis of Simonides .'—Versus, nom, pi. ver- 
sus, 6s, m. 4 : — Simonidis, g, s. Simonides, is, m. S. 

2 Graduum of the steps templi of a temple ; — Graduum, g. pi, gra- 
dus, us, m. 4: — Templi, g. s. templttm, i, h. 2. 

3 Strepitu with the noise pedum of the feet ;— Strepitu, ab, s, stre- 
pitus, us, m. 4: — Pedum, g, pi. pes, dis, m.3. 

4 Aspectu in the sight urbis of the city : — Aspeetu, ab. 8. aspectus, 
us, m. 4: — Urbis, g. s. urbs, is, f. 3. 

5 Metus a fear populi of the people : — Metus, nom, s, metus, us, 
m. 4: — Populi, g. s. populus, i, m. 2. 

6 Motus a violent motion terras of the earth, or an earthquake :— mo- 
tus, nom, s, motus, us, m. 4: — Terra?, g. s. terra, ae, f. J. 

7 Luctus the mourning foemiuarum of women : — Luctus, nom, s, 
luctus, us, m. 4: Foeuiinarum, g. pi, foemina, ae, f. 1. 

8 Sonitu hy the somid tuba? of a trumpet : — Sonitu, ab, s. sonitus, 
us, m.4: — Tubas, g.s, tuba, ae, f. 1. 

9 Ortus the rising amicitiae of friendship : — Orttis, nom, s, ortus, us, 
m. 4: — Amicitiae, g.s, amicitia, ae, f. 1, 

10 Casu by a fall nivis of snow: — Casu, ab, s. casus, us, m.4 : — Ni- 
vis, g, s, nix, vis, f. 3. 

11 Agitatio the motion fiuctuum of the waves: — Agitatio, nom, s, 
agitatio, onis, f. 3: — Fluciiium, g. pi, rluctu.s, us, m.4. 

12 Nurutfrtim the number seuatorum of senators :— Numerum, ac.s. 
numerus, i, m. % ; — Seuatorum, g, pi, senator, oris, in. 3. 

13 Dolor the pain axXnwm of the joints: — Dolor, nom s. dolor, oris, 
m.3: — Artuum, g. pi. artus, us, m.4, it makes ubus in the ab, pi. 
See Edwards's, or Mavor's Eton Notes, and Ruddimau's Grammar. 

14 Lusus the sport naturae of nature : — Lusus, nom, s. lusus, us, 
m. 4: — Naturae, g, s, nature, ae, f. 1. 

IRREGULAR NOUNS, &C. 

1 Sagittam an arrow arcus of the bow ;— Sagittam, ac. s, sagitta, ae, 

f. 1 : — Arcus, g. s. arcus, us, m. 4. It makes urcubus in the d. and 
ab.pl. See Mavor's Eton Gr., and Ruddiman's : it is sometimes of 
the second declension. 

2 Manus a hand pueri of a boy: — Manus, nom, s, manus, us, f. 4: 
— Pueri, g. s. puer, eri, m. 2, 

3 Cornibus with the horns tauri of a bull ;— Comibus, ab, pi. in- 
declinable in the s. cornua, urn, see Eton Notes : — Tauri, g, s, tau- 
rus, i, m. 2. 

4 Domus the house fratris of a brother : — Domus, nom, s. domus, 
fcs, f. 4 ; also declined domus, i, m. 2. See Mavor's Notes to Eton 
Grammar, p. 70 ; aud Ruddimau's under this declension: — Fratris, 

g, 8. frater, ris, m. 3. 

5 Specubus to the dens ferarum of wild beasts : — Specubus, d, pi. 
specus, us, in. 4: — Ferarum, g, pi. (era, ae, f. 1. 

6 Rami the branches quercus of an oak : — Rami, nom. pi. ramus, i, 
m. 2 :— Quercus, g. s, quercus, us, f. 4. It makes ubus in the d. 
and ab, pi. See Mavor's Eton Notes, &c. 



23 



NOUNS OF THE FIFTH DECLENSION, &c. 



1 Auctores rerum 




2 Acies falcis 




3 Spes salutis 




4 Auribus regis 


Nep. 


5 Spem veniae 


Hor. 


6 Lucius Tarquinius Superbus 


Eut. 


7 Species oris 




8 Titus Q-uintius dictator 


Eut. 


9 Lucretiae patrem 


Eut. 


10 Equitatus hostium.* 


Nep. 



IRREGULAR NOUNS, &C 

1 Soror uxoris 

2 Filius Cimonis Nep. 
S Diebus Virgilii 

4 Parentes mulieris 

5 Antiquitate generis Nep. 

6 Dignitas tribunorum. Eut. 

How do you know when a noun is of the fifth declension ? In 
those words which have a g. pi., what do you annex to the radical 
word to form it? also the dative, &c. ? 

Which syllable is accented in Auctores? (Example 1.) Which in 
patrem? (Example 9.) 



* The pupil, now understanding the regular inflection of nouns, 
will with ease read again the regular examples to each declension. 
After this second reading of the regular nouns, he may proceed to 
construe and parse the irregular nouns under each declension; or the 
irregular nouns might be omitted till the inflection of regular verbs 
be known. This must he left to the judicious instructor, who will 
best determine which method is to be preferred. 



24 



THE CONSTRUING AND PAUSING OF NOUNS IN THE FIFTH 
DECLENSION, &C. 

1 Auctores the authors rerum of things ;— Auctores, worn. pi. auctor, 
oris, m. 3 : — Rerum, g. pi. res, ei, f. 5. 

Note. Very few words in the fifth declension have a plural num- 
ber. See Mavor's Notes to the Eton Grammar, and Ruddiman's. 

2 Acies the edge falcis of a sickle: — Acies, nom. s. acies, ei, f. 5 : — 
Falcis, g. s. fate, cis, f. 3. 

3 Spes the hope salutis of safety ; — Spes, nom. s. tpes, ei, f. 5 : — 
Salutis, g. s. salus, utis, f. 3. 

4 Auribus to the ears regis of the king ; — Auribus, d. pi. aim's, is, 
f. 3: — Regis, g. s. rex, gis, m. 3. 

5 Spem f/ie hope veniae o/ pardon ; — Spem, ac. s. spes, ei, f. 5 : — 
Veniae, g. s. venia, ae, f. l. 

6 Lucius Tarquinius Superbus, Lucius Tarquinius the proud, (the 
name of the 7th and last king of Rome) : — Lucius, nom. s. Lucius, 
i, m.2: — Tarquinius, nom. s. Tarquinius, i, m<2: — Superbus, (the 
proud,) nom. s. Superbus, i, m. 2. 

Note. These have no plural number. See Edwards's or Mavor's 
Eton Notes. 

7 Species the form oris of the mouth:— Species, nom. s. species, ei, 
f. 5: — Qn£ g. s. os, ris, n. 3. 

8 Titus Quintius Titus Quintius dictator the dictator : — Titus, nom. 
s. Titws, i, in. 2: — Quintius, nom. s. Quintius, i, m. 2: — Dictator, 
7iom. s. dictator, oris, m. 3. 

9 Patrem the father Lucretiae of Lucrelia: — Patrem, ac, s. pater, 
ris, m. 3: — Lucretiae, g. s. Lucretia, a?, f. 1. 

10 Equitatus the cavalry h ostium of enemies: — Equitatus, nom. s. 
equitatus, (is, m. 4 : — Hostium, g. pi. hostis, is, c. 3. 

IRREGULAR NOUNS, &C. 

1 Soror the sister uxoris of a wife: — Soror, nom. s. soror, oris, f. 3: 
— Uxoris, g. s. uxor, oris, f. 3. 

2 Filius the son Cimonis of Cimon: — Filius, no?n.s. filius, i, m 2 : 
— Cimonis, g. s. Cimow, dnis, m. 3. 

3 Diebns in the days Yirgilii of Virgil: — Diebus, ab.pl. dies, ei, 
m.5: — Virgilii, g.s. VirgiSiws, i, m. c 2. 

4 Parentes the parents mulieris of a woman: — Parentes, ac. pi. pa- 
rens, tis, c. 3 : — Mulieris, g, s. mnlier, eris, f. 3. 

5 Antiquitate by the antiquity generis of the family :— Antiquitate, 
ab. s. antiquitas, atis, f . 3 : — Generis, g.s. genus, eris, n. 3. 

6 Dignitas the dignity tribunorum of the tribunes : — Dignitas, nom. 
s, dignitas, atis, f. 3 : — Tribunorum, g, pi. tribunus, i, m. 2. 



25 



SOME IRREGULARITIES IN NOUNS NOT PREVIOUSLY 
NOTICED. 

The genitive plural of the four first declensions is sometimes 
contracted. 

1 Pater Deum 

2 Divitiis agricolum 

3 Reipublicae procuratio Nep. 

4 Religionem jurisjurandi Cass. 

5 Morte patrisfamilias Cic. 

Some nouns have no singular: they are then declined like the plu- 
rals of their respective declensions. 

1 Lux Caelorum 

2 Mcenibus urbis 

3 Gloria majorum 

4 Armorum fulgor Mor. 

5 Castris hostium 

6 Amor divitiarum 

7 Fratris liberos 

8 Ope precum 

9 Idlbus Januarii Cms. 
10 Kalendis Januarii SaL 

A noun derived from a proper name, and denoting extraction, is 
called a Patronymic noun. Patronymic names of men end in des, 
and of women in is, as, or ne. 

1 Heros Priam ides Helenus Virg. 

. 2 iEacidoe telo Virg. 

3 Cassandra Priameide Ov. 

4 iEetias Medea Ov. 

5 Nerine Galatea Virg* 

6 Nereidum matri Virg. 

What case is sometimes contracted ? Give an example. Decline 
respublica, jasjurandum, &c. 

How are nouns that have no singular declined ? Decline arnia, 
opis, &c. 

What are patronymic nouns? In what do the patronymic names 
of men end ? Of women ? Decline JEacides. 



26 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF SOME IRREGULAR 
NOUNS, &C. 

1 Pater the father Deum of the Gods ;— Pater, nom. s. pater, ris, 
m. 3: — Deum, g. pi. contracted for Deorum, Dews, i, m. 2. 

2 Divitiis with the riches agricolurn of farmers: — Divitiis, ah.pl 
divitia?, arum, f. 1 ; — Agricolurn, g. pi, contracted for agricolarum, 
agricola, ae, c. 1. 

3 Procuratio the administration reipublieae of the commonwealth : — 
Procuratio, nom.s. procuratio, onis, f. 3: — Reipublic«e, g. s. respub- 
lica, g. reipublieae, ac. rempublicam, f. 5 and 1. 

4 Religionem the reverential fear jurisjurandi of an oath: — Reli- 
gionem, ac. s. religio, onis, f. 3 : — Jurisjurandi, g. s. jusjuranduwa, 
i, n. 3 and 2. 

5 Morte by the death patrisfamilias of the father of a family: — 
Mortc, ab. s. mors, tis, f. 3 : — Patrisfamilias, g. s. paterfamilias, g. 
patrisfamilias, m. 3 and i :— It is also declined nom. Paterfamilias, 
g. patrisfamiliae, d. patrifamiliae, &c. 

1 Lux the light caelorum of the heavens: — Lux, nom. s. hue, cis, f, 3 : 
— Caelorum, g. pi. caelum, i, n. 2 : it is in the plural caeli, caelorum, 
m. 2 : like the plural of dominus. 

2 Mcenibus by the walls urbis of the city: — Mcenibus, ab.pl. mania, 
um, n. 3 : — Ui bis, g. s. urbs, is, f. 3. 

3 Gloria the glory majorum of ancestors: — Gloria, nom. s. gloria, ae, 
f. 1 : — Majorum, g. pU majors, um, m. 3. 

4 Fulgor the glittering armorum of arms: — Fulgor, nom. s, fulgor, 
. oris, m. 3: — Armorum, g. pi. : it has no singular, but in the plural 

it is arma, orum, n. 2, like the plural of regnum. 

5 Castris by the camps hostium of enemies: — Castris, ab. pi, castra, 
drum, n. 2 : — Hostium, g. pi. hostw, is, c. 3. 

6 Amor the love divitiarum of riches : — Amor, nom. s> amor, oris, 
in. 3: — Divitiarum, g. pi. divitia?, arum, f . 1 : it has no singular. 

7 Liberos the children fratris of a brother : — Liberos, ac. pi. : it has 
no s. but is declined in the pi. like magister. Liberi, drum, m. 2 : 
—Fratris, g. s. f 'rater , ris, m. 3. 

8 Ope by the power precum of prayers : — Ope, ab. s. : it has only 3 
cases in the s., g. opis, ac. opem, ab. ope. The pi. is regular, as ope«s, 
um, ibus, &c. : — Precum, g. pi.: it is declined exactly like opis. 

9 Idibus on the ides Januarii of January, (or on the 1 3th of January ;) 
— Idibus, ab. pi. Idus, uum, ibus, m. 4. no s. Januarii, g. s. Janu- 
arys, i, m. 2. 

10 Kalendis on the calends Januarii of January, (or on the 1st of Ja- 
nuary ;)— Kalendis, ab. pi. Kalends, arum, f. 1. no singular :— Janu- 
arii, g. s. Januarius, i, m. 2. 

1 Heros the hero Helenus Helenus, Priam ides the son of Priam : — 
Heros,wom. s. Heros, ois, m. 3: — Helenus, nom. s. Helenus, i, m. 2 : — 
Piiamides, nom, s. Priamides, is, m. 3. See Edwards's, and Mavor's 
Notes on the Eton Grammar under the first declension. 

2 Telo with the sword iEacidae of the son, or grandson of Macus, that 
is Achilles : — Telo, ab. s. telurw, i, n. 2 : — jEacidae, g, s, iEacides, ae, 
m. 1. d. ae, ac. en, &c. 



27 

3 Cassandrlt by Cassandra Pi iameide the daughter of Priam ,♦— 
Cassandra, ab, s. Cassandra, ae, f. lr—Priameide, ab. s. Priameis, 
Wis, f. 3. 

4 Medea Medea, JEetias the daughter of JEetia:— Medea, nom. s. 
Medea, se, f. 1 : — ^etias, nom. s. JEetias, ados, f. 1, or Metis, Xdos, 
f.3. 

5 Galatea Galatea Nerine the daughter of Nereus ; — Galatea, v. s. 
Galatea* a?, f. 1 : — Nerine, v. s, Nerine, es, f. 1. See Eton Notes 
under first declension : it i3 also of the third declension, Nereis, 
i'dis, f. 3 :— the pi. is Nereides, ura. 

6 Matri to the mother Nereidum of the Nereids, or to Doris who is 
the mother of the Nereids: — Matri, d. s. mater, ris, f. 3 : — Nerei- 
dum, g. pi. Nereis, idis, f. 3.— plural Nereides, una. 



Use of the Dictionary. 

The Dictionary* should now come in use. 

The dictionary is to show the signification of words, in 
their most simple form, and the Grammar, the irflection 
of those words ; and, therefore, both are necessary for the 
acquisition of a language. Before a word can be found in 
the dictionary, all the terminating syllables annexed to the 
radical word by declining, must be cast off, or changed 
for the nominative case in nouns, adjectives, and pro- 
nouns, and for the first person singular of the present 
tense indicative mood in verbs. 

The word being cleared of inflections will be readily 
found in the dictionary, by looking for the three first let- 

* A good Dictionary for a beginner is Tyronis Thesaurus, or En- 
tick's New Latin-English Dictionary, revised by W. Crakelt. This 
will be sufficient for the commencement ; or, if it should be desir- 
able, the English part, called the Englislt-Latin Dictionary, may be 
had with the Tyronis Thesaurus. In these two volumes, bound to- 
gether, the student will find every thing he wants, at least for 
some years after his commencement. The price of both, bound to- 
gether, is about 10s. 6d. 

There has recently appeared a new Tyronis Thesaurus, by the Rev. 
J. W- Niblock. This work contains the irregular preterperfects, 
participles, &c, and gives the words from which they are de- 
rived. When the Addenda are embodied in the text, as will no 
doubt be the case in a second edition, this work will be by far the 
best for general use ; but particularly for beginners. 

D 2 



28 

ters at the top of the page, and down by the side for suc- 
ceeding letters. 

If you wish to know the signification of statvas, you con- 
sider what case ends in as. In nouns it can only be the 
accusative plural ; as being removed, for a the nominative 
singular you will have statua: you look for the letter S, 
and find STA at the top of the page, and down by the 
side for the following letters till you find statua, se, f. 1, a 
statue, an image, &c. 

If you wish to look out regione, you must remember 
the only cases that end in e are the vocative singular of 
the second declension, and the ablative singular of the 
third and fifth. It may come from Regionus, Regio, or 
Regiones. You look in the dictionary, and the first word 
you find is Regio, onis, a region, country, &c. the ablative 
singular of which is regione, the word required. 

This, with the adjective given, makes perfect sense. 
Therefore, you may be sure you are right, especially as 
you can find no such word as Regionus or Regiones, 

When the pupil looks out a word in his dictionary, he 
should take particular notice whether the genitive case in- 
crease long or short, or how the vowel is marked in the 
increasing syllable ; thus, regio, onis is long, and homo, 
znis, is short. This will save much subsequent trouble. 

What is the use of the dictionary ? What the grammar? Describe 
the method of looking out words. 
What should be observed respecting the quantity of syllables. 



29 
CHAP. II.— OF ADJECTIVES. 



An adjective denotes the quality of a noun, or shows of 
what sort or kind it is : as, I have a sweet apple. Here 
sweet is an adjective, because it shows the quality, sort, or 
kind of the apple. An adjective may also be known by 
its making sense with the word thing ; as a sweet, bitter, 
white, black thing. Here sweet, bitter, white, and black, 
are adjectives, because they will make sense by being 
joined with the word thing. 

ADJECTIVES* DECLINED AFTER THE FIRST AND SECOND 
DECLENSIONS. 

1 Magnus numerus. f Secunda fortuna. Nep. 

2 Komanum imperium. Eut. 

3 Trecentas statuas. Tota regione. Nep. 

4 Summa sequitate. Nep. 

5 Nulla spes salutis. Nep, 

6 Humana memoria. Nulla die. Eut. 

7 Nocturno tempore. Exiguam urbem. Eut. 

8 Mali facinoris. Exigua manus. Nep. 

9 Fjdicem cursum. Magna contentio. Nep. 

10 Suorum civium. Perpetua imperia. Nep. 

11 Loco idoneo. Nep. 

What is an adjective ? What is a word called which denotes the 
quality or sort of a thing? Which is the adjective in these sentences? 
A good boy. A diligent scholar. How do yon kuow that good and 
diligent are adjectives ? What added to the radical word forms the 
g. f. s. g. pi. and ab. pi.? 

For the parsing of a noun, see p. 13. 

* It is a very useful exercise for the pupil to decline an adjective 
and noun together: thus, Singular nom. Magnus numerus a great 
number, g. Magni numeri of a great number, &c. Singular nom. 
Summa cequitas the greatest equity, g. Summce aquitatis of the 
greatest equity, &c. 

t Though the signification of the adjective is put immediately 
after it, — in construing, the adjective and substantive must be taken 
together. You must not say Magnus a great numerus number, but 
always put the adjective and noun together, and say Magnus nume- 
rus a great number: Secunda fortuna a favourable fortune; Roma* 
num imperium the Romau empire, &c. 

D 3 



30 



ETYMOLOGICAL PARSING TABLE FOR AN ADJECTIVE. 

is an adjective of the positive — comparative — superlative 

degree ; — and of — terminations ; declined like — of the — number — 
case — gender. It is declined thus : Singular nom. — g. — d. — ac. 
— v. — ab. — : Plural, nom. — g. — d. — ac. — v. — ab. — . Example. 
Magnus is an adjective of the positive state and of three terminations, 
declined like Bonus: of the singular number, nominative case, mascu- 
line gender. It is declined thus: Singular nom. Magnus, Magna, 
Magnum, g. Magni, Magna, Magni, %c.' Plural, nom. Magni, Mag- 
na, Magna, g. Magnorum, Magnarum, Magnorum, $c. 

The pupil should be taught to go quickly through this table, as soon 
as an adjective is given him to parse. 

THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF ADJECTIVES. 

1 Magnus a great humerus:* — Magnus, nom.s. m. magnws, a, urn, 
adj.: — Numerics, i, m. °2, nom. s. — Secunda a favourable fortuna: — 
Secunda, nom. s. f. secundws, a, did, adj.: — Fortuna, a?, f. 1, nom. s. 

2 Romanum the Roman imperium : — Romanum, nom. s. n. Roma- 
nws, a, urn, adj. : — Imperit/m, i, n. 2, nom. s. 

3 Trecentas three hundred statuas : — Trecentas, ac. pi. f. trecenti, 
se, a, adj. : — Statuas, ac. pi, statue, a?, f. 1. — Tot& with the whole re- 
gione: — Tota, ab. s. f. totws, a, urn, g. totlus, d. toti, adj.: — Re- 
gione, ab. s. regio, onis, f. 3. 

4 SumjTia with the greatest Eequitate: — Summa, ab. s. f. summws, 
a> \n,adj.: — jEquitate, ab. s. aequitas, atis, f. 3. 

5 Kiilla no spes salutis : — Nulla, nom. s. f. nullus, a, um, g. lus, 
adj. : — Spes, ei, f. 5, nom. s. :— Salutis, g. s. salus, utis, f. 3. 

6 Humana the human memoria : — Humana, nom. s. f. humanws, a, 
um, adj. : — Memoria, ae, f. 1, nom. s. — Nulla in no die : — Nulla, ab. s. 
f. nullws, a, um, g. Ius, adj. : — Die, ab. s. dies, ei, f. 5. 

7 Nocturno by night tempore: — Nocturno, ab. s. n. nocturnus, a, 
um, adj. : — Tempore, ab. s. tempos, oris, n 3. — Exiguam a little ur- 
l>em : — Exiguam, ac. s. f. exigu«s, a, um, adj. ;— Urbem, ac. s. urbs, 
is, f. 3. 

8 Mali of a bad facinoris : — Mali, g. s. n. mains, a, um, adj. : — Fa- 
cinoris, g. s. facinus, oris, n. 3. — Exigua a small manus: — Exigua, 
nom. s. r. exiguws, a, um, adj. : — Manus, us, f. 4, nom. s. 

9 Felicem a happy cursum : — Feiicem, ac.s. m. t'elix, icis, adj. : — 
Cursum, ac. s. cursws, us, hi. 4. — Magna a great contentio : — Magna, 
nom. s. f. magnws, a, um, adj. : — Contentio, onis, f. 3, nom. s. 

1 Suorum of his own civium : — Suorum, g.pl. m, suws, a, um, adj. : 
— Civium, g. pi. civis, is, c. 3. — Perpetua perpetual imperial — Per- 
petua, nom. pi. n. perpetuus, a, um, adj. : — Imperia, nom. pi. im- 
perium, i, u, 2. 

11 Idoneo in a proper loco ; — Idoneo, ab. s. m. idonews, a, um, adj.: 
— Loco, ab.s. locus, i, m. 2, pi. loci, m. and loca, n. 



* In future, the pupil will look out in his dictionary the significa- 
tion of the nouns. 



31 



ADJECTIVES DECLINED AFTER THE THIRD 
DECLENSION, &C. 

1 Omnis homo. Omnis foemina 

2 Omne caelum. Omnes cives Nep. 
8 Ingens bos. Spes duplex 

4 Brevi tempore 

£ Morsihus saevis canum Vlmd. 

6 Quale praemium Nep. 

7 Pari felicitate Nep. 

8 Ingenti turba Eut. 

9 Terrestres exercitus Nep, 

10 NullTns felicis arboris 

11 Tristia vulnera 

12 Gmnes tres status 

13 Du5bus signis Nep. 

14 Fili us vestal is virginis Eut. 

15 Brevis fabula Msopi. Phasd. 

16 Prudenti consilio. Celeri auxilio. Phced. 

IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 

1 Agrum quatuor jugerum Eut. 

2 Duae partes 

3 Duo signa 

4 Ambae manus 

5 Tria verba 

6 Singulae horae 

7 Bini fratres. 

How do you know that is an adjective ? What do you annex 

to the radical word to form the ablative plural, genitive plural, &c? 

THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF ADJECTIVES, &C. 

1 Omnis every homo: — Omnis, nom. s. in. omnis, is, adj. : — Homo, 
inis, c. 3, nom. s. 

Omnis every fcemina : — Omnis, nom. s. f. adj. : — Foemina, a?, f. 1, 
nom. s. 

% Omne all caelum: — Omne, nom. s. n. omnis, is, adj. : — Caelum, 
i, n. g, nom. s. 

Omnes all cives : — Omnes, nom. pi. c. : — Cives, nom. pi. civis, is, 
c. 3. 

3 Ingens a great bos : — Ingens, nom. s. c. ingens, tis, adj. : — Bos, 
vis, c. 3, nom. s. 



34 

Duplex a double spes : — Duplex, nom. s. f. duplex, icis, adj.: — 
Spes, ei, f. 5, nom. s. 

4 Brevi in a short tempore: — Brevi, ab. s. n. breWs, is, adj.: — 
Tempore, ab. s. tempus, oris, n. 3. 

5 Saevis with savage morsibus canum : — Saevis, ab. pi. m. saevus, a, 
urn, adj.;— Morsibus, ab.pl. morsus, lis, m. 4: — Canum, g. pi. cam's, 
is, c. 3. For the formation of the g. pi. see page 19. 

6 Quale what praemium ; — Quale, nom. s. n. qualis, is, adj. ;— Prae- 
mium, i, n. 2, nom. s. 

7 Pari with like felicitate : — Pari, ab. s. f. par, ris, adj. : — Felici- 
tate, ab. s. felicitas, atis, f. 3. 

8 Ingenti with a great turb& : — Tngenti, ab. s. f. ingens, tis, adj. : 
— Turba, ab. s. turba, ae, f. 1. 

9 Terrestres the land exercitus : — Terrestres, nom.pl. m. terres- 
tvis, is, adj.: — Exercitus, nom.pl. exercitus, us, m. 4. 

10 Nullius of no felicis/ruitf/uZ arboris : — Nullius, g. s. f. nullus, a, 
urn, g. lus, adj. ;— Felicis, g. s. f. felix, Icis, adj.: — Arboris, g. s. ar- 
bor, oris, f. 3. 

11 Tristia severe vulnera:— Tristia, nom. pi. n. tristis, is, adj. : — 
Vuluera, nom, pi. vulnus, eris, n. 3. 

12 Omnes all tres three status ; — Omnes, nom. pi. m. adj. : — Tres, 
nom.pl. m. tres, ium, adj. : — Status, nom. pi. status, us, m. 4. 

13 Duobus with two signis: — Duobus, ab. pi. n. duo, a?, o, adj.: — 
Signis, ab.pl. signww, i, n. 2. 

14 Filius vestalis of the vestal virginis : — Filius, i, m. 2, nom. *. : — 
Vestalis, g. s. f. vestahs, is, adj.: — Virginis, g. s. virgo, inis, f. 3. 

15 Brevis a short fabula /Esopi : — Brevis, wow. s. f. brevis, is, adj. : 
— Fabula, w. f. 1, nom. s. : — jEsopi, g. s. jEsopus, i, m. 2. 

16 Prudenti to a prudent consilio : — Prudenti, d. s. n. prudens, tis, 
adj. : — Consilio, d. s. consilium, i, n. 2. 

Celeri with quick auxilio : — Celeri, ab. s. n. celer, is, adj. : — Aux- 
ilio, ab. s. auxilium, i, n. 2. 

IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 

1 Agrum quatuor of four jugerum :— Agrum, ac. s. ager, ri, m. 2 : 
— Quatuor, adj. indeclinable : — Jugerum, g.pl. jugera, urn, n.3, only 
in the plural, from juger, eris. 

2 Duae two partes : — Duae, nom. pi. f. duo, ae, o, adj. : — Partes, 
nom.pl. pars, tis, f. 3. 

3 Duo two signa : — Duo, nom. pi. n. duo, ae, o, adj. : — Signa, 
nom. pi. signuw, i, n. 2. 

4 Amba? both manus: — Ambae, nom.pl. f. ambo, ae, o, adj. ;— Ma- 
nus, nom. pi. manus, us, f. 4. 

h 5 Tria three verba: — Tria, nom. pi. n. tres, ium, adj. :— Verba, 
nom. pi. verbum, i, n. 2. 

6 Singula? every horae : — Singulae, nom. pi. f. singulus, a, una, adj.: 
— Horae, nom. pi. bora, ae, f. 1. 

7 Bini torn fratres : — Bini, nom. pi. in. bin*, a?, a, adj* :— Fratres, 
nom. pi. frater, ris, m. 3. 



33 



THE COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

All comparatives are declined after the third declension 
like Mclior, and superlatives after the first and second de- 
clensions like Bonus. 

1 Victoria gratior Eut. 

2 Tristissimum vulnus 

3 Turpissima fraude 

4 Durissimis conditionibus Eut. 

5 Leo vastioris corporis Phced. 

6 Nobilissimi Collatini uxorem Eut. 

7 Potentioris hominis Phced. 

8 Tristioris vulneris 

9 Tenuissim& valetudine. Cczs. 



IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 

1 Maximo dolore Phced. 

2 Tarquinius junior Eut. 

3 Majus imperium Nep. 

4 Optimorum magistrorum 

5 Hispaniam citeriorem Cces. 

6 Pejore statu 

7 Positio humillima 

8 Magls dubia res 

9 Maxime dubium exemplum. 

How is the comparative degree formed? Give an example. 
How is the superlative degree formed? How are comparative 
adjectives declined ? 
How superlatives? 

How do you know when an adjective is irregular ? 
What adjectives are compared by Magis and Maxime ? 



34 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF COMPARATIVE ADJEC- 
TIVES, &C. 

1 Gratior a more pUasant victoria : — Gratior, nom. s, f. gratior, 
oris, comp. from gratus ; — Victoria, se, f. 1, nom, s, 

2 Tristissimum a most severe villous ; — Tristissimum, nom, 8, n. 
tristissimws, a, urn, sup, from tristis : — Vulnws, £ris, n. 3, nom, s. 

3 Turpissima icith the most shameful fraude : — Turpissima, ab. s. f. 
turpissimus, a, um, sup, from turpis: — Fraude, ab. s, fraus, dis, f. 3. 

4 Durissimis on the hardest couditionibus : — Durissimis, ab, pi, f. 
durissimws, a, urn, sup, from durus : — Conditionibus, ab. ph conditio, 
onis, f. 3. 

5 Leo vastioriso/ a greater corporis:— Leo, onis, m.3, nom,s,: — 
Vastioris, g, s, n. vastior, oris, comp. from vastus :— Corporis, g, s, 
corpws, oris, n. 3. 

6 Uxorem nobilissimi of the most noble Collatini : — Uxorem, ac, s, 
uxor, oris, f. 3: — Nobilissimi, g, s. m. nobilissimws, a, um, sup, from 
nobilis : — Collatini, g. s. Collatings, i, m. 2. 

7 Potenlioris of a more powerful hominis : — Potentioris, g, s, m. 
potentior, oris, comp, from potens : — Hominis, g. s, homo, inis, c. 3. 

8 Tristioris of a more severe vulneris : — Tristioris, g, s, n. tristior, 
oris, comp, from tristis : — Vulneris, g. s. vulnws, eris, n. 3. 

9 Tenuissima in the weakest, or in a very delicate valetudine : — Te- 
nuissima, ab, s, f. tenuissimws, a, um, sup, from tenuis : — Valetudine, 
ab, s, valetudo, inis, f. 3. 

IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 

1 Maximo with the greatest dolore : — Maximo, ab, s, m. maxima, 
a, um, sup, from magnus ; — Dolore, ab. s. dolor, oris, m. 3. 

2 Tarquinius junior the younger : — Tarquiniws, i, m. 2, worn, s, : — 
Junior, nom, s, m. junior, oris, comp. fromjuvenis. 

3 Majus a greater imperium : — Majus, nom, s. n. major, us, g, oris, 
comp, from magnus: — Imperiwm, i, n. 2, nom. s. 

4 Optimorum of the best magistrorum : — Optimorum, g. pi, m. op- 
timum, a, um, sup, from bonus : — Magistrorum, g. pi, magister, ri, 
m. 2. 

5 Hispaniam citeriorem the nearer :— Hispaniam, ac, s. Hispanic, 
ae, f. 1; — Citeriorem, ac, s. f. citerior, oris, comp, from xiter, ra, 
rum. 

6 Pejore in a worse statu :— Pejore, ab, s. m. pejor, orif , comp, from 
mains : — Statu, ab. s, status, us, m. 4. 

7 Humillima the lowest positio : — Hnmillima, nom, s, f. humillimus, 
a, um, sup. from humilis : — Positio, onis, f. 3, nom. s, 

8 Magis dubia a more doubtful res: — Magis, adverb : — Dubia, now. 
s, f. dubiws, a, um, comp. :— Res, ei, f. 5, nom. s. 

9 Maxime dubium the most doubtful exemplum : — Maxime, ad- 
verb: — Dubium, notn, s. n. dubiws, a, um, sup. : — Exemplum, i, n. 2, 
nom, s. 



35 
CHAP. III.— OF PRONOUNS. 



A Pronoun (pro for, nomen a name or noun) is a word 
used instead of a noun : as, John is a good Boy, he always 
gets his Lesson, and minds what is said to him. Here he, 
his, and him, are pronouns, being put instead of the noun 
John. 

1 Hie homo.* Hoec foemina 

2 Hoc regnum. Hie dies 

3 Exortus hujus diei. Vir qui. Foemina quae 

4 Hoc tumulto. Eas regiones. Negotium quod 

5 Huic Miltiadi. Quo casu. Negotia quae 

6 Cujus victorias. Ego qui. Nos qui 

7 Ipsum hoc membrum. Tu qui 

8 Hoc responso oraculi. Vir quern Nep. 

9 Virginii cujusdam. Viri quos 

10 IncSlas ejus insiilae. Mulier quam 

11 Voluntate eorum. Mulieres quas 

12 Nostrates philosophi. Nostratia verba Cic. 

13 Ipsarum urbium. Mulieres quarum 

14 Cujus ratio. Locum quendam Nep* 

15 Adventu horum. Anime mi Ter. 

16 Ipse ego, or Ipse egomet. Tute ipse. Ter. 

What are pronouns? Which is the pronoun in this sentence, I 
read ? What is I used instead of? How do you know J is a pronoun? 
What is the genitive plural of Hie, of Is, and of Idem, fyc. §c. ? 

THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF PRONOUNS, &C. 

1 Hie | this homo : — Hie, pron. worn. s. m. hie, &c. : — Homo, nn. 
Haec this foemina: — Haec, pron. nom, s. f. hie, &c: — Foemina, nn. 

2 Hoc this regnum : — Hoc, pron* nom. s, n. hie : — Regnum, nn. 
Hie this dies :— Hie, pron, nom. s. m. hie : — Dies, nn. 

* Pronouns may be parsed by the table for adjectives, omitting 
the degrees of comparison. They may also be declined with the 
noun, as singular nom. hie homo this man, g. hujus hominis of this 
man, &c. Singular nom. Ipsum hoc membrum this very member, g. 
ipsius hujus membri of this very member, d. ipsi huic membro to this 
very member, &c. 

t The pronoun is separated from the noun, that the youngest pu- 
pil may know to which word the English belongs : but in construing, 
it must always, like the adjective, be united with it, as hie homo this 
man ; not hie this, homo man, Sec. 



36 

3 Exortus hujus of this diei : — Exortus, nn. : — Hujus, piwn. g. s, m. 
Lie : — Diei, nn. dies. — Vir qui who : — Vir, nn. : — Qui, pron. nom, s. 
m. : — Foemina quae who: — Foemina, nn. : — Quae, pron, nom, s, f. qui, 

4 Hoc by this tumulto : — Hoc, pron, ab, s. m. hie: — Tumulto, nn. 
tumultus. — Eas those regioues :— Eas, pron. ac. pi. f. is : — Regiones, 
nn. regio. — Negotium quod which : — Negotiant, nn. : — Quod, pron. 
nom. s. n. qui. 

5 Huic to this Miltiadi: — Huic, pron. d. s. m. hie: — Miltiadi, nn. 
Miltiades. — Quo by what casu : — Quo, pron. ab. s. in. qui : — Casu, 
nn. casus. — Negotia quae which ; — Negotia, nn. negotium : — Quae, 
pron. nom. pi, u. qui. 

6 Cujus of which victoriae : — Cujus ; pron. g. s, f. qui : — Victoria, 
nn. victoria. — Ego I qui icho : — Ego, pron. nom. s. : — qui, pron. nom. s. 
— Nos we qui who : — Nos, pron, nom. pi, ego : — Qui, pron. nom, pi, 

7 Ipsum hoc this very ruembrum : — Ipsura, pron. ac, s, n. ipse : — 
Hoc, pron. ac, s. n. hie :— Membrum, nu. — Tu thou qui who: — Tu, 
pron. nom, s. : — Qui, pron, nom. s. 

8 Hoc by this respouso oraculi : — Hoc, pron.ab.s. n. hie: — Re- 
sponsojnn. responsum : — Oraculi, nn. oraculum. — Vir quem whom : 
— Vir, nn. : — Quem, pron. ac. s. m. qui. 

9 Cujusdam of a certain Virginii : — Cujusdam, pron. g, s. m. qui- 
dam: — Virginii, nn. Virginius. — Viri quos tir/iom ; — Viri, nn. vir: — 
Quos, pron. ac. pi, m. qui. 

10 Iucolas ejus of that insula? : — Incolas, nn. incola : — Ejus, pron, 
g. s, f. is :-.-Insulae, nn. insula. — Mulier quam whom: — Mulier, nn.: 
— Quam, pron, ac. s. f. qui. 

11 Voluntate eorum of them: — Voluntate, nn. voluntas: — Eorum, 
pron. g, pi. in. is. — iNiulieres quas whom .—Mulieres, nn. mulier : — 
Quas, pron, ac. pi. f. qui. 

12 Nostrates our own country philosophi : — Nostrates, nom. pi. m. 
nostras, atis, adj. pron.: — Philosophi, nn. philosophus. — Nostratia, 
our own country verba : — Nostratia, n07n.pl, n. nostras, atis, adj. pron. : 
— Verba, nn. verbum. 

13 Ipsarum of those urbium : — Ipsarum, pron. g. pi. f. ipse : — Ur- 
bium, nn.'urbs. — Mulieres qnarum ivhose or of whom: — Mulieres, nn. 
mulier : — Quarum, pron. g. pi. f. qui. 

14 Cujus of which ratio : — Cujus, pron. g. s, f. qui : — Ratio, nn. — 
Quendam some or some certain locum : — Quendam, pron. ac. s. m. 
quidam, &c: — Locum, nn. locus. 

15 Adventu horum of them: — Adventu, nn. adventus : — Horum, 
pron, g, pi. m. hie. — Mi anime O my life, soul, O my dear ; — Mi, pron, 
v. s. mews, a, um :— Anime, nn. animus. 

16 Ipse ego or ipse egomet / myself: — Ipse, pron. nom.s. m. ipse, 
a, um : — Ego, pron. nom. s. m. ego-met. Egomet is the same, only 
metis added; asg\ meimet; d. mihimet, &c. : so, tumet or tutemet, 
tuimet, suimet. — Tate ipse thou thyself :—Tu\e, pron. nom, s, te is 
only used in the nom. singular : — Ipse, as above. 



37 



CHAP. IV.— OF VERBS. 



A Verb is the chief word in every sentence, and is derived 
from verbum a word: it signifies to be, to do, or to suffer. 
In this sentence, "John walks," walks is a verb, because it 
signifies to do something, or denotes an action ; and to 
write, to read, and to run, are verbs because they signify 
to do something. 

Verbs are of three kinds, Active, Passive, and Neuter. 

1. A verb active {activum) is that which declares such 
an action of its nominative case as will affect some object, 
as, I love him, I 'guide them. 

2. A verb passive (passivum) expresses a passion or 
suffering of its nominative before it, as, amor, I am loved, 
dirigor, I am guided. 

3. A verb neuter (neutrum) generally expresses neither 
action nor passion of its nominative case, but a state, or 
posture ; but if it denote action, it is without any object, 
as, dormio I sleep, curro I run, ambulo I walk. 

An active may be distinguished from a neuter verb thus : 
If the accusative case of a pronoun can be placed next 
after the verb, it is active; if not, it is neuter. 

What is a verb ? Give me an example. How do you know it is a 
verb? What do you call words which denote action ? Which is the 
verb in these sentences? John speaks. I talk to John. The mas- 
ter loves a good boy. He is well. I am attentive. If I be better. 
John was attentive. T am loved, &c. How can you tell a neuter 
from an active verb ? What sort of a verb is to sit, &c. ? 

How do you know the conjugation of a verb ? (See the Grammar.) 
Tn the first conjugation, is the vowel \ long or short before re of the 
infinitive mood? What are the vowels that come before re of the 
infinitive mood in the 2d, 3d, and 4th conjugation? Are they long 
or short? 



38 

There are three principal parts of a verb, from which 
all other inflections are formed, namely, 1st, the Present, 
2dly, the Preterperfect, and, 3dly, the Supine, accord- 
ing to the following 

TABLE. 



Ind. 



Imp. Subj. 



Inf. 



I. 





i 






1 




u 


| 




£ 


a* 


k 


Am -< 


y -ahum 


-abo 



4 



s 



£ 



ft. £ £ C ^ 

•a, ato -em »drem -are -audi, o, um -cms 
Mon 'to -tbarn -ebo -e, eto -earn -erem -ere -endi, o, um -ens 
Reg -o -ebam -am ~e, \to -am -trem -ire -endi, o, um -ens 
£ l^Aud 4o -itbam 4am -i, xto -iam -irem -ire 'iendi, o, um 4ens 



SUEJ. 



II 



§ Amav -i^ 
g J Monu 4 [ .. 
I] Rex -i>- cram 

w ! Audiv 4 J 



1 



Inf. 



££ 






£ 



•tro 



« 



<s 



-isse 



s • s •» 

*■* ** 

p- f Amat -um^i 

« L Audit -umj 

By the preceding Table the first person singular, in all 
the tenses of any regular verb, is easily found. See Eton 
Grammar, page 2S ; Valpy's, page 3S ; and Ruddiman's, 
page 50. 



How many principal parts are there in every verb? What are they ? 



39 

The same observation that was made respecting the 
noun will refer to the radical part of the verb and its ter- 
mination, viz. The signs of tenses, expressed in English 
chiefly by words placed before the verb, are denoted in 
Latin by a termination annexed to the radical Latin word. 

Thus abam, abas, abat, abamus, abatis, abant, annexed 
to the radical Latin word am, is the same as / did, thou 
didst, he did, fyc. placed before the English word love: thus 

The Latin becomes The English of which is 

Am abam I did love 

— abas Thou didst — 

— abat He did — 

— abamus We did — 

— abatis Ye did — 

— abant They did — 

The same termination abam, abas, annexed to the radi- 
cal part of every other verb of the first conjugation, will 
form the same tense. Thus when the terminations abam, 
&c. are annexed to the Latin radical words salt dance, co- 
git think, &c. they become salt-abam I did dance, cogit- 
abam I did think, cogit-abas thou didst think, &c. If we 
want the preterimperfect tense potential mood, we put 
arem to the end of the radical word am love, or salt dance, 
am-arem I would love, or salt-arem I would dance. 

All the other tenses are formed by annexing to the ra- 
dical word the terminations in the preceding Table. This 
Table of terminations is recommended to the particular 
notice of the pupil ; for, by it, when the present, preter- 
perfect, and supine of any verb are known, which are 
formed as directed in Chap. X. page 76, every inflection 
in all the four conjugations is easily found. The pupil 
has only to be well acquainted with this Table, and most 
of the difficulty with the verbs will be overcome. 

What is the Latin termination which answers to I did, &c. placed 
before the English verb? What tense does arem form when annexed 
to the radical part of any verb? 

Do all verbs of the same conjugation annex the same termination 
to form the same tense? How are other tenses formed? Where 
are these terminations to be found ? What is worthy of particular 
notice ? Why ? Have not all verbs of the same conjugation similar 
terminations ? 

E 2 



40 



ABBREVIATIONS. 

act stands for a verb active. 

neut. . , neuter. 

pass. passive. 

in* irregular. 

def. defective. 

impers impersonal. 

dep. . deponent. 

ind .a verb in the indicative mood* 

imp. * . . . . imperative mood. 

pot. potential mood. 

subj subjunctive mood. 

inf. ; infinitive mood. 

pr present tense. 

preterim preterimperfect tense. 

preter preterperfect tense. 

preterpl preterpluperfect tense. 

fut. future tense. 

1,2, and 3, with an s annexed to them, stand for the^rsf, second, 
and third persons singular, and with pi. the same persons plural. 

part. stands for participle. 

udv adverb. 

conj conjunction. 

prep r preposition. 



41 



THE NEUTER VERB SUM AND ITS PARTS. 



1 Tu es felix 


2 Nos sunius fellces 


3 Rusticus es 


4 Estmihi 


5 Opus est mihi 


6 Hi erunt 


7 Esto brevis 


8 Quis sit 


9 Essemns boni 


10 Se hostem esse 


11 Vita erat 


12 Nihil est moras 


13 Proximus sum egomet m 


14 Id erat nomen. 



The Preterperftct Tense and its Derivatives. 

15 Fuit poteslas 

16 Fuit otiosus 

17 Fuit illi 

18 Miltiades fuit 

19 Haec fuisse 

20 Magnus fuisset labor 

21 Exitium imperio futurum. 

What are the principal parts in the verb sum ? 
What tenses are formed from the preterperfect ? 



Virg. 
Ter. 

Nep. 
Hor. 
Nep. 

Nep. 
Ter. 

Ter. 
Ter. 
Ter. 



Ter* 
Nep. 
Virg. 



ETYMOLOGICAL PARSING TABLE FOR A VERB. 

is a verb — of the — conjugation, because — is — before re of 

the infiuitive mood. In the — mood, — tense, — number, — person. 
From — : the principal part* are . 

Example first : Es is a verb neuter. In the indicative mood pie- 
sent tense singular number second person from Sum. The principal 
parts are Sum, es, fni\ esse, futvrus, to he. 

Example second : Saltabas is a verb active of the first conjugation, 
because a is long before re in the infinitive mood. In the indicative 
m«od preterimperfect tense singular number second person from Salto. 
The principal parts are Salt-o, as, aw, arc, atum } to dance. 



E 3 



42 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF THE VERB SUM, &C. 

1 Tu es thou art felix* : — Tu, pron. nom. s. tu, tui: — Es, ind. pr, 

2 s. sum, es, fni, esse, futurus, neut. to be:— Felix, adj. 

2 Nos sumus we are felices :— Nos, pron. nom. pi. ego, mei : — Su- 
mns, ind.pr. 1 pi. sum, &c. :— Felices, adj. felix, cis. 

3 Es thou art ruslicus: — Es, ind. pr. 2 s. sum, &e.:— Rusticus, nn. 

4 Est there is mihi, to me, or I have: — Est, ind. pr. 3 s. sum, &c. : 
— Mihi, pro;i. d. s. ego, mei. 

5 Opus need e>t is mihi:— Opus, nn. indeclinable:— Est, ind.pr. 

3 s. sum, &c. ; — Mihi, pron. d. s. ego, mei. 

6 Hi these (runt mm// oe ; — Hi, pron. nom. pi. hie, haec, hoc: — 
Erunt, ind.fut. 3 pi. sum, &c. 

7 Esto be thou brevis ■ — Esto, imp. 2 s. sum, &c. : — Brevis, adj. 

8 Quis who sit may be: — Quis, pron. nom. s. qnis, quae, quid or 
quod : — Sit, pot. pr. 3 s. sum, &c. 

9 Essem us we might be boni : — Essemus, pot. preterim. 1 pi. sum, 
&C. : — Boni, adj. 

10 Se that he esse mvjs hostem : — Se, pron. ac s. sui, kc. : — Esse, 
inf. pr. or preterim. sum, ike. : — Hostem, nn. hostis. 

11 Vita erat was: — Vita, nn:— Erat, ind preterim. 3s. sum, &c. 

12 Est {there) is nihil morae : — Est, ind, pr. 3 s. sum, dec. ; — Nihil, 
nn. indeclinable :— Morae, nn. mora 

13 Egomet sum am proximus mihi : — Egomet, pron. nom. s. ego- 
met, g. meimet : — Sum, ind. pr. 1 s. &lc. : — Proximus, adj. 

14 Id erat W7as n^men: — Id. pron. nom. s. n. is, ea, id: — Erat, ind, 
preterim. 3 s. sum, &c. : — Nonien, nn. 

15 Potestas fuit was: — Potestas, nn. : — Fuit, ind. preter. 3s. sum, 
&c. 

16 Fuit he hath been otiosus : — Fuit, ind. prtter, 3 s. sum, &c. : — 
Otiosus, adj. 

17 Fuit there hath been illi : — Fuit, ind. preter. 3 s. sum, &c. : — Illi, 
pron. d. s. ille, a, ud. 

18 Miltiades Miltiades, an Athenian general fuit was; — Miltiades, 
nn.:— Fuit, ind. preter. 3 s. suro, es &e. 

19 Haec iA«f /toe things fnisse /iad /;6tn: — Haec, pron. gc. /)£. hie, 
haec, hoc: — Fuisse, inf.prder. sum, &c. 

20 Labor fuisset would have been magntis ; — Labor, nn.: — Fuisset, 
pot. preterpl. 3 s. sum, &c. : — Magnus, adj. 

21 Exitium that a— futurum (esse) would be imperio : — Exitium, 
nn.:— Futurum, inf.fut. sum, &c. : — Imperio, nn. imperium. 



* The directions which were given at page 27, for finding nouns 
in the Dictionary, will also serve for adjectives. 



/ 



43 

VERBS IN THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 

The Present Tense and the Tenses formed from it. 

1 Saltabas 

2 Ilia cogitat 

3 Mi h oris oe?timabunt Nep. 

4 Ambulandi 

5 Cives judicarent Nep. 

6 Creabat 

7 Cantans 

8 Negemus 

9 Nemo putabat. Nep. 

The Preterperfect Tense and its Derivatives. 

10 Rom-am vocavif Eut. 

11 Aptaverif 

12 Nil ego peccavi Ov. 

13 Aravisse 

14 Ba I a v eru n t * *pves 

15 Pamphilus firmavjt fidem Ter. 

16 Caries latravissent*. 

The Supine, fyc. 

17 Clamatum 
IS Erraturus, 

IRREGULAR VERBS IN THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 

1 Urbes steterant Nep. 

2 Nos lave rim us Ter. 
S Juvare patriam Nep. 

4 Secuisse 

5 Dedistis librum 

6 Tonuit. 

What tenses are formed from the present ? The preterperfect? 
What part of the verb is formed from the supine r 
What would balaverunt be if contracted ? 
What verbs are most frequently contracted ? 

* In certain persons of the preterperfect tense and its derivatives 
the verb is sometimes contracted by omitting the v, or the v and the 
following vowel. This contraction generally takes place in verbs of 
the first conjugation : in verbs of the second and third having evi : 
and of the third and fourth having ivi in the preterperfect tense. 

Balaverunt and latravissent contracted, would be balarunt and la- 
ir assent. 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF VERBS IN THE FIRST 
CONJUGATION. 

1 Saltabas thou didst dance : — Saltabas, ind. preterim, 2 s. salt©, as, 
avi, are, atum, act. I, to dance. 

2 Ilia she cogitat thinketh: — Ilia, pron. nom. s. f, ille, a, ud : — Co- 
gitat, ind. pr, 3 s. cogito, as, avi, are, atum, act. 1, to think, 

3 iEstimabunt they shall or will esteem (it) minoris of less value: — 
JEstimabunt, ind. fut. 3 pL sestimo, as, avi, are, atum, act, 1, to es- 
teem: — Minoris, adj.comp, from parvus. 

4 Ambuiandi of walking : — Ambuiandi, gerund in di t ambnlo, as, 
avi, are, atum, act. 1, to walk. 

5 Cives jiidicareui should judge: — Cives, nn. civis : — Judicarent, 
pot. preterim, 3 pi. judico, as, avi, are, atum, act. 1, to judge. 

6 Creabat he did create: — Creabat, ind. preterim, 3 s. creo, as, avi, 
are, atum, uct, 1, to create. 

7 Cantaus singing: — Cautans, part . pr, canto, as, avi, are, atum, 
act. 1, to sing. 

8 Negemus let us deny: — Negemus, imp. 1 pi. nego, as, avi, are, 
atum, act, 1, to deny, 

9 Nemo putabat thought or did think: — Nemo, nn.: — Putabat, 
ind. preterim. 3 s. puto, as, avi, are, atum, act. 1, to think. 

JO Vocavit he called (it) Romam :— Vocavit, ind, preter, 3 s. voco, 
as, avi, are, alum, act. 1, to call: — Romam, nn. Roma. 

11 Aptaverit he should have fitted.— Aptaverit, pot. preter, 3s, 
apto, as, Tvi, are, atum, act. 1, to fit. 

12 Ego peccavi, / have dune wrong nil : — Ego, pron. :— Peccavi, 
ind, preter. Is. pecco, as, avi, are, atum, neut. 1, to sin: — Nil, nn. 

13 Aravisse to have ploughed : — Aravisse, inf. preter. or preterpl, 
aro, as, avi, are, atum, act. 1, to plough. 

14 Oves balaverunt have bleated : — Oves, nn. : — Balaverunt, ind, 
preter, 3 pi. halo, as, avi, are, atum, act 1, to bleat. 

Id Pamplnlus firmavit hath kept fidem {his) promise: — Pamphi- 
lns, nn.: — Firmavit, ind. preter, 3 s, nrmo, as, avi, are, atum, act, 
1, to confirm: — Fidem, nn. tides. 

16 Canes iatravisstnt ivouid have barked ;— Canes, nn.: — Latravis- 
sent, pot, preterpl. 3 pi. latro, as, avi, are, atum, act. l, to bark, 

17 Clatnatuni to cry out : — Clamalum, supine, clamo, as, avi, are, 
atum, act. 1, to cry out. 

18 Erraturus about to err: — Erraturus, part, fut, in rus. erro, as, 
avi, are, atum, act, 1, to err, 

1 Urbes steterant had stood : — Urbes, nn. urbs :— Sreterant, ind, 
preterpl. 3 pi, sto, as, eti, are, atum, neut. 3, to stand. 

2 Nos laverimns shall have washed : — Nos, pron. ego : — Laverimus, 
pot. fut. 1 pi. \avo, avas, avi, avare, avatum, &c. act 1, to wash, 

3 Juvare to help patriam : — Juvai e, inf. pr. juro, vas, vi, vare, turn, 
act, 1, to help : — Patriam, mi. patria. 

4 Seeuisse to have cut : — Secu isse, inf. preter. or preterpl, seoo, as, 
ni, are, turn, act. 3, to cut. 

5 Dedistis you have given librnm : — Dedistis, ind. preter. 2 pi, do, 
as, edi, are, atum, act. 1, to give :— Librnm, nn. liber. 

6 Tonuit it hath thundered: — Tonuit, ind, preter, 3 s, tono, as, ui, 
are, itum, neut, 1, to thunder. 



45 



VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION, &c. 

The present Tense and the Tenses formed from it. 

1 Caleamus 

2 Carebat nomine. Nep. 

3 Corpora languebant morbo Virg. 

4 Quis pulsat fores ? 

5 Studeant 

6 Imperium haberem 

The Preterperfect Tense and its Derivatives. 

7 Quis docuit ? Nep. 

8 Doluisse 

9 Ingrati animi crimen horrui Cic. 

10 Jacuissemus 

11 Oluisti 

12 Tacuerit 

13 Splenduisse 

14 Janua patuerat 

The Supines, fyc. 

15 Ten turn 

16 Debiturum esse 

17 Placitura puella 

IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 

1 Anus nebat Ter. 

2 Hoesimus 

3 Omnium animi ardebant Cms. 

4 Mansisset 

5 Risisse 

6 Fulserunt ignes Virg. 

7 Sederim. 

What tenses are formed from the present? Preterperfect ? 
What part of the verb is formed from the supine? 
How do you know when a verb is irregular? 

THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF VERBS IN THE SE- 
COND CONJUGATION, &C. 

1 Caleamus we may be hot:— Caleamus, pot. pr. 1 pi. caleo, es, ui, 
ere, neut. 2, to be hot. 

2 Carebat he wanted nomine : — Carebat, ind. preteiim. 3 s. cargo, 
es, ui, ere, itum, neut. 2, to want: — Nomine, nn. nomen. 



46 

3 Corpora languebant languudied morbo :— Corpora, tin. corpus: — 
Languebant, ind. preterim. 3 pi. langueo, es, i, ere, neut. 2, to lan- 
guish: — Morbo, nn. morbus. 

4 Quis pulsat knocks at fores?— Quis, pron. : — Pnlsat, ind. pr. 3 *. 
pulso, as, avi, are, Stum, act. 1, to knock:— Fores, nn. 

5 Stndeant let them study: — Studeant, imp. 3 pi. studeo, es, ui, ere, 
neut. 2, to study. 

6 Haberem / might have imperium : — Haberem, pot. preterim. 1 s. 
habio, es, ni, ere, irum, act. 2: — Imperinm, nn. 

7 Quis docuit taught: — Docuit, ind. preter. 3 s. doceo, es, ui, ere, 
turn, act. 2, to teach : — Quis, pron. 

8 Doluisse to have grieved : — Doluisse, inf. preter. or preterpl. do- 
\eo, es, ui, ere, itum, neut. 2, to gneve. 

9 Horrui / have dreaded crimen ingrati anirai : — Horrui, ind. pre- 
ter. 1 s. horreo, es, ui, ere, neut. 2, to dread:— Crimen, nn. :— Ingrati, 
adj. ingratus : — Animi, nn. animus. 

10 Jacuissemus we would have lain : — Jacuissemus, pot. preterpl. 1 
pi. jaceo, es, ui, ere, turn, neut. 2, to lie. 

11 Oluisti thou hast smelled : — Oluisti, ind. preter, 2 s. o\eo, es, ui, 
ere, itum, neut. 2, to smell. 

12 Tacuerit he shall hold his peace, or be silent : — Tacuerit, pot.fut. 
3 s. taceo, es, ui, ere, itum, neut. 2, to be silent. 

13 Splenduisse to havesfwne: — Splenduisse, inf. preter. splendeo, 
es, ui, ere, neut . 2, to shine. 

14 Janua patuerat had been open:— J ami a, nn. : — Patuerat, ind, 
preterpl. S s. patco, es, ui, ere, neut. 2, to open. 

15 Tentum to hold : — Tentnm, supine, teneo, es, ui, ere, turn, act, 
2, to hold. 

16 Debiturum esse to be about to owe:— Debiturum esse, inf, fui, 
debeo, es, ui, ere, itum, act. 2, to owe. 

17 Piacitura a pleasing puella ; — Placitura, part. fut. f. in nis. 
placeo, es, oi, ere, itum, neut. 2 : — Puella, no, 

IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 

1 Anns an old woman nebat did spin : — Anus, nn. : — Nebat, ind, 
preterim. neo, nes, nevv-nere, netum, neut. 2, to spin. 

2 Haesimus ice have stuck; — Hxsimus, ind. preter. 1 pi. hsereo, res, 
si, rere, sum, neut. 2, to stick. 

3 Animi omnium ardebant burned: — Animi, nn. animus: — Omni- 
um, adj. omnis: — Ardebant, ind. preterim. 3 pi. ardeo, des, si, dere, 
sum, neut. 2, to burn. 

4 Mansisset he would have remained : — Mansisset, pot. preterpl. 3 s. 
manco, es, si, ere, sum, neut. 2, to remain. 

5 Risisse to have laughed: — Risisse, inf. preter, video, des, si, dere, 
sum, neut. 2, to laugh. 

6 Ignes fulse runt have shone: — Tgnes, nn. ignis: — Fulserunt, ind. 
preter. 3 pi. fu\geo, ges, si, gere, sum, neut. 2, to shine. 

7 Sederim 1 should have sat: — Sederlm, pot, preter. 1 s, sedeo, des, 
di, dere, ssum, neut. 2, to sit. 






47 

VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION, &c. 

The Present Tense and its Derivatives. 

1 Jungis equos curru Virg. 

2 Caput tegit galea 

3 Minuendi iram 

4 Bibo aquarn 

5 Bellum renovare. Nep. 

The Pretcrperfect T&nse, its Derivatives, fyc. 

6 Saluti consuJuerat Nep. 

7 Miltiades dirigat cursum Nep. 

8 Illi dixerant 

9 Praemium tribuisse 

10 Auctorem foederis habuerant. Nep. 

The Supine and its Derivatives. 

11 Junctum dextram 

12 Tracturum esse 

13 Parsimonia victurus. 

IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 

1 Multi peterent societatem Nep. 

2 Navem is fregit Ter. 
S Homines legunt Nep. 

4 Puer lusit 

5 Clauseras portas 

6 Ranse cecinerunt querelam. Phad. 

What tenses are formed from the present? preterperfect ? What 
parts of the verb are formed from the supine ? 



46 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF VERBS IN THE THIRD 
CONJUGATION, &C. 

1 Jungis thoujoinest equos curru : — Jungis, ind. pr. 2 s. jungo, gis, 
xi, gfcre, ctum, act. 3, to join ;— Equos, nn. equus ; — Curru, nn. 
currus. 

2 Tegit he covers caput galea : — Tegit, ind. pr. 3 s. tego, gis, xi, 
gere, ctum, act. 3, to cover: — Caput, nn.: — Galea, nn. 

3 Minuendi of lessening iram: — Minuendi, gerund in di, minuo, 
uis, ui, nere, utum, act. 3, to lessen : — Iram, nn. ira. 

4 Bibo 1 drink aquam : — Bibo, bid. pr. 1 s. bioo, bis, bi, bere, bi- 
tum, act. 3, to drink: — Aquam, nn. aqua. 

5 Renovare to renew bellum : — Renovare, inf. pr. renovo, as, avi, 
are, atum, act. 1, to renew: — Bellum, nn. 

6 Consuluerat he had consulted saluti : — Consuluerat, ind. preterpl. 
3 s. consulo, is, ui, ere, turn, neut. 3, to consult: — Saluti, nn. salus. 

7 Miltiades dirigat may direct cursum : — Miltiades, nn. ; — Dirigat, 
pot. pr. 3 s. dirigo, igis, exi, igere, ectnm, act. 3, to direct :— Cursum, 
nn. cursus. 

8 Illi dixerant had said ;— Illi, pron. ille : — Dixerant, ind. preterpl, 
3 pi. dico, cis, xi, cere, ctum, act. 3, to say. 

9 Tribuisse to hate given praemium : — Tribuisse, inf. preter. tribuo, 
is, i, ere, turn, act. 3, to give: — Praemium, nn. 

10 Ha' ; uerant they had auctorem foederis : — Habuerant, ind. pre- 
terpl. 3 pi. Iwbeo, es, ui, ere, itum, act. 2, to have: — Auctorem, 
nn. auctor :— Foederis, nn. foedus. 

11 Junctum to join dextram : — Junctum, supine act.juvgo, gis, xi, 
g&re, ctum, act. 3, to join: — Dextram, nn. dextra. 

Vi Tracturum esse to be about to draw: — Tracturum esse, inf.fut. 
tra/io, his, xi, here, ctum, act. 3, to draw. 

13 Yicturus about to conquer parsimonia: — Victnrus, inf.fut. in 
rus, \inco 9 ncis, ci, ncere, ctum, act. 3, to conquer: — Parsimonia, nn* 

IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 

1 Multi peterent might seek societatem :— Multi, adj. multus: — 
Peterent, pot. preterim. 3 pi. peto, is, Ivi, ere, Itum, act. 3, to seek : 
Societatem, nn. societas. 

2 Is fregit hath broken navem, or he suffered shipwreck: — Is, pron. : 
4 — Fregit, ind. preter. 3 s. fvar.go, angis, egi, angere, actum, uct. 3, to 

break: — Navem, nn. navis. 

3 Legunt they choose homines : — Legunt, ind,pr. 3pl. lego, gis, gi, 
gere, ctum, act. 3, to choose : — Homines, nn. 

4 Puer lusit hath played: — Puer, un.:— Lusit, ind. preter. 3s. 
ludo, dis, si ? dere, sum, act. 3, to play. 

5 Clauseras thou hadst shut portas : — Clauseras, ind. preterpl. 2 s. 
claudo, dis, si, dere, sum, act. 3, to shut: — Portas, nn, porta. 

6 Ranae cecinerunt have sung querelam : — Ranae, nn. rana ; — Ce- 
cinerunt, ind. preter. 3 pi. cano, anis, ecini, anere, antum, act. 3, to 
sing: — Querelam, nu. querela. 



49 



VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION, &c. 

The Present Tense and its Derivatives. 

1 Porcus grunnit 

2 Dormiam 

3 Nihil audio Ter. 

4 Garriunt pueri 

5 Mugiret bos. 

The Pretcrpcrfect Tense, its Derivatives, fyc. 

6 Leo ruglvit 

7 Certabant cives 

8 Esuriverint vaccae. 

The Supine, fyc. 

9 Ambulatum 

10 Politurus lignum. Plin. 

IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 

1 Veniet hora 

2 Aperi ostium 

3 Quid sensit senex Plaut. 

4 Hostem vicisse 

5 Fulsissent domum 

6 Saluerit equus 

7 Sepsisse hortum. 

What tenses are formed from the present, preterperfect, &c. ? 
What parts of the verb are formed from the supine, &c. ? 
Where is the accent in ceriabant? Example 7th. 
By what rule do you prove the accent to be on the syllable ta? 



50 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF VERBS IN THE FOURTH 
CONJUGATION, &C. 

1 Porcns gruimit is grunting: — Porcus, nn.:— Grunnit, ind. pr. 
3 s. grunmo, is, Ivi, ire, Itum, neut . 4, to grunt. 

2 Dormiam I shall sleep: — Dormiam, ind. fut. 1 s. dormio, is, 
Ivi, ire, Itum, neut. 4, to sleep. 

3 Audio I hear nihil : — Audio, ind. pr. 1 s. audz'o, is, Ivi, Ire, itum, 
act. 4, to hear: — Nihil, nn. indeclinable. 

4 Pueri garriunt prate ;— -Pucrl; nn. puer:— Garriunt, ind.pr. 3 
pi. garrio, is, Ivi, Ire, Ituin, neut. 4, to prate. 

5 Bos mugiret would bellow ;— Bos, un. : — Mugiret, pot. preterim. 
3 s. mugio, is, Ivi, Ire, Iium, neut. 4, to belUw. 

6 Leo rugivit hath roared: — Leo, nn. : — Kugivit, ind. preter. 3 s. 
rugio, is, Ivi, Ire, Itum, neut. 4, to roar. 

7 Cives certabant strove: — Gives, nn. civis :— Certabant, ind. pre- 
terim. 3 pi. certo, as, avi, are, atnm, act. 1, to strive. 

8 Vaccac esuriverint shall have desired to eat ; — Vaccae, nn. vacca: 
— Esuriverint, pot. fut. 3 pi. esurio, is, Ivi, Ire, Itum, neut. 4, to 
desire to eat. 

9 Ambulatum to walk: — Amlmlatum, supine act. ambulo, as, avi, 
are, atura, act. 1, to walk. 

10 Polituius about to plane lignum : — Politurus, part. fut. in rus. 
polio, is, Ivi, Ire, Itum, act. 4, to polish .—Lignum, nn. 



IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 

1 Hora veniet will come: — Hora, nn. : — Veniet, ind. fut. S s. 
\enio, is, i, Ire, turn, neut. 4, to come. 

2 Aperi open ostium : — Aperi, imp. 2 s. aperio, is, ui, Ire, turn, 
act. 4, to open: — Ostium, nn. 

3 Quid senex sens'it perceived:— Quid, pron. quis; — Senex, nn. : — 
Sensit, ind. preter. 3 s. sen/io, tis, si, tire, sum, act. 4, to perceive. 

4 Vieisse to have conquered hostem : — Vicisse, inf. preter. vinco, 
ncis, nci, ncere, ctum, act. 3, to conquer: — Hostem, nn. hostis. 

5 Fulsissent they vwuld have propped domum :— Fulsissent, pot.pre- 
ierpl. 3 pi. fuldo, eis, si, die, turn, act. 4, to prop: — Domum. nn. 
domns. 

6 Equus saluerit shall have leaped:— Equus, nn. : — Saluerit, pot. 
fut. 3 s. salio, is, ui, ire, turn, act. 4, to leap. 

7 Sepsisse to have hedged hortum: — Sepsisse, inf. preter. sepio, is, 
ivi, or si, Ire, Itum, or turn, act. 4, to hedge: — Hortum, nn. hortus. 



51 



OF VERBS PASSIVE, &c. 

The passive verb signifies to suffer, and ends in or, as 
amor I am loved. 

The passive verb is entirely formed from the active. 
The preterperfect and preterplu perfect tenses of all the 
moods, and the future tense potential, are formed from 
the supine active by changing m into s, and are declined 
with the tenses of the verb sum : as, 

Amatuw, Ama-tus sum, -tus eram, -tus sim, -tus essem, 
-tus ero, -turn esse, -turn iri, -tus, -ndus. 

In the other tenses, when the active ends in o, it is made 
passive by adding r, and in m by changing m into r : 

C Active, am-o, -abo, -ato, -anto. 
£ Passive, am-or, -abor, -ator, antor. 

and $ Active, am-abam, -are?/2. 
£ Passive, am-abar, -arer. 

The pupil is referred to the paradigm of the passive voice in the 
Eton Grammar, page 63. 

FIRST CONJUGATION PASSIVE. 

, The Present Tense and its Derivatives. 

1 Celatur hoc 5 Pietate Deus placatur 

2 Flabitur tibia Plant. 
S Vinculo ligari 6 Gubernabuntur discipuli 
4 Tempus est parari 7 Narrelur Veritas. 

The Preterperfect Tense, and the Tenses derived from it. 

8 Romulus putatus est 9 Rogatus sit hospes 

Eut. 10 Sperata est res 

IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 

1 Lota est facies 3 Sectus est ramus 

2 Tempora dentur 4 Sonita fuerat vox. 

How do you know a passive verb? How are tbey formed? When 
the active ends in o, how is the passive formed? When in ml How 
is the preterperfect passive formed? What do you annex to the ra- 
dical word Cel to form the ind. pr. 3 s. fyc. fyc. 

F 2 



52 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF THE FIRST CONJUGA- 
TION PASSIVE, &C. 

J Hoc celatur is concealed:— Hoc, pron.:— Celatur, ind, pr-. 3s. 
celor, aris, atus, ari, pass.l. 

2 Tibia flabitnr will be blown: — Tibia, nn. : — Flabitur, ind, fut, 
3 *. flor, aris, atus, ari, pass. 1. 

3 Ligari to be bound vinculo :— Ligari, inf.pr. ligor, aris, atus, ari, 
pass, 1 : — Vinculo, nn. vinculum. 

4 Est there is tempusparari to be prepared: — Est, neut, ind, pr. Ss, 
sura, es, fin, esse, &c. : — Tempus, nn. : — Parari, inf. pr. paror, aris, 
atus, ari, pass, 1. 

5 Deus placatur is satisfied pietate : — Deus, nn. : — Placatur, ind, 
pr, 3 s. placor, aris, atus, ari, pass, 1 : — Pietate, nn. pietas. 

6 Discipuli gubernabuntur will be governed : — Discipuli, nn. dis- 
cipulus: — Gubernabuntur, ind, fut. 3 pi, guberaor, aris, atus, ari, 
pass. 1. 

7 Veritas let the truth narretnr be told: — Veritas, nn.: — Narretur, 
imp, 3 s, narror, aris, atus, ari, pass, 1 . 

8 Romulus putatus est was thought: — Romulus, nn.: — Putatns 
est, ind,preter. Ss, putor, aris, atus, ari, pass, 1. 

9 Hospes rogatus sit should have been asked: — Hospes, nn. : — Ro- 
gatas sit* /jot, preter, 3 s. rogor, aris, atus, ari, pass. 1 , 

10 Res sperata est hath been hoped for ;— Res, nn. :•— Sperata est, 
ind, preter, 3 s. speror, aris, atus, ari, pass. 1. 



IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 

1 Facies lota est has been washed: — Facies, nn.: — Lota est, ind. 
preter. 3 s, \avor, avaris, antus, otus, &c. a van", pass, 1. 

2 Tempora let opportunities dentin* be given: — Tempora, nn. tem- 
pus: — Dentur, imp, 3 pi, dor, aris, atns, ari, pass,l. 

3 Ramus sectus est has been cut:— Ramus, nn. :— Sectns est, ind, 
pretei*. 3 s. seeor, aris, ins, ari, pass. I. 

4 Vox sonita fuerat had been sounded:— -Vox, nn. : — Sonita fuerat, 
ind. preterpl. 3 s, sonor, aris, itus, ari, pass, 1. 



53 



VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION 
PASSIVE, &c. 

The Present Tense, and the Tenses dependent upon it. 

1 Caesar magnus habebatur Sal. 

2 Monebuntnr juvenes 

3 Chiton custodia tenebatur Nep. 

4 Timeantur 

5 Morderi dente 

6 Videre videor Ter. 

7 Terreantur, 

The Preterperfect Tense and its Derivatives. 

8 Puer territus est 

9 Puellae territae sint 

10 Regnum territum fuisset 

11 Regna territa sunt; 

12 Fletus es 

13 Moti eritis 

14 Jussum est bellum 

15 Hie numerum duplicavit Eut. 

16 Tarquinius muros fecit Eut. 

17 Virtus omnia domuerat. Sal. 

IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 

1 Docebar 

2 Miscentur tristia laetis. Ov. 



What tenses are formed from the present? What from the preter- 
perfect? How is territus declined? What gender is territum? What 
number and gender is territa? 



54 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING PF THE SECOND CONJC- 
OATJON PASSIVE, &C. 

1 Caesar babebatnr was esteemed magmis a great (man): — Cassar, 
nn. : — Habebatnr, ind. preterim. 3 s. \mbeor, eris, itus, eri, pass, 2, to 
be esteemed : — Magnus, adj. 

2 Juvenes monebnntur shall be advised : — Juvenes, nn. jnvenis: — 
Monebnntur, ind. Jut, 3 pi. moneor, eiis, itus, eri, pass. 2, to be 
advised. 

3 Ciinon tenebatur iras held custodia in custody:— Cimon, nn. : — 
Tenebatur, ind.preieum. 3 s. tensor, eris, tus, eri, pass. 2, to be held, 
— Custodia, in. custodia. 

4 Timeantur let them be feared: — Tinieautur, imp, 3 pi. timtor, 
eris, eri, pass. 2, to be feared, 

5 Morderi to be bitten dente : — Morderi, inf. pr. mordeor, deris, 
«ns, deri, pass. c 2, to be bitten: — Dente, nn. dens. 

6 Videor I stem videre, to see, or I think I see: — Wdeor, deris, sus, 
deri, pass. 2 : — Videre, inf. pr. xideo, des, di, dere, sum, act. 2, to see, 

7 Terreantur they may be frightened: — Terreantur, pot. pr. 3 pi, 
terror, eris, itus, eri, pass. 2, to be frightened. 

8 Puer territus est has been frightened : — Puer, nn. : — Territns est, 
ind. preter. 3 s. in. territus declined like bonus, terrcor, eris, itus, eri, 
pass. 2, to be frightened. 

9 Puellae territag sint may hate been fnghtened:— Puellae, nn. 
puelia :— Territae sint, pot. preter. 3 pi. f. terreor, eris, &c. 

10 Regnum territum fuisset would have been frightened : — Regnum, 
nn.: — Territum fuisset, pot. preterpl. 3 s. n. terror, eris, &c. 

11 Regna territa sunt hare been frightened : — Regna, un. regnum : 
— Territa sunt, ind. preter. 3 pi. n. terror, eris, &c. 

12 Fletus es thou hast been lamented: — Fletus es, ind, preter. 2 s. 
nYor, eris, etus, eri, pass. 2, to be lamented. 

IS Moti eritis you shall have been moved : — Moti eritis, pot.fut. 2 
pi. moveor, \eris, tus, veri, pass. 2. 

14 Bellum jnssum est hath been appointed: — Bellum, nn. : — Jussnni 
est, i?id. preter. 3 s. n. jnbeor, beris, ssus, beri, pass. 2, to be com- 
manded. 

15 Hie dnplicavit doubled mime rum : — Hie, pron. : — Duplicavit, 
ind. preter. 3 s. duplico, as, avi, are, atuin, act. 1 : — Numerum, un. 
numerus. 

16 Tarquinius fecit built muros :— Tarquinius, nn.: — Fecit, ind. 
preter. 3 s. iacio, acis, eci, a cere, actum, act. 3 : — Muros, nn. mnrus. 

17 Viitus donuierat had kept under omnia : — Virtus, nn.: — Donui- 
eiat, ind. preterpl. 3 s. domo, as, ui, are, rtum, act. 1, to tame: — Om- 
nia, adj. oninis. 

IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 

1 Docebar I was taught:— Docebar, ind. preterim. 1 s, doceor, 
eris. tus, eii, pass. 2. 

2 Tristia sad (things) iniscenfur are mingled laetis with joyful 
things): — Tristia, adj, tristis : — Misccntur, ind. pr. 3 pi. m\sceor, 

ceris, tus or mixtus sum, ceri, pass. 2 : — Laetis, adj. laetus. 



56 



VERBS IN THE THIRD CONJUGATION 
PASSIVE, &c. 

The Present Tense and its Derivatives. 

1 Jungimur 

2 Rogandus 

3 Sine me trahi 

4 Nocerer 

5 Vinci vultu 

6 Curam fugimus. Cic. 

7 Emetur. 

The Preterperfect Tense and its Derivatives. 

8 Ducti essent 

9 Auctum est 

10 Fiectum iri 

1 1 Vetiti sunt. 

IRREGULAR VERBS> &C. 

1 Frangebantur 

2 Homines rnissi sunt 

3 Falsus est auro 

4 Saturn est fru men turn 

5 Pomum missum sit 

6 Manus laventur. 



What must be annexed to the radical word Jung join, to form the 
J pi. pr. hid. fyc. / 

What tenses are formed from the present? 

From what are the present passive, and all the tenses which end 
in r, formed ? 



56 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF VERBS IN THE THIRD 
CONJUGATION PASSIVE, &C. 

1 Jnngimur we are joined: — Jungironr, ind. pr. 1 pi. junior, g&ris, 
ctus, gi, pass. 3. 

2 Rogandus to be asked:— Rogandus, inf.fut.in dus, rogor, aris, 
atus, ari, pats. 1. 

3 Sine sMjfer me trahi to be drawn: — Sine, imp. 2 s. sino, ivi, inSre, 
itum, act. 3 : — Me, pron. ego : — Trahi, inf. passt trahor, heris, ctus, 
hi, pass. 3. 

4 Nocerer / might be hurt :—^soceiev, pot. preterim. Is. Noc^or, 
eris, itus, eri, pass. < i. 

5 Vinci to be overcome vultn : — Vinti, inf. pr. pass, vincor, ce"ris, 
ctus, ci, pass. 3 : — Vultu, nn. vultus. 

6 Fogimns we avoid curani ; — Fugimus, ind. pr. 1 pi. fugio, gis, gi, 
g£re, gUnra, act. Si — Curani, nn. cura. 

7 Emetur Ae, she, or it shall be bought:— Emetur, ind.fut, 3*. 
etaor, eris, ptus, i, pas*. 3. 

8 Ducti esseut they would have been led: — Ducti essent, pot. pre- 
terpl. Spl. ducwr, eris, tus, i, pass. 3. 

9 Auctum est it has been increased: — Auctum est, ind. preter. 3 s. 
augeor, geris, ctus, geri, pass. '2. 

10 Fiecturn iri to be about to be bended :— Flectum iri, inf.fut. flee- 
ter, eris, us, i, pass. 3. 

11 Vetiti sunt they have been forbidden :— Vetiti sunt, ind, preter. 3 
pi, vetor, aris, itus, ari, pass, 1. 



IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 

1 Fi angebantur they were broken : — Frangebantur, ind. preterim. 3 
pi. frawgor, n geris, ctus, ngi, pass. 3. 

2 Homines missi sunt were sent: — Homines, nn. homo: — Missi 
sunt, ind. preter. 3 pi. m'xttor, tteris, issus, tti, pass. 3. 

3 Falsus est he has been deceived auro : — Falsus est, ind. preter. 3 s, 
faUor, leris, sus, li, pass. 3 : — Auro, nn. aurnm. 

4 Frumentum satuin has been sown: — Frunientnm, nn. : — Saturn 
est, ind. preter. 3 s. n. seror, ereris, atus, eri, pass. 3. 

5 Poinuin missum sit may have been sent : — Missum sit, pot, preter. 
3 s. mittoTj tteris, ssus, tti, pass. 3 i — Pofnum, nn. 

6 INIanus let the hands laventur be washed : — Manus, nn.: — Laven- 
tur, imp. 3 pi, \ator } avaris, autus, otus, &c. avari, pass, \. 



57 



VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION 
PASSIVE, &c. 

The Present Tense and its Derivatives. 

1 Nutritur vento ignis Ov. 

2 Poliebantur tabulae 

3 Nos puniamur 

4 Negabaris 

5 Scirer. 

The Preterperfect Tense and its Derivatives. 

6 Equitatus hostium impeditus est 

7 Pater ejus generosus fuit Nep. 

8 Lis ejus aestimata sit 

9 Junctum esse 

10 Nominatus erat vir bonus 

1 1 Aristides Justus est appellatus Nep. 
\2 Phocion Bonus est appella'tus. Nep. 

IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 

i Sepeliebatur Aristides 

2 Sarta est aedes mea 

3 Nomen datum est 

4 Nos see I ere solvamur. 

How is the preterperfect tense passive formed? 

What must be added to the radical word to form the preterim- 
perfect, 3 s. §•<?.? 

Where is the accent in poliebantur'! (Example g.) Why is the a 
long? Why is the accent on the syllable bant! Why on hos in 
hostium? (Example 6.) Why is the i short in hostium ? 



58 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF VERltS IN THE FOURTH 
CONJUGATION PASSIVE, &C. 

1 Ignis nutritur is fed vento : — Ignis, nn. : — Nutritur, ind. pr. 3 a. 
nutrzor, I ris, Itus, iri, pass, 4: — Vento, nn. ventus. 

2 Tabuiae poMebuntur were polished :— TabulaB, nn. tabula: — Po- 
liebantur, ind. preterim. 3 pi. polz'or, iris, Itus, Iri, pass. 4. 

3 Nos puniamur may be punished: — Nos, pron, ego : — Puniamur, 
pot. pr. 1 pi. punz'or, iris, itus, iri, pass. 4. 

4 Negabaris thou wast denied: — Negabaris, ind. preterim. % s. ne- 
gor, aris, at us, ari, pass. 1. 

5 Scirer J might be known: — Scirer, pot. preterim. 1 s. scz'or, iris, 
itus, iri, pass. 4. 

6 Equitatus hostium impeditus est has been hindered : — Equitatus, 
nn.:— Hostium, nn. iiostis: — Impeditus est, ind, prefer. 3s. impedzor, 
iris, itus, iri, pass. 4. 

7 Pater ejus fuit zcas generosus : — Pater, nn. : — Ejus, pron. is, ea, 
id : — Fuit, ind. preter. 3 s. sum, es, fui, &c. : — Generosus, nn. 

8 Lis the fine ejus of him aestimata sit may be set ;~~Lis, nn. : — 
Ejus, pron. is, &c. : — jEstimata sit, pot . preter. 3 s. f. ajstimor, aris, 
at us, ari, pass. 1, 

9 Junctum esse to have been joined: — Junctura esse, inf. preter. 
jung-or, geris, ctus, gi, pass. 3. 

10 Nominatus erat he had been called vir bonus : — Nominatus erat, 
ind. preterpl. 3 s. nominor, aris, atus, ari, pass, 1 : — Vir, nn. : — Bonus, 
adj. 

XI Aristides appellatus est was called Justus the Just ; — Aristides, 
nn. : — Appellatus est, ind. preter. 3 s. appellor, aris, atus, ati, pass* 1: 
— Justus, nn. 

12 Phocion appellatus est was called Bonus the Good :— Pbocion, 
nn. : — Appellatus est, ind. preter. 3 s. appellor, aris, atus, ari, pass* 
1: — Bonus, nn. 



IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 

1 Aristides sepeliebatnr was buried: — Aristides, nn. :— Sepelieba- 
tur, ind. preterim. 3 s. sepe/zor, eliris, ultus, ellri, pass. 4. 

2 Mea aides sarta est has been repaired : — Mea, pron. mews, a, una : 
— JEdes, nn. :— Sarta est, ind. preter. 3 s. f. sarczor, ciris, tus, clri, 
pass. 4. 

3 Nomen datum est has been given: — Nomen, nn. : — Datum est, 
ind. preter. 3 s. n. dor, aris, atus, ari, pass. 1. 

4 Nos solvainur maybe released scelere: — Nos, pron. ego: — Sol- 
vainur, pot. pr. 1 pi. solcor, veris, utus, vi, pass. 3 : — Scelere, nn. 
scelus. 



59 



OF DEPONENT VERBS. 

Some verbs have a passive form and an active significa- 
tion : they are called Deponent verbs (from depono to lay 
down), because they have deposed or laid down the active 
form of the verb. 

The preterperfect tense of deponent verbs is formed by 
supposing an active voice, from the supine of which comes 
the participle, to which sum is added : thus, imitor, imita- 
tus sum, as if from imito, as? avi, are, and the supine imi- 
tatum, and hence the participle imitatus, to which sum is 
annexed making imitatus sum. 

The present Tense and its Derivatives. 

1 Potest memoria recordari Eut. 

2 Deos precari Cic. 

3 Me criminaris. 

The Preterperfect Tense and its Derivatives. 

4 Miltiades hortatus est pontis custodes Nep. 

5 Miraturum esse 

6 Miratum iri 

7 Adulatus erit amlcurn 

8 Functi sunt muneribus 

9 Meritum esse. 

IRREGULAR DEPONENT VERBS. 

1 Loquere nomen tuum Plain. 

2 Sequitur patrem passibus-aequis Virg;. 

3 Hie ortus est C&s. 

4 Labitur aetas Ov. 

Why ai e verbs having a passive form, and an active signification, 
called deponent? 

How is the preterperfect tense formed? 

Are they betier supplied with participles than other verbs? 



60 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING ©F VERBS DEPO- 
NENT, &C. 

1 M eraoria, potest is able recordari to remember : — Memoria, nn. : 
— Potest, ind. pr. 3 s. possum, tes, tui, &c. :— Recordari, inf. pr. re- 
corder, aris, atus, ari, dep. 1. 

2 Precari to pray deos : — Precari, inf. pr. precor, aris, atus, ari, 
dep, 1 : — Deos, nn. deus. 

3 Criminaris you accuse me: — Criminaris, ind.pr. 2 s. criminor, 
aris, atus, ari, dep, 1 : — Me, pron, ego. 

4 Miltiades hortatus est exhorted custodes pontis: — Miltiades, 
nn. :— -Hortatus est, ind. prefer, 3 s. hortor, aris, atus, ari, dep, 1 : — 
Custodes, nn. custos : — Pontis, nn. pons. 

5 Miraturum esse shall admire : — Miraturum esse, inf. fut. act. 
miror, aris, atus, ari, dep. 1. 

6 Miratum iri shall be admired: — Miratum iri, inf. fut. pass, miror, 
aris, atus, ari, dep. 1 . 

7 Adulatus erit he will have flattered amicum : — Adulatus erit, pot. 
fut. 3 s. adulor, aris, atus, ari, dep. 1 : — Amicum, nn. amicus. 

8 Functi sunt they have discharged muneribus (their) duties: — 
Functi sunt, ind. preter. 3 pi. fungor, geris, ctus, gi, dep. 3 : — Mune- 
ribus, nn. munus. 

9 Meritum esse to have deserved : — Meritum esse, inf. preter, me- 
reor, eris, itus, eri, dep. 2. 



IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 

1 Loquere speak or tell tuum nomen : — Loqnere, imp. 2 s. loquor, 
queris, cutus, qui, dep. 3. irr. : — Tuum, pron. tuus: — Nomen, nn. 

2 Sequitur he follows patrem sequis passibus:— Sequitur, ind.pr. 
3 s. sequor, queris, cutus, qui, dep. 3: — Patrem, nn. pater: — iEquis, 
adj. aequus : — Passibus, un. passus. 

3 Hie ortus est has risen:— Hie, pron. ;— Ortus est, ind. preter. 3 s. 
ortor, iris, tus, Iri, dep. 4. 

4 jEtas labitur glides away ;— iEtas, nn. : — Labitur, ind.pr. 3s. 
labor, beris, psus, bi, dep. 3. irr. 



61 



OF NEUTER PASSIVE AND IRREGULAR 
VERBS. 

Some neuter verbs, having their present and dependent 
tenses after the active form, and their preterperfects and 
tenses derived from them after the passive form, are called 
neuter passives. 

1 Acies certare solebant Virg* 

2 Fidebam ingenio 

3 Nemo ausus est 

4 Puer acri gaudet equo. Virg. 

A few irregular verbs very frequently occur ; they are, 
therefore, generally conjugated in the Grammar. 



1 Eamws 




2 Athenienses colonos vellent mittere 


Nep. 


3 Themistocles reverti nollet 


Nep. 


4 Die mihi 


Ter. 


5 Ibant le5nes 




6 Due me 




7 Loquere quid veiis 


Ter, 


S I, sequar. 


Ter. 



The Preterperfect Tense and its Derivatives, 

9 Latus sit 

10 Omnis pecunia translata est Nep. 

11 Potuissem 

12 Chabrias perire maluit Nep. 

13 Potuit, cecidisse videri. Ov. 

What are those neuter verbs called which derive the preterperfect 
tenses from the passive voice ? Give an example. 
Why are some irregular verbs given in Grammars ? 



62 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF NEUTER PASSIVE VERBS, 

&C. 

1 Acies solebant were accustomed certare to fight: — Acies, nn. :— 
Solebant, ind. preterim. 3 pi. soleo, es, itus, ere, neut. pass, 2 : — Cer- 
tare, inf. pi\ certo, as, avi, are, atum, act. t. 

2 Fidebam 1 trusted ingenio: — Fidebam, ind. preterim. 1 s. fido, 
des, di, and sus, dere, neut. 3 : — Ingenio, nn. ingenium. 

3 Neinoausus est durst:— Nemo, nn. : — Ansusest, ind.preter. 3s. 
auc/eo, des, sus, dere, neut. 2. 

4 Puer gaudet rejoices acri eqno : — Puer, nn. : — Gaudet, ind. pr. 
3 s. gaudeo, ndes, vlsus, udere, neut . pass. 2 : — Acri, adj. acris : — 
Equo, nn. equus. 

THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF IRREGULAR VERBS, &C. 

1 Eamus let us go ;— Eamus, imp. 1 pi. eo y is, ivi, ire, itum, to go, 
irr. 4. 

2 Athenienses vellent were desirous mittere to send colonos':— Athe- 
nienses, nn. : — Vellent, pot. preterim, 3 pi. volo 9 vis, &c. : — Mittere, 
inf. pr. mitto : — Colonos, nn. colonns. 

3 Theniistocles nollet w«s unwilling reverti to return: — Themisto- 
cles, nn.:— Nollet, pot. preterim. 3 s. noZo, nvis, lni, 11©, irr.: — Re- 
verti, inf. pr. reverfor, teris, sns, ti, dep. 3. 

4 Die tell mini : — Die, imp. 2 s. contracted from dice ; dico, cis, 
xi, &c. : — Mihi, pron. ego. 

5 Leones ibant went: — Leones, nn. leo: — Ibant, ind. preterim. 3 
pi. eo, is, ivi, ire, itum, irr. 4. 

6 Due lead me : — Due, imp. 2 s. contracted from duce ; duco, cis, 
xi, &c: — Me, pron. ego. 

7 Loquere speak quid velis you icish : — Loquere, imp. 2 s. loquor, 
queris, cutus, qui, dep. 3: — Quid, pron* quis: — Velis, pot.pr. 2 5. 
volo, irr. 

8 I go thou, sequar J will follow :— I, imp. 2 s. eo, is, ivi, ire, itum, 
irr. 4: — Sequar, ind.fut. 1 s. sequor, &c. 

9 Latus sit he should have been borne : — Latus sit, pot. preter. 3 s. 
feror, ferris, latus, feni, irr. 

10 Omnis pecuoia translata est was carried: — Omnis, adj.: — Pe- 
cunia, nn.:-— Translata est, ind. preter. 3s. f. trans/ero, fers, tiili, &c. 
irr. 

11 Potnissem I might have been able: — Potuissem, pot. preter pi. 
1 s. possum, &c. irr. 

12 Chabrias maluit would rather perire perish:— Chabrias, nn.: — 
Mai ait, ind. preter. 3 s. mafo, &c. irr. : — Peril e, inf. pr. pereo, neut. 4. 

13 Potuit it could videri be seen cecidisse to have fallen: — Potuit, 
ind. preter. 3 s. possum, &c. irr. ; — Videri, inf. pr r videor, pass. 2 : — 
Ceeidisse, inf. preter. cado, cecidi, cade re, casura, neut. 3. 



63 



OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

Defective verbs are those which want several parts. 
A few verbs, in other respects regular, want some 
tenses, as, 

1 Coepisti 

2 Odi malum 

3 Meminissem. 

Many other verbs are defective in most of the tenses. 

4 Die quaeso Ter. 

5 Quid ais ? Ter. 

6 Cedo aquam manibus Phut. 

7 Avete 

8 Salve 

9 Sororem esse aiunt Ter. 

10 Inquit 

11 Faxo 

12 Dicere ausint. 

OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

Impersonal verbs are only used in the third person sin- 
gular. They are of all conjugations, and may have it be- 
fore them in English. 

1 Decet me Plaut. 

2 Taedet nos vitae Cic. 

3 Peccare nemini licet Cic. 

4 Hoc tempore pugnatur Cces. 

5 Tibi videtur 

6 Me ejus miseritum est. Plaut. 

What are defective verbs r Give me an example. 

What are impersonal verbs? What may be placed before them? 

g 2 



64 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF DEFECTIVE VERBS, &C. 

1 Ccepisti thou hast begun: — Ccepisti, ind.preter. 2 s. ccepi, isti, 
eram, erim, issem, ero, isse, def. 

2 Odi I hate or have hated malum : — Odi, ind, pr. and preter. odi, 
gram, erim, issem, ero, isse, def.: — Malum, nn. 

3 Meminissem I would have remembered: — Meminissem, pot* pre- 
terpl. 1 s. memini, eram, eriin, issem, ero, isse, def. 

4 Die tell (me), quaeso 1 pray : — Die, imp. 2 s. d'wo, cis, xi, cere, 
act. 3: — Quaeso, ind. pr. 1 s. quaeso, is, it, iimus, ere, def. 

5 Quid ais do you say : — Quid, pron. quis: — Ais, ind. pr. 2 s. aio, 
is, it, pi. aiunt, def, 

6 Cedo give me aquam manibus : — Cedo, imp. 2 s. cedo, pi. cedite, 
def. : — Me, pron. ego:— Aquam, nn. aqua: — Manibus, nn. manus. 

7 Avete hail ye:— Avete, imp. 2 pi. ave, eto, pi. ete, etdte, ere, 
def. 

8 Salve God save you : — Salve, imp. 2 s. salve, eto, ere, def. 

9 Aiunt they say esse that she is sororem : — Aiunt, ind. pr. 3 pi. 
aio, is, it, def. : — Esse, inf. pr. sum, es, &c. : — Sororem, nn, soror. 

10 Inquit he says : — Inquit, ind. pr. 3 s. inquio, is, it f pi. lmus, iunt, 
iens, def. 

11 Faxo I will do it: — Faxo, ind. or pot. fut. 1 s. faxo, is, it, pU 
lmus, itis,int, def. 

12 Ausint they may daredicere to speak: — Ausint, ind. or pot. 3 pi, 
aus?f», is, it, pi. int, def. ;— Dicere, inf. pr. dico. 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF IMPERSONAL VERBS, &C. 

1 Decet it behoveth.me me:— Decet, ind. pr. 3 s. deed, ebat, uit, 
uerat, ebit, eat, eat, eret, uerit, uisset, uerit, ere, nisse, impers. 2: — 
Me, pron. ego. 

2 Taedet it wearies nos «s, or we are weary vitae \ — Taedet, ind. pr. 
3 s. tdedet, debat, duit, &c. impers. % : — Nos, pron. ego :— -Vita?, nn. 
vita. 

3 Licet it is lawful nemini peccare to do wrong or sin:— Licet, 
ind. pr. 3 s. licet, licebat, licuit, &c. impers. 2 : — Nemini, nn. nemo : 
— Peccare, inf.pr. pecco, as, avi, are, atum, act. J. 

4 Pugnatur it was fought hoc tempore : — Pugnatnr, ind. pr. 3 s. 
pugnaf ur, abatur, atum est, ari, pass. 1 : — Hoc, pron. hie: — Tem- 
pore, nn. tempus. 

5 Videtur it seemeth good tibi :— Videtur, ind. pr. 3 s. videtur, vi- 
debatur, visum est, &c. impers. t : — Tibi, pron. tu. 

6 Miseritum est it lias pitied me ejus of him , or / have pitied him: 
— Miseritum est, ind. preter. n. miseret, uiisertum and miseritum est, 
impers.:— Me, pron. ego : — Ejus, pron. is. 



66 



CHAP. V.— OF PARTICIPLES. 



A Participle is a kind of adjective, formed from a verb, 
and, like a verb, signifies being, doing, or suffering: as, a 
loving child. Here loving, like an adjective, denotes the 
quality of the child ; and, like a verb, it signifies action, 
for a loving child is the same as a child that loves. 

A Participle is so named (from participo to partake of) 
because in Latin it partakes of gender and declension with 
an adjective, and of time and signification with the verb. 

In Latin, active participles are declined like adjectives 
of one termination, and the passive like" those of three 



endings. 



ACTIVE PARTICIPLES. 



1 Multa pollicens Nep. 

2 Tuam petens amicitiam Nep. 

3 Aristides animadvertebat quendam scribentem Nep. 

4 Sequenti anno. Eut. 

PASSIVE PARTICIPLES. 

5 Condita civitate Eut. 

6 Adventu eorum cognito Nep. 

7 Delect^ manu Nep. 
3 Delenda est Carthago 

9 Disjectis copiis Nep. 

10 Sudore deterso Eut. 

11 Occasione reperta Eut. 

12 Duces factionis damnatos Nep. 

13 Se damnaturos eum Nep. 

14 Hac re audita. Nep. 

AVhat is a participle ? Why is it called a participle ? Give me an 
example of a participle. Which word is the participle in these sen- 
tences ? a written copy ; an entreating letter; a requested letter, &e. 
What are active participles declined like ? What the other ? 

g 3 



Ob 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF PARTICIPLES, &C. 

1 Pollicens promising multa many (things) : — Pollicens, part. worn. 
*. pollicews, entis: — Malta, adj. multus. 

2 Petens seeking tuam amicitiam : — Petens, part. nom. s. petens, 
entis : — Tuam, pron. tuns : — Amicitiam, nn. amicitia. 

3 Aristides animadvertebat observed quendam scribentem tvriting: 
— Aristides, mi. : — Animadvertebat, ind. preterim. 3 s. animadverto : 
—Quendam, pron. quidam : — Scribentem, part. ac. s. scriben*, tis. 

4 Sequenti in the following anno : — Sequenti, part. ab.s. m. sequent, 
tis : — Anno, nn. annus. 

5 Civitate the city condita being built: — Civitate, nn. civitas: — 
Condita, part. ab. s. f. condita*, a, um. 

6 Adventu the coming eoruin cognito being known :— Adventu,nn. 
adventus: — Eorurn, pron. is: — Cognito, part. ab. s. m. cognitus, a, 
um. 

7 Delecta with a chosen mann : — Delecta, part. ab. s. f. delectus, 
a, um : — Mann, nn. manus. 

8 Carthago delenda est must be destroyed:— Carthago, nn.: — De- 
lenda part, in dus, nom. s. f. delendus, a, um: Est ind. pr. 3 s. sum. 

9 Copiis the forces disjectis being overthrown : — Copiis, nn. copia?: 
— Disjectis, part. ab. pi, f. disjecta*, a, um. 

10 Sudore the perspiration deterso being rubbed off:— Sudore, nn. 
sudor :— Deterso, part. ab. s. m. deter*?/*, a, um. 

11 Occasione an opportunity reperta being found : — Occasione, nn. 
occasio : — Reperta, part. ab. s. f. reperta*, a, um. 

12 Damnatos having condemned duces factionis : — Damnatos, part, 
ac. pi. m. damnata*, a, um : — Duces, nn. dux : — Factionis, nn. factio. 

13 Se that they darnnaturos wguM condemn eum : — Se, pron. sui: — 
Damnaturos, part. ac. pi. m. damnatnrus, a, um : — Eum, pron. is. 

14 Hac re audifa being heard: — Hac, pron. hie : — Re, nn. res: — 
Audita, part. ab. s. f. auditas, a, um. 



67 



CHAP. VI.— Of ADVERBS. 

An Adverb (derived from ad to verbum the word or verb) 
shows the quality of the being, action, or passion of the 
verb, as the adjective points out the quality of a name. 
John walks well : He speaks correctly : I talk seriously : 
He is well. Here ivell, correctly, and seriously, are adverbs, 
because they show the quality of the action. 

1 Expecta paulisper 

2 False- me criminaris 

3 Invoca ilium illicd 

4 Quo properas ? Q,uom6d6 exponis ? 

An and Ne are used in asking questions; the former is 
placed before, and the latter after a word. 

5 An amas? or Amasne ? 

6 An non es ? or Nonne es ? 

7 An is est? Ter. Idne est verum ? Ten 

Adverbs admit of degrees of comparison. 

8 Facilius inteliigi possit Ncp. 

9 Fortiter pugnavit Cas. 

10 Forties pugnaveram 

11 Fortissime pugnaverunt 

12 Facillime inteiligis Cic. 

13 Propius muros accessit Nep. 

14 Melius dico. Optime dixit. 

What words denote the quality of a verb or action? What is an 
adverb? Give me an example. Why is it called an adverb ? Are 
adverbs compared? Give me an example. 



CHAP. VII— OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

Conjunctions join words and sentences together: as, 
John and Charles: John walks, but Thomas runs. 

1 Captiva tamen, et ancilla Eut. 

2 Non castra., sed naves Nep, 

3 Veniensque rex Eut. 

4 Iterdmque iterumque monebo. Virg. 

What is a conjunction? Give me an example. How can you distin- 
guish an adverb from a conjunction ? 



68 

THE CONSTRUING AND PAUSING OF ADVERBS, &C, 

1 Expecta paulisper a little while;— Expecta, act, expecto*: — 
Paulisper, adv. 

2 Criminaris me falso falsely: — Criminaris, dep. criminor: — Me, 
pron. ego : — Falso, adv, 

3 Invoca ilium illico directly: — Invoca, act. invoco: — Ilium. pron. 
ille, a, ud : — Illico, adv. 

4 Qao whither properas?— Quo, adv.:— Properas, act. propero* 
Quomodo how exponis? — Quomodo, adv.: — Exponis, act. expouo. 

5 An amas or amas ne dost thou love? — An, adv. : — Amas, act, 
amo: — Ne, adv. 

6 An non es or Nonne es art thou not ? — An, adv. : — Non, adv»: — 
Es, neut. sum ; — Ne, adv. 

7 An is est is it he ? — An, adv.:— Is, pron. : — Est, neut. sum. 
Idne est is not that verum true? — Id, pron. is: — Ne, adv.; — Est, 

neut. sum : — Verum, adj. verus. 

8 Possit faciiius more easily intelligi : — Possit, irr. possum: — Fa- 
ciiius, adv. comp. from facile : — Intelligi, pass, intelligo. 

9 Pugnavit farther bravely: — Pugnavit, act. pugno : — Fortiter, adv. 

10 Pugnaveram fortius more bravely ; — Pugnaveram, act. pugno : — 
Fortius, adv. comp. from fortiter. 

1 1 Pugnaverunt fortissime most bravely : — Pugnaverunt, act. pugno : 
— Fortissime, adv, §up. from fortXter, ius, issime. 

12 Intelligis facillime most easily : — Intelligis, act. intelligo : — Fa- 
cillime, adv. sup. from facile, ius, lime. 

13 Accessit propius nearer muros: — Accessit, act. accedo : — Pro- 
pius, adv. comp. from prope : — Muros, nn. mums. 

14 Dico melius better: — Dico, act. : — Melius, adv. comp, from bene, 
melius, op time. 

Dixit optime best or very well: — Dixit, act. dico: — Optime, adv. 
sup. from bene, &c. 

THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF CONJUNCTIONS, &C. 

1 Tamen although captiva et and ancilla ; — Tamen, conj. ; — Cap- 
tiva, nn. : — Et, conj. : — Ancilla, nn. 

2 Non castfa, sed but naves : — Non, adv. : — Castra, nn. : — Sed, 
conj.: — Naves, nn. 

3 Que and rex venieus :— Que, conj. ;— Rex, nn. : — Veniens, act. 
venio. 

4 Que and monebo iterum que and he rum : — Que, conj. ; — Mone- 
bo, act. moneo : — Iterum, adv. 

* The same directions which were previously given for nouns, 
will generally serve for looking out verbs in the Dictionary : for, as 
the inflection of verbs is chiefly performed by the addition of syl- 
lables to the radical part of the word, the indicative mood present 
tense of a verb will generally be found by rejecting the changeable 
termination, and annexing o or or to the part of the word remaining. 
Thus criminaris comes from criminor ; because when aris is rejected 
and or added, it is criminor. So pugnaveram is from pugno ; because 
when averanz is rejected and o added, it is pugno. The changeable 
terminations of -verbs may be known by referring to the Table at 
page 38. 



69 



CHAP. Vlllr-OF PREPOSITIONS. 



A Preposition is generally set before the word which it 
governs (prce before and positus placed), to shew the rela- 
tion it bears to some other word : as, He went to London : 
a man of wisdom. 

These prepositions govern the accusative case. 

1 Ad hoc consilium. Nep. Adversus te. Cic. 

2 Ante ostium. Plant. Apud forum est. Ter. 

3 Circa regem. Virg. Inter nos 

4 Per me. Eut. Post excidium. Eut. 

5 Praeter opinionem. Ire Brundisium versus. Cic. 

These prepositions govern the ablative case, &c. 

1 A dominatione. Ab exordio. Eut. 

2 Coram senatu. Cum fratre. Eut. 

Cum is put after the ablative case of some of the pro- 
nouns. 

3 Vade mecum. De hominibus 

4 Ex Asia. Nep. In Europam. Nep. 

5 Prae foribus. 

Tenus is set after its case : as, 

6 Mento tenus. Crurum tenus 

7 Ibo in urbem. Ov. In urbe vivere. 



What is a preposition ? Give me an example. What prepositions 
govern the accusative case? Where is versus placed? What prepo- 
sitions govern the ablative case? Where is cum placed when written 
with me, se, nobis, fyt\? Where is tenus placed? What case does 
tenus govern in the plural number ? What case does in govern when 
l + signifies into'/ What when merely in ? 



70 



THE CONSTRUING AND PARSING OF PREPOSITIONS, &C. 

1 Ad to hoc consilium : — Ad, prep. : — Hoc, pron. hie : — Consili- 
um, nn. 

Adversus against te : — Adversus, prep. ;— Te, pron. tu. 

2 Ante be/ore ostium : — Ante, prep.: — Ostium, nn. 

Est apud at forum : — Est, neut. sum :— A pud, prep. ;— Forum, nn. 

3 Circa about regem : — Circa, prep.: — Regem, nn. 
Inter between nos:— Inter, prep. : — Nos, pron. ego. 

4 Per by me : — Per, prep. : — Me, pron. ego. 

Post after excidium : — Post, prep.: — Excidium, nn. 

5 Prater contrary to opinionem : — Praeter, jwYp.; — Opinionem, nn. 
Ire versus towards Brundisium :— Ire, irr. eo :— Versus, prep. : — 

Bruudisium, nn. 

1 A. from dominatione : — A, prep. ;— Dominatione, nn. 
Ab from exordio:— Ab, prep. ; — Exordio, nn. 

2 Coram before senatu: — Coram, prep ; — Senatu, nn. 
Cum with fratre : — Cum, prep. : — Fratre, nn. 

3 Vade cum with me: — Vade, act. vado: — Cum, prep.; — Me, 
pron. ego. 

De of a- concerning hominibus: — De, prep.; — Hominibus, nn. 

4 Ex out of Asia ; — Ex, prep. ; — Asi&, nn. 

In into Europam : — In, prep. ; — Europam, nn. 

5 Prae before foribus : — Prae, prep.:— Foribus, nn. 

6 Tenus as far as mento: — Tenus, prep. ; — Mento, nn. 
Tenus as far as crurum : — Tenus, prep.:— Crurum, nn. 

7 Ibo in into urbem : — Ibo, irr. eo :— In, prep. ;— Urbem, nn. 
Vivere in in urbe: — Vivere, act. vivo:— In, prep.: — Urbe, nn. 

COMPOSITION OF WORDS. 

An acquaintance with the prepositions used in com- 
position* will greatly contribute to the young student's 
knowledge of the language. From a few radical terms 
many words are formed, which retain the signification of 
their simple parts. As compounds are generally declined 
like their radicals, the recollection of the radical word will 
be sufficient to bring to the learner's mind its numerous 



* Some words will not admit of being combined with so many pre- 
positions; but most words admit of it in some degree; and, from 
the examples here given, it will be seen how useful it is to be ac- 
quainted with the composition of words. In the following examples, 
from 16 simple words are formed about 150. 



71 

derivatives, and will most deeply i mpress on his mind the 
precse s.gnification of many words, which could other- 
wise scarcely be ascertained. 

In addition to the prepositions given in the preceding 
page, the following are used in composition : am or ami 
about or around ; con is used for cum with or together • di 
or*. -under; regain, against, or back ; se apart -'sub 
or suiter under, &c. In before adjective signifies not. 

1 Ego discipulos habeo. r . 

| Cautus velim esse ac diligens. rf 

3 Satis docte, ac perlte, fecisti. ^7 

4 Me ad credendum tua ducit oratio. ct 

5 Cedam atque ablbo. *£?' 

6 Solon Atheniensium leges scripsit. Jg 

7 Mute hanc de pectore curam. y£ 
b ±,quos ad moenia vertunt. y g ' 
9 Amnes in aequora currunt \r 8 ' 

10 Cumbando in lecto. ™&- 

11 Dum tempusdatur. „ ut ' 

12 Omnia fert jetas. J er - 

13 Retia ponere cervis. \? S ' 

It - pS l-f pd,as P rot e»u* Jeger ago. vl 8 ' 

15 Cadebat ut vellem. g Vlr S- 

16 Pacisfundamentajeci. ~ c ' 

v>2C« 

nffr^iff aaai^ *sSo B -? f ,heir simp,e ^ 

nouns, adverbs, and verbsVoiv; .£?• P^P 08 !" 01 " combined with 
si.p.e and compound ^lArJSZ^ Aft 

THE CONSTRUE AND PARS]NG 0F c0MpouvD words _ 

P«Lf r„. h -^ sc £ e ' P s t s -Ego p r o„..-Habeo, ,*. -Disci- 
discirhus a scboof-feilotv S COm P " n<1 ^ •** cum, and becomes 1- 

S um=I e £ t ^^-/^en S :-. VeI im, ,,,, voI o : - Esse , neuU 

roughly or very cautions ° r incautious, pmaratas tho- 

-Ac! e 5!St^ Pe 2 ! at * - Fec j sti > «*• <*• -Docte, «d, , 
mdocte not learned or'nnlP«™-{ ' ? ' DocU has in an d P«- ; as 
learned. * ° r UDleaf «d, pmfef, thoroughly learned or wry 



72 

4. Tua oratio ducit me ad credendum: — Tua, pron, tuus : — Ora- 
tio, nn.: — Ducit, act. duco : — Me, pron. ego: — Ad, prep.; — Cre- 
dendum, act. credo. Duco admits before it ab, ad, con, circum, de, 
e, in, ob, per, pro, se, sub, trans : and becomes abduco to lead from, 
away, &c. ; adduco to lead to or bring; conduco to lead together 
with or conduce ; and so of its other compounds, uniting the signifi- 
cation of the preposition with the verb. 

5 Cedam atque abibo : — Cedam, act. cedo : — Atque, conj. : — Abi- 
bo, neut. abeo. Cedo may admit these prepositions ; abs, ad, con, de, 
dis, ex, in, inter, pre, pro, re, se, sub. 

6 Solon scripsit leges Atheniensium: —Solon, nn.: — Scripsit, act. 
scribo. Scribo is compounded with ad, circum, con, de, ex, per, pra, 
pro, re, sub, trans; as adscrlbo or asscribo, or ascribo,, — for when a pre- 
position ending with a consonant is combined with a verb, the last 
letter becomes the same with the first of the verb, or some other 
that will easily unite with it, and sometimes it is omitted, as in as- 
cribo, for the sake of sound. 

7 Mitte hanc curam de pectore : — Mitte, act. mitto: — Hanc, 
pron* : — Curam, nn. : — De, prep. ; — Pectore, nn. Mitto admits of 
composition with ad, con, de, di, e, in, inter, ob, per, prm, pro, re, sub; 
as admitto, con or committo, the n being changed into m, for the rea- 
son mentioned in the last. 

8 Vertunt equos ad moenia: — Equos, nn.: — Ad, prep.; — Mcenia, 
nn. : — Vertuut act. verto — a, ad, con, de, e, in, ob, per, prcs, re, sub. 

9 Amnes currant in a>quora : — Amnes, nn.:— In, prep. ; — JEquora, 
nn. : — Currunt, neut. curro — ad, circum, con, de, dis, ex, in, ob, per, 
pra, pro, re, sub. 

10 Cumbando in lecto :— Cumbando, neut. Cubo: — In, prep.: — 
Lecto, nn. It is the third conjugation when compounded with ac, 
con, de, dis, in, oc, pro, re, sue, super, in. 

11 Dum tempus datur : — Dum, adv.; — Tempus, nn. — Datur, pass. 
do. Do is compounded with ab, ad, con, de, di, e, in, per, pro. See 
Jones's Grammar of the Latin Tongue, under Do, page 67. 

12 /Etas fert omnia all things: — /Etas, nn. : — Fert, irr. fero : — Om- 
nia, adj. Fero admits of these prepositions before it — e/6, ad, con, 
de, dis, e, in, per, post, prce, pro, se; as abfero or uffero, the b being 
changed into/, for the reasons previously assigned. 

13 Ponere retia cervis :— Retia, nn. — Cervis, nn. :— Ponere, act. 
pono — ad, con, de, dis, ex, in, inter, ob, post, pra, pro, re, se, trans. 

14 Ipse (ego) aeger ago capellas protenus; — Ipse, pron.: — iEger, 
adj. ; — Ago, act. ; — Capellas, nn. — Protenus, adv. Ago in composi- 
tion changes a into i in the present, &c, but not in the preterperfect. 
ab, ad, con, de, ex, per, pro, re, sub, trans ; as abigo, adigo, ofc. 

15 Cadebat ut vellem : — Cadebat, neut. cado : — Ut, conj. ; — Vel- 
lem, irr. volo. Cado has these prepositions — ad, con, de, ex, in, ob, 
re. The a is changed into i short ; as adcido or accido, concido, §c. 

16 Jeci fnndamenta pacis; — Jeci, act. jacio: — Fnndamenta, nn.: 
— Pacis, nn. Jacio when combined with these prepositions ad, con, 
de, e, inter, ob, pro, sub, trans, changes the a into c. 



73 



Chap. IX.— The GENDER of NOUNS. 



GENERAL RULES. 

The names of males, &c. Valpy — Propria qua maribus, 
&c. Eton. 

EXAMPLES TO ILLUSTRATE THE GENERAL RULES. 

1 Jovis arbore. Apollinis urbes. Ov. 

2 Aristides, Lysimachi filius. Nep. 

3 Aristomachen sororern Dionis. Nep. 

4 Cultum Dianae. Cupidinis ira. Ov. 

5 Marcus Vipsanius Agrippa. Nep. 

6 Domum Chersonesi. Corintho colonos. Nep. 

7 Flumen Rhodanum. Cces. 

8 Strymonis undam. Frondibus ulmi. Virg. 

9 Myrtus hastilibus. Virg. 

10 Insula Britannia. Cces. 

11 Nihil doli. Opus auxilio. Nep. 

QUESTIONS TO GENERAL RULES. 

What gender are the names of heathen gods? of men? of rivers ? 
What is the gender of the names of goddesses? of females? of re- 
gions ? of the common names of trees ? 
What gender are nouns indeclinable, and those ending in urn? 



THE PARSING TABLE TO PROVE THE GENDER OF NOUNS, 

in addition to what is named of the gender in table, 
page 13. 

— — is the— gender, because it— by the general rule l>r by the — 
special rule, or by an exception to the ) which sa^fc, 

Example 1. Apollinis is a noun of the third declension, because 
the g. ends in is, declined like Lapis, in the singular number, geni- 
tive case. I decline it, singular nom. hie Apollo, s. hujus Apollinis, 
it is the masculine gender, because it is the name of a god, by the ge- 
neral rule which says, Propria quae maribus tribuuntur, mascula dicas; 
ut sunt Divdrum, Apollo. 

H 



74 

When the pupil can, with ease, go through with words according 
to the preceding Example, he may omit some particulars: thus — 

Example 2. IrH a noun, s. nom. hac ira; g. hujus ira.—Nomen 
non crescens, &c. — d. huk ira; ac. hanc iram : v. 6 ira: ab. ab hac 
ira, — Ira is the ab. case. 

Example 3. Gender of an adjective ; Pari, adj. s. nom. hie, hac, 
hoc par: — Adjectiva unam duntaxat habentia vocetn, ut felix, audax; 
retinent genus otnne sub unci.—g. hujus parts : d. huic pari ; ac. hunc 
et hancparem, hoc par; ab. ab hoc, hac, hoc pare vel pari. — Pari is the 
ab. case. 

Example 4. Mali, adj. s. nom. Malus, mala, malum. — At si tres 
variant voces; sacer ut, sacra, sacrum, vox prima est mas, altera famina, 
tertia neutrum. — g. mali, mala, mali. — Mali is g. s. n. 

1 Arbore from the tree Jo vis of Jupiter ; ox from the oak: — Arbore, 

ab. s. arbor, oris, f. 3:— Jovis, g. s. Jupiter, g. Jovis, d. Jovi, &c. 
m. 3. Urbes the cities Apollinis of Apollo, the god of music: — Urbes, 
ac.pl. urbs, is, f. 3 :— Apollinis, g. s. Apollo, inis, m. 3. 

2 Aristides Aristides, a noble Athenian, filius the son, Lysimachi of 
Lysimachus, a Macedonian : — Aristides, nom. s. Aristides, is, m. 3 : — 
Filius, nom. s. filius, i, m. 2 :— Lysimachi, g. s. Lysimaclws, i. m. 2. 

3 Aristomachen Aristomache the wife of Dionysius, tyrant of Syra- 
cuse^ sororem the sister Dionis of Dion a Syracusan: — Aristomachen, 

ac. s. Aristomache, es, f. 1, declined like Epitome. See Eton Notes 
under musa: — Sororem, ac. s. soi or, oris, f. 3: — Dionis, g. s. Dion, 
onis, m. 3. 

4 Culture the worship Diana? of Diana, the goddess of hunting: — 
Cultum, ac. s, cult?*s, us, m. 4 : — Diana?, g. s. Diana, ae, f. 1. Ira by 
the anger Cupidinis of Cupid, the god of love;— Ira, ab. s. ira, ae, f. 1 : 
— Cupidinis, g. s. Cupido, inis, m. £. 

5 Marcus Vipsanius Agrippa a celebrated Roman general:— ^ Mar- 
cus, nom, s. Marcus, i, m. 2 : — Vipsanii/s, i, m. 2 : — Agrippa, ae, m. 1 . 

6 Domum home Chersonesi, at Chersonesus, a peninsula near the sea 
of Marmtira: — Domum, ac. s. domws, i, vel us, f. 2 vel 4 : — Chersone- 
si, g. s. Chersonesws, i, f. 2. Colonos husbandmen Corintho from 
Corinth, a famous city of Greece: — Colonos, ac.pl. colonws, i, m. 2 : — 
Corintho, ab. s. Corinthns, i, f. 2. 

7 Flumen the river Rhodanum Rhone, a river in France: — Flumen, 
ac. s. flumew, inis, n. 3 : — Rhodanum, ac. s. Rhodanas, i, Hi. 2. 

8 Uudam the water Strymonis of Strymon, a river in Macedonia: — 
Undam, ac. s. under, a?, f. l : — Strymonis, g\ s. Strymon, onis, m. 3. 
Ulmi the elms fi ondibus with leaves : — Ulmi, nom, pi. ulmws, i, f. 2 : — 
Frondibus, ab. pi. frons, dis, f. 3. 

9 Myi tus the myrtle hastilibus/or spears: — Myrtus, nom, s. myrt7*s, 
i, f. 2: — Hastilibus, ab. pL hastily, is, n. 3. 

10 Insula the island Britannia Britain: — Insula, a?, f. 1: — Britan- 
nia, as, f. 1. h. 

11 Nihil nothing doli of deceit, or no deceit: — Nihil an indeclinable 
noun : — Doli, g. s. dolus, i, in. 2. Opus need auxilio of assistance : — 
Opus, an indeclinable noun: — Auxilio, ab. s. auxiliwm, i, n, 2. 



75 



OF THE SPECIAL RULES. 

If the gender of a noun cannot be discovered by the ge- 
neral rules, recourse must be had to the special. 

There are three special rules, which should first be per- 
fectly learned. They may be illustrated by proving the 
gender of every noun coming under the three special rules, 
and arranged under the regular nouns of the first and third 
declensions in page 13 and 17. 

In parsing the words in these lessons, almost the sole 
attention should be given to the gender : the general and 
special rules will then be soon understood. 

While the pupil is learning the exceptions to each spe- 
cial rule, the words arranged under that declension, most 
adapted to illustrate what the pupil is learning in his Gram- 
mar, may be construed again, and the gender of every 
word proved : for instance, while the pupil is learning the 
exceptions to the first special rule he may read the irre- 
gular nouns of the first declension, and give the rule for 
the gender of every word (for many of these are irregular 
in gender as well as in declension), and both regular and 
irregular nouns of the second, third, and fourth declen- 
sions. The same plan may be followed, with the excep- 
tions to the second and third special rules, by reading the 
nouns arranged under the third declension. 

Which are called general rules? When the general rules will not 
show the gender of a noun, how is it discovered ? How many special 
rules are there ? What do you mean by a noun not increasing? What 
by a noun increasing, long or short? Which is the penultimate syl- 
lable? Does mo»s,-ontis increase long or short? How do you know the 
o is long? To what special rule does it belong? Why? If mon.s, -ontis 
belong to the third special rule, why is it masculine ? 



H 2 



76 



CHAP. X. — Of the Preterperfect Tenses and 
Supines of Verbs. 



The regular rules for forming the preterperfect tenses 
and supines of verbs in the first, second, and fourth conju- 
gations, should be first learned and illustrated, by constru- 
ing the regular verbs in the conjugation under considera- 
tion. Then the rules in the third conjugation, and illus- 
trated in the same manner. 

The irregular verbs in each conjugation may be con- 
strued, while the pupil is learning the exceptions in the 
Grammar. Every word must be carefully parsed, and the 
rules for the preterperfect tense and supine always required. 

To exemplify the rules for the preterperfect tenses and 
supines of compound verbs, some of those in page 71 com- 
bined w/th prepositions may be taken. 

For Passive Verbs, the words arranged under the first, 
second, third, and fourth conjugations and deponents may 
be construed and parsed. 

What should be first learned? Are not the rules for the third con- 
jugation to be learned after the first, second, and fourth, because 
they are not so regular ? When you perfectly understand regular 
verbs, do you not proceed to the irregular? 

What do you read and parse to illustrate the formation of the pre- 
terperfect tense, &c. of compound verbs ? What to show the forma- 
tion of verbs passive? 

ETYMOLOGICAL PARSING TABLE FOR THE PRETERPERFECT 
TENSES AND SUPINES OF VERBS. 

Name the conjugation. — Decline to the preter. — Give rule for 
preter. — Decline to supine. — Give rule. — Then finish the verb. 

Example 1. Saltabas, a verb of the first conjugation ; Salto, sul- 
fas, sultavi. — As in prcesenti perfectum format in avi : ut, saltas, sal- 
tavi. — Saltdre, saltandi, saltandum, saltatum. Wfit turn, ut, saltdvi, 
saltatum. — Saltdtu, saltans, saltalurus, to dance. — Saltabas is the ind. 
preterim. 2 s. 

Example 2. Lavtibo, a verb of [he first conjugation; Lavo, lavas, 
lavi. — As in prcesenti perfectum format in avi : ut, no, nas ? navi; vocito, 



77 



vocitas, vocitdvi. Deme lavo lavi. Lavdre, lavandi, hxvando, lavan- 

dum, lotum vel lautum, lavdtum, — Vi jit turn: ut flati fiatum ; pari 
excipe past urn ; dat lavi lotum, interdum lautum, atque lavatum ; Lotu, 
lautu, lavdtu, lavans, loturus, lauturus, lavaturus to wash. — Lavdbo is 
the ind. fut. 1 s. 

Example 3. Celatur is a verb passive of the first conjugation: 
Celor, celdris vel celare, celatus sum vel/wi; — Verba in -or admittunt 
ex posteriore supino praeteiitum, verso -u per-«s, et sum consociato, 
vel fui: ut a celdtu, celatus sum vel fui;—Celdri, celatus, celandus, to 
be concealed. Celatur is in the ind. pr. S 8. 



SYNTAX. 



Syntax is the proper arrangement of words in a sentence: 
it consists of two parts, 

1st. Concord. 
2nd. Government. 

1. Concord is when one word agrees with another in 
case, gender, number, or person.* 

2. Government is when one word requires another to be 
in a particular case or mood. 

What is Syntax? How is it divided? What is Concord? What is 
Government ? 



* While the pupil is going through the concords he should write 
the exercise on the concords from the Eton Exempla Minora, Dr. 
Valpy's First Exercises, Turner's, Clarke's, Whittaker's, Howard's, 
or any other useful Latin Exercises. Mr. Tocquot has published a 
Key to Clarke's and Turner's Exercises, called the Latin Scholar's 
Guide. Messrs. Whittaker and Howard have also published Keys to 
their Latin Exercises. 

h3 



78 



CHAP. I.— The CONCORDS. 

There are three Concords. 

1st. Between the Nominative Case and Verb. 
2d. Between the Substantive and Adjective. 
3d. Between the Relative and Antecedent. 

In every concord there is a word agreeing, and the word 
with which it agrees. Let this be remembered in all the 
concords. 

To agree in number and person, is to be of the same 
number and person. When the nominative case is sin- 
gular, the verb should be singular; and when the nomina- 
tive is plural, the verb should be plural. When the nomi- 
native case is the first person, the verb should be the first 
person ; and when the nominative case is the second per- 
son, the verb should also be the second person. 

To agree in number, case, and gender, is, at all times, 
to have the adjective, pronoun, or participle, of the same 
number, case, and gender, as its noun. 

How many concords are there? What are they? 
What is there in every concord? What is it to agree in number and 
person? What is it to agree in number, case, and gender? 



79 



THE FIRST CONCORD. 

The first concord is between the nominative case and 
the verb. 

A verb agrees with its nominative case, &c. Eton Gram- 
mar, p. 58. Verbum person ale, <5fc. Eton Grammar, p. 85. 
Ruddiman's Grammar, Rule 2. Valpy's Grammar, p. 80. 

Filii disc lint. Cic. The sons learn. 

Note. This concord may be illustrated by construing again some 
of the examples in Etymology from p. 41 to p. 64, and by adding to 
the preceding directions for etymological parsing the following table. 

SYNTACTICAL PARSING TABLE. 

Parse the words as in the Tables in Etymology, then add — 

agrees with its nominative case in number and person : 

rule — 

Example 1. Discunt, a verb of the third conjugation ; disco, dis- 
cis, didici.—Scofit vi: ut pasco, pavi, vult posco, poposci,vult didici, 
disco. — Disccre, discendi, discendo, discendum. — No supine: — Hcec 
rarb aut nunquam retinebunt verba supinum : lambo, mico, micui, rudo, 
scabo, parco, peperci, dispesco, posco, disco. — Discens, to learn. — 
Diseunt is in the hid. pr. 3. pi. and agrees with its nominative case 
filii. — Verbum personate, &c. 

OBSERVATIONS, &C* 

Sometimes an infinitive, &c. Eton Grammar, p. 59. — 
Aliquando oratio, -fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 86. — Many no- 
minative cases singular, &c. Eton Grammar, p. 59. — Ver- 
ba, infinitwi modi, Sfc. Eton Grammar, p. 86. — No?nina- 
fivus pronominum, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 85. Ruddi- 
man's Grammar, Rule 2, note 4. Valpy's Grammar, p. 
80. 

What is the first concord? What do you mean by saying a verb 
agrees, &c? Which is the nominative case? What is its number and 
person? Which is the verb agreeing with it? Is not a sentence or an 
infinitive mood sometimes the nominative case to the verb? Is the 
nominative case of a pronoun generally expressed ? 

* Before these observations are entered upon, the pupil might go 
through the three concords; and when these are generally under- 
stood, the observations will not perplex him. 



80 

1 Pulchritudo mundi, ordo rerum caelestium, conversio 

solis, lunae, sideriimque omnium, indicant satis as- 
pectu ipso ea omnia non esse fortuita, Cic. 

2 Pietas erga parentes est fundamentum virtutum om- 

nium. Cic. 

3 Speravi melius., quia me meruisse putavi. Ov. 

4 Furor iraque mentem 

Praecipitant. Virg. 

h Vita, mors, divitiae, paupertas, omnes homines vehe- 

mentissime permovent. Cic. 

6 Esse oportet ut vivas, n6n vivere ut edas. Cic. 

7 Animum vincere, iracundiam cohibere, praeclarum 

est. Cic. 

8 Haec neque ego nequ£ tu fecimus* Ter. 

9 Contentum esse rebus suis maxima? sunt certissimae- 

qu) divitiae. Cic. 

10 Parce gaudere oportet, et sensim queri ; 

Totam quia vitam miscet dolor et gaudium. Phced. 

11 Debemur morti nos nostraque. Hor. 

Is the first i in vehementissimS, Example 5, long or short? Why? 
Is the second i in iracundiam, Example 7, long or short? Why? 
Which is the word agreeing? the word with which it agrees? 

ORDER, &C.* 

1 Pulchritu'do mun'di, oi y do caeles'tium re'ruro, convei'sio so'lis, 
lu'nae, que om'nium sid'erum, ip'so aspec'tu at first sight sa'tis in'dicant 
ea om'nia, non es'se fortn'ita. 

2 Pi'etas er'ga paren'tes est fundamen'tum om'nium virtu'tum. 

3 Spera'vi melius (from be'ne) qui'a puta'vi me that I meruis'se 
(it). 

4 Fu'ror que i'ra praecip'itant men'tem. 

5 Vi'ta, mors, divit'iae, panper'tas, vehementis'sime per'movent 
om A nes horn'ines. 

6 Opor'tet (te) es'se (from e'do) ut vi'vas, non viv'ere ut e'das. 

7 Vin'cere an'imum, cohibe're iracun'diam, praecla'rum est. 

8 Ne'que e'go ne'que tu fe'eimns haec. 

9 Max'imae que certis'simae divit'iae sunt es'se conten'tum re'bus 
su'is. 

10 Qpor'tet (te) gaude're par'ce, et que'ri sen'sim sparingly;' qui'a 
do'lor (mis'cet) et gau'dium mis'cet to'tam vi'tam* 

1 1 Nos que nos'tra debe'mur are subject mor'ti. 

* This is accented according to the Rules in pages 10 and 11. 



81 



THE SECOND CONCORD. 

The second concord is between the substantive and ad- 
jective. 

An adjective, whether it be, &c. Eton Grammar, p. 59. 
— Adjectzva participia, Eton Grammar, p. 86. Valpy's, 
p. 81. Ruddiman's, Rule 1. 

Perpetui imperii. Nep. Bona pars hominum. Hot. 

Note, For examples, let the adjectives from p. 29 to p. 34, and 
the participles, p. 65, be again construed, and to the parsing of an ad- 
jective, page 74, Examples 3 and 4, let the following table be added. 



SYNTACTICAL PARSING TABLE FOR AN ADJECTIVE. 

agrees with its substantive in gender, number, and case: 

rule. — 

Example. Perpetui, adj. s. nom. Perpetuus, perpetua, perpetuum. — 
At si tres variant voces; sacerut, sacra, sacrum, vox prima est mas, 
altera fcemina, tertia neutrum. — g. Perpetui, perpetuce, perpetui. — Per' 
petui, is g. s. n. to agree with its substantive imperii — Adjectzva parti- 
cipia, fyc. 

OBSERVATIONS, &C. 

The masculine gender is more worthy, &c Eton Gram- 
mar, p. 60. Valpy's, p. 80. — Many substantives singu- 
lar, &c. Eton Grammar, p. 60. Valpy's, p. 82. — When 
in English the word thing, &c. Eton Grammar, p. 60. 
Valpy's, p, 82. Ruddiman's, Rule 1, note 2. — The word 
man joined with an adjective is omitted, and the adjective 
is put in the masculine. Valpy's, p. 82. 

What is the second concord ? What do you mean by agreeing in 
number, case, and gender ? Which is the most worthy gender? What 
gender is the adjective when the word thing is understood? What 
when man ? 



82 

1 Vulgare amlci nomen, sed rara est fides. Phad. 

2 Quid stultius, quam incerta pro certis habere, falsa 

pro veris ? Cic. 

3 Rari boni. Juv. Sum felix. Ov. 
4 Labor omnia vicit 

Im pro bus. Virg. 

5 Sapiens est semper beatus. Cic. 

6 Video meliora, proboque ; 

Deteriora sequor. Ov. 

7 Nisi utile est quod facimus, stulta est gloria. Phced. 

8 Inops, potentem dum vult imitari, perit Phced. 

9 Difficile* est proprie communia dicere. Hor. 
10 Durum ! sed levius fit patientia 

Quicquid corrigere est nefas. Hor. 

1 1- Impii apud inferos poenas luent. Cic. 

12 Temeritas et ignavia semper turbulentae sunt. Cic. 

13 Divitioe, bona valetiido, potentia, honores, sunt ca- 

duca et incerta. Cic. Amic. 

14 Pater mihi et mater mortui sunt. Tcr. 

Which is the word agreeing? the word with which it agrees? 

ORDER, &C. 

1 Nq'men ami'ci (est) vulga're, sed fi'des sincerity est ra'ra. 
t Quid stul'tius, quam habe're to account incer'ta pro certis, fal'sa 
pro ve'ris ? 

3 Bo'ni (hom'ines) (sunt) ra'ri. Sum fe'lix. 

4 Im'probus great la'bor vi'cit om'nia. 

5 Sa'piens (ho'mo) est sem'per bea'tus (ho'mo). 

6 Vi'deo melio'ra que pro'bo, se'quor deterio'ra. 

7 Ni'si quod fa'cimus est u'tile, glo'ria boasting est stul'ta. 

8 I'nops (ho'mo) pe'rit dum vult imita'ri poten'tem. 

9 Est difrVcile di'cere pro'prie commu'nia. 

10 Du'rum It is hard, sed quic'quid est ne'fas corrig'ere fit le'vins 
patien'tia. 

11 Im'pii (hom'ines) lu'ent poe'nas shall suffer punishment a'pud 
in'feros with those below or in Hell. 

12 Temeritas et igna'via sem'per sunt turbulen'tae. 

13 Divit'ia?, bo'na valetu'do, poteii'tia, hono'res, sunt cadu'ca et 
incer'ta. 

14 Pa'ter mi'hi my father et ma'ter sunt mor'tui. 



83 



THE THIRD CONCORD. 

The third Concord is between the antecedent and the 
relative.* 

The relative agrees with, &c. Eton Grammar, p. 60. 
Valpy's, p. 83. — Relatzvum cum antecedente, fyc. Eton Gram- 
mar, p. 87. Ruddiman's Grammar, Rule 6. 

1 Leve fit, quod bene fertur, onus. Ov. 

Note. More Examples may be found in Etymology, p. 35 : these 
must be construed, and to what is said of the parsing of pronouns in 
Etymology, you add the directions in the following table. 

SYNTACTICAL PARSING TABLE FOR THE RELATIVE. 

is a relative, &c. and agrees with its antecedent — in gender, 

number, and person, or with — understood after it in number, case, 
and gender : the rule is — . 

Example. Quod is a relative, nom. s, n. and agrees with its an- 
tecedent onus in gender, number, and person, or with onus under- 
stood after it in number, case, and gender: the rule is, Relatlvum 
cum, §c» or Adjediva participia, fyc, 

OBSERVATIONS, &C. 

An infinitive mood or, &c. Eton Grammar, p. 59. — 
Aliquando oratio, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 87. — Si nomina- 
tlvus r'elaiivo, Sfc. Eton Grammar, p. 88. Valpy's, p. 84. 
Ruddiman's, Rule 7. 

What is the third concord ? How does the relative agree with its 
antecedent? How, with the word understood after the relative? Is 
this like the second concord ? 



* This concord would be easily understood, if the pupil would re- 
member that " the relative always agrees in gender, number, and 
case with the substantive understood after it." Let the pupil at all 
times be taught to supply the substantive, and then this concord is 
nothing but the second repeated ; for the relative is always the same 
number, case, and gender as the supplied substantive Littrce quas 
(litems understood) dedi. Cic. The letter which (letter) I gave. 
Vulnus quod (minus understood) feci. Mart. The wound which 
(wound) I made. 



84 



2 Est genus quoddam hominum, quod Helotes vocatur, 

quorum magna multitudo agros Lacedsemoniorum 
colit, servorumque munere fungitur. Nep. 

3 Habent insidias hominis blanditiae mali, 

Quas vitemus. Phced. 

4 Nihil est malum, nisi quod turpe, et vitiosum est. Cic. 

5 Non semper ea sunt, quae videntur ; decipit 

Frons prima multos. Phced. 

6 Vince animos iramque tuam, qui caetera vincis. Ov. 
7 Acceptissima semper 

Munera sunt, auctor quae pretiosa facit. Ov. 

8 Verum mihi dici volo, qui mendacem odi. Plaut. 

9 Illud animal praeditum ratione, quern vocamus homi- 

nem. Cic. 

10 Cui paras divitias ? et cujus caus& laboras? Cic. Am. 

11 Esto contentus rebus suis, quod proprium est divitia- 

rum. Cic. 

12 Seipsum noscere quod ut difficillimum est, Ha utilis- 

simum. Cic. 

Whidi is the word agreeing ? the word with which it agrees ? 

ORDER, 8CC. 

1 O'nus quod (o'nus) be'ne fer'tur (from feror)fit le've. 

2 Est there is quod'dam ge'nus hom'inum quod (gefnus) voca'tur 
Helo'tes a Helot or Spartan slave ( Helotes, ae, m. I.) quo'rum (gen'erum) 
mag'na multitu'do co'lit ag'ros Lacedaemonio'rum, que fun'gitur mu'- 
nere servo'rum. 

3 Blandit'ia? ma'li hominis ha'bent insid'ias, quas {insid'ias) vi- 
te'mus. 

4 Ni'hil est ina'lum (negotfium) ni'si quod (negot'ium) est tur'pe et 
vitio'sum. 

5 Ea (negotHa) non sunt sem'per, qua? (negofia) viden'tur ; Pri'ma 
frons de'cipit mul'tos (hom'ines). 

6 (Tu) Qni you who vin'cis caet'era (negot'ia) vin'ce an'imos (your) 
dispositions que tu'am i'ram. 

7 Sunt they are serr/per acceptis'sima mu'nera quze (mu'nera) auc'tor 
fa'cit pretio'sa. 

8 Vo'lo ve'rum di'ei nii'hi (ego understood in mi'hi) qui o'di men- 
da'cem. 

9 Il'lud an'imal (est) praed'itum ratio'ne, quem (hom'inem meaning 
animal) voca'rnus hom'inem. 

10 Cui (hom'ini) pa'ras divit'ias? et (pro) cau'sa for the sake cn'jus 
(hom'inis) labo'ras? 

11 Es'to eonten'tus su'is re'bus, quod est prop'rium divitia'rum. 

12 Nos'cere seip'sum quod which ut as est difficil'limum ita (est) 
utilis'simum. 



85 



CHAP. 11.— OF GOVERNMENT. 



Government is when one word requires another to be in 
a particular case or mood. 

In every sentence where there is government, the two 
points which require the pupil's attention are the word 
governing and the word or words governed, 

THE CONSTRUCTION OF NOUNS. 

2uum duo substantia, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 88. Val- 
py's, p. 85. Ruddiman's, Rules 11 and 12. — Adjectzvum 
in neutro, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 88. Valpy's, p. 86. 
Ruddiman's, Rule 13. 

1 Animi hominum sunt immortales. Cic. 

2 Plus habet operis quam ostentationis. sluin. 

Note. To what is said in the Etymological parsing must be added 
the following 

SYNTACTICAL PARSING TABLE FOR GOVERNMENT. 

is a case, mood, &c. governed by — , the rule is — . 

Example. Hominum, a noun, s. nom. hie et hcec homo; g. hujus 
homtnis. — Communis generis sunt ista; vigil, pugil, exul, prasul, 
homo. — d. huic homini; ac. hunc et hanc hominem: v. & homo; ab. 
ab hoc et hcic homine ; pi. nom. hi et hce homines ; g. horum et harum 
hominum. — Hominum is g. pi. governed by the substantive animi. — 
Quum duo substantia, &c. 

What is government? Which are the two points to be noticed? 
What is the case of the latter substantive? What case does an adjec- 
tive in the neuter gender require? What case do opus, usus, &c. re- 
quire ? Which is the word governing? Which is the word governed 1 

order, &c. 

1 An'imi hom'inum sunt immortales. 

2 Ha'bet it has plus op'eris of toil quam ostentatio'nis. 

l 



86 

3 Nil opus est bello. Ov. 

4r Animi cultus quasi quidam humanitatis cibus. Cic. 

5 Justitia est omnium domina, et reglna virtiitum. Cic. 

6 Ego ingrati animi crimen horreo. Cic. 

7 Nil opus est, dixit, certamine, Romulus, ullo. Ov. 

8 Consuetudinis magna vis est. Cic. Tusc. 

9 Formosos saepe inveni pessimos, 

Et turpi facie multos cognovi optimos. Phced. 

10 Habes somnum imaginem mortis ; eamque quotidi& 

induis. Cic. 

11 Plus esse in uno sa^pe quam in turba boni 

tradam. Phced. 

12 Ubirerum testimoniaadsunt, quid opus est verbis? Cic. 

Which is the word governing? Which is the word governed? 

ORDER, &C. 

3 Est there is nil o'pus beKlo. 

4 Cul'tus an'imi (est) qua'si qui'dam ci'bus humanita'tis of human 
nature. 

5 Justit'ia est dom'ina et regi'na om'nium virtn'tum. 

6 E'go hor'reo crifnien ingra'ti an'imi. 

7 Rom'ulus dix'it, Est nil o'pus ul'lo certam'ine. 

8 Vis consuetu'dinis est mag'na. 

9 Sse'pe inve'ni formo'sos (es'se) pes'simos, et eogno'vi mul'tos 
tur'pi fa'cie (es'se) op'timos. 

10 Ha'bes som'num imag'inem mor'tis ; que quatid'ie in'duis e'am. 

11 Tra'dam / can deliver or affirm es'se that there is sae'pe plus bo'ni 
in u'no (hom'ine) quam in tur'b&. 

12 U'bi testimo'nia re'rum ad'sunt, quid est o'pus ver'bis? 



87 



THE CONSTRUCTION OF ADJECTIVES. 



THE GENITIVE CASE AFTER THE ADJECTIVE. 

Adjectlva qua desiderium, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 89. 
Valpy's, p. 89. Ruddi man's, Rule 14. — Nomina parti- 
tlva, Sfc. Eton Grammar, p. 90. Valpy's, p. 88. Ruddi- 
man's, Rule 15. 

1 Omnes oderunt immemores beneficii. Cic. 

2 Nescia mens hominum fati, sortisque futurse. Virg. 

3 Nemo nostrum est sine culpa. Sen. 

4 Indus est omnium flumxnum maximus, Cic. 

5 Conscia mens recti famoe mendacia ridet. Ov. 

6 Elephanto belluarum nulla prudentior. Cic. 

7 Minima malorum eligenda sunt. Cic. 

8 Omnium rerum mors est extremum. Cic. 

9 Velocissimum omnium animalium est delphinus. Plin. 

10 Est natura hominis novitatis avida. Ov. 

11 Ndn ignara mali, miseris succurrere disco. Virg. 

What case do adjectives govern which signify desire, knowledge, 
fear, &c? Adjectives denoting a part, or comparative and superla- 
tive? Interrogation and the answer? Which is tlie word governing? 
the word governed 1 

ORDER, &C 

1 Om'nes ode'runt immem'ores benefVcii. 

2 Mens hom'inum (est) nes'cia fa'ti que futu'rae sor'tis. 

3 Ne'mo nos'trum est si'ne cul'p&. 

4 In'dus est max'imus om'nium fium'irmra. 

5 Mens con'scia rec'ti ri'det menda'cia fa'mae. 

6 Nul'la bellua'rum (est) pruden'tior elephan'to. 

7 Min'irna malo'rum eligen'da sunt. 

8 Mors est extre'mum om'nium re'rum. 

9 Delphi'nus est (an'imal) velocis'simum om'niam animalium. 

10 Natu'ra hom'inis est av'ida novita'tis. 

11 Non (sum) igna'ra roa'li, (et) dis'co succur'rere mis'eris. 



88 



THE DATIVE CASE AFTER THE ADJECTIVE. 

Adjectlva quibus, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 91. Valpy's, 
p. 91. Ruddiman's, Rule 16 and 17. 

1 Magnae periclo sunt opes obnoxioe. Phced. 

2 -> Si sum tibi cara, caveto. Ov. 

3 Utilius homini nihil est quam recte loqui. Phced. 

4 Non mihi grata dies : noctes vigilantur amarse : 
Nee tener in misero pectore somnus adest. ' Ov, 

5 Universis Atheniensibus meritd Attlcus erat carissi- 

mus. Nep, 

6 Urticae proxima soep& rosa est. Ov. 

7 Nihil mortalibus arduum est. Hor, 

8 Homines hominibus maxime utiles esse possunt. Cic. 

9 Morti nihil est tarn simile quam somnus. Cic. 

What case do adjectives require that signify an advantage, disad- 
vantage, &c? Words compounded with con? Adjectives signifying 
likeness, &c? Natus, cotnmMus, and adjectives in bilis? Which is 
the word governing ? the word governed ? 

ORDER, &C. 

1 Mag'nae o'pes sunt obnox'iae peii'clo (contracted for peric'ulo). 

2 Si sum ca'ra tib'i, cave'to take care of yourself. 

3 Ni'hil est util'ius hom'ini quam lo'qui rec'te. 

4 Di'es non (est) gra'ta mi'hi: ama'rae noc'tes vigilan'tur: Nee 
te'ner som'nus ad'est in mis'ero pec'tore. 

5 At'ticus e'rat mer'ito caris'simus uuiver'sis Athenier/sibus. 

6 Ro'sa est sae'pe prox'inaa in ti'cke. 

7 Ni'hil est ar'duum mortal'ibus. 

8 Hom'ines pos'sunt may es'se Aemax'ime i/tiles homin'ibus. 

9 Ni'hil est lam sim'ile mor'ti quam som'nus. 



89 



T«E ACCUSATIVE CASE, &C. AFTER THE ADJECTIVE, 

Magnitudinis mensura, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 92. Val- 
py's, p. 106. Ruddiman's, Rule 18. 

1 Muri Babylonis erant ducentos pedes alti, lati quin- 

qtiagenos. Plin. 

2 Fossa sex cubitis alta, duodecim lata. Liv. 

THE ABLATIVE CASE, &C. AFTER THE ADJECTIVE. 

Adjectiva, quw ad, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 92. Valpy's, 
p. 103. Ruddiman's, Rules 19 — 21. — Comparativa, cum, 
fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 93. Valpy's, p. 99. Ruddiman's, 
p. 90. 

2 Non est ilia fortitudo, quae ration is expers. Cic. 

4 Quid est dulcius otio literato ? Cic. 

5 Quid est raiione praestantius? Cic. 

6 Nihil laudabilius, nihil magno et praeclaro viro dig- 

nius, placabilitate atque dementia. Cic. 

7 Quid est optabilius sapienti&? Cic. 

In what case is the measure of space, distance, &c. put ? What cases 
do adjectives require that signify plenty, want, &c? words which sig- 
nify the instrument, cause, &c? What case do dignus, indignus, &c. 
govern ? Which is the word governing ? Which tfie word governed ? 

ORDER, &C. 

1 Mu'ri Babylo'nis e'rant al'ii ducen'tos pe'des, la'ti quinquage'nos. 

2 Fos'sa (fu'it) al'ta sex cu'bitis, la'ta duod'ecinr. 

S Il'la non est fortitu'do, quae (est) ex'pers ratio'nis. 

4 Quid est dul'citis o'tio litera'to than literary leisure? 

5 Quid est prasstan'tius ratio'ne ? 

6 Ni'hii (est) laudabil'ius, ni'hil (est) dig'nius, mag'no et praecla'ro 
vi'ro, placabilita'te at'que clemen'tia.. 

7 Quid est optabil'ius sapien'ti&? 



90 



8 Nihil est assuetudine majus. Ov. 

9 Non illo melior quisquam, nee amantior aequi 

Vir fuit, aut ilia metuentior ulla Deorum. Ov. 



THE CONSTRUCTION OF PRONOUNS. 

Mei, tui, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 94. Me us, tuus, fyc. 
Eton Grammar, p. 95. 

10 Si tibi cura mei, sit tibi cura tui. Ov. 

11 Bion dixit se omnia sua secum portare. €ic. 

12 Pater ejus Neoclus generosus fuit. Nep. 

13 Coepisti melius quam desinis; ultima primis 

Cedunt: dissimiles hie vir, et ille puer. Ov. 

14 Te tua, me delectant mea. Cic. 

When are the genitive cases of primitive pronouns used? When 
the possessive meus, &c? Which is the word governing] the word 
governed ? 

ORDER, &c. 

8 Ni'hil est majus more powerful assuetn'dine than use. 

9 Non fu'it quis'quam vir me'lior il'lo (Deucalio'ne than Deuca- 
lion), nee aman'tior ae'qui, aut ul'ia metuen'tiordeo'rum il'la(Pyr'rha 
Pjrrha, the wife of Deucalion). 

10 Si (sit) cu'ra me'i tib'i, sit cu'ra tu'i tib'i. 

11 Bi'on dix'itse porta're on/nia sn'a se'eum. 

12 Ne'oclus, pa'ler e'jus of him, that is Themis f tocles 9 fn'it gene- 
ro'sus. 

13 Ccepis'ti melius quam des'inis; ul'tima ce'dunt pri'mis: hie 
vir et il'le pu'er (sunt) dissim'iles. 

14 Tu'a (nego'tia delec'tant) te, me'a (nego'tia) delec'tant me. 



91 



THE CONSTRUCTION OF VERBS. 



THE NOMINATIVE CASE AFTER THE VERB. 

Verba substantlva, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 95. Valpy's, 
p. 85. Ruddiman's, Rule 3. 

1 Socrates oraciilo sapientissimus judicatus est. , Cic. 

2 Usus rerum est optimus praeceptor. Cic. 

3 Pecuniam- in loco negligere, maximum interdum est 

lucrum. Ter. 

4 Sapientiam qui expetunt, philosophi nominantur: 

nee quidquam aliud est philosophia, si interpretari 
velis, praeter studium sapientise. Cic. 

THE GENITIVE CASE AFTER THE VERB. 

Sum genitzvum, #c. Eton Grammar, p. 96. Valpy's, p. 
90. Ruddi man's, p. 91. — Reminiscor, obliviscor, fyc. Eton 
Grammar, p. 96. 

Note. The cases governed by these verbs are best construed with- 
out any sign, as if they were in the accusative case. 

What case will come after the verb sum, and verbs passive of 
calling? What case does sum require when signifying possession? 
Verbs of accusing, &c. require what case? Satdgo, misereor, &c. ? 
Reminiscor, &c? Do these verbs iu construing admit of any sign 
after the dative or genitive case? Which is the word governing? the 
word governed ? 

order, &c. 

1 Soc'rates judica'tus est sapientis'simus orac'ulo. 

2 U'sus re'rtim est op'timus prsecep'tor. 

3 Neglig / ere pecu'uiam in lo'co at a proper time est inter'dum 
max'imum lu'crum. 

4 Qui ex'petunt sapien'tiam, nominan'tur philos'ophi : nee est 
philoso'phia quid'quam a'liud, si ve'lis interpreta'ri (e'am), prae'ter 
stu'dium sapien'tia?. 



92 

5 Proprium est stultitiae aliorum vitia cernere, oblivisci 

suorum. Cic. 

6 Fortis et constantis anlmi est ndn perturbari in rebus 

asperis. 

7 ■ Nee me meminisse pigebit Elisae, 

Dum memor ipse mei, dimi spiritus bo« reget artus. 

Virg. 

8 Nulla possessio pluris aestimanda est quam virtus, Cic. 

9 Xantippe, Socratis uxor, irarum et molestiarum per 

dies perque noctes satagebat. Aul. Gel. 

THE DATIVE CASE AFTER THE VERB. 

Omnia verba, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 99. Valpy's, p. 
eo— 94. Ruddiman's, Rule 25—27. 

1 Os bornini sublime dedit Deus ~ Ov. 

2 iEgroto dum anima est, spes est. Cic. 

3 Lusus animo debent aliquando dari, 

Ad cogitandum melior ut redeat tibi. Thcsd. 

What case do verbs of comparing, &c. govern ? verbs of giving, 
&c.? of promising, &c. ? Compounded with the adverbs bene, satis, 
male, and the prepositions prcu, ad, &c. f Which is the word govwning? 
the word governed? 

ORDER, &C. 

5 Est pro'prium the property stuluYias cer'nere vit'ia alio'rum, ob- 
Hvis'ci suo'rum. 

6 Est it is the part for'tis et constants an'imi non perturba'ri in 
as'peris re'bus. 

7 Nee pige'bit me meminis'se Eli'sse, dum (e'go) ip'se (e'ro) me'. 
mor me'i, dum spirttus re'get hos ar'tus. 

8 Nul'ia posses'sio aestiman'da est plu'ris quam virtus. 

9 Xantip'pe, ux'or Soc'ratis, satage'bat ira'rum et molestia'rum 
per di'es que per noc'tes. 

1 (De'tis) de'dit subli'me os hom'ini. 

2 Spes est dum an'jma est aegro'to. 

3 Lu'sus de'bent aliquai/do da'ri an'iino, ut re'deat me'lior tib'i 
ad cogitat/dum. 



93 

4 Cedet profecto virtuti dolor, et animi inductione Ian- 

guescet. Cic. 

5 Paucis temeritas est bono, multis malo. Phced. 

6 Est innocentia affectio talis animi, quae noceat nem- 

lni. Cic. 

7 Prima officia debentur Diis immortalibus, secunda 

patriae, tertia parentibus, deinceps gradatim re- 
liquis. Cic. 

8 Tarn bene qui servit, serviat iste mibi. Ov. 

9 Da vacuse menti, quo teneatur, opus. Ov. 

10 Atticus afflictis semper succurrit. Nep. 

11 Sui cuique mores fingunt fortunam. Nep. 

THE ACCUSATIVE CASE AFTER THE VERB. 

Verba trartsitwa, $c. Eton Grammar, p. 100. Valpy's, 
p. 94. Ruddiman's, Rule 28. 

1 Homo doctus in se semper divitias habet. Phced. 

2 Videmus scintillulas virtutis in pueris. Cic. 

Active verbs require what case ? Verbs neuter, with a noun of a 
similar signification? Verbs of asking, teaching, &c? Which is the 
word governing '{ the word or words governed? 

Is o in doctus (Example 1) long or short? Why? 

Is i before a in divitias (Example 1) long or short? Why? 

Where is the accent in doctus, in divitias? Why? 

order, &c. 

4 Do'lor ce'det profec'to virtu'ti, et langues'cet inductio'ne an'imi. 

5 Temei'itas est bo'no pai/cis (est) ma'Io mul'tis. 

6 Innocen'tia est ta'lis affee'tio an'imi, quae no'ceat nem'ini. 

7 Pri'ma ofirYia deben'tur immortal'ihus Di'is, secun'da (offi'cia) 
pa'tria?, tei'tia paren'tibus, dein'ceps rel'iquis grada'tim. 

8 Qui sei'vit tani he'ne, Ls'te ser'viat mi'hi. 

9 Da o'pus vac'uae nipt/ri, quo tenea'tur it maybe engaged. 

10 At'ticus sen/per sucoui 'lit afrlic'tis. 

11 Mo'res su'i fiu'guni fortu'nam cui'que. 

1 Ho'mo doc'tus ha'bet sero'per divit'ias in se. 

2 Vide'mus scintil'lulas virtu'tis in pu'eris. 



94 

3 Mentem hominis spectato, non frontem, Phced. 

4 Sed propera, nee te venturas differ in horas : 

Qui non est hodie, eras minus aptus erit. Ov. 

5 Qui se cotnmittit homini tutandum improbo, 
Auxilia dum requirit, exitium invenit. Phced. 

6 Si livor obtrectare curam voluerit ; 

Non tamen eripiet iaudis conscientiam. Phad. 

7 Romani omnes reges suos Caesares Augustosque cog- 

nominavere. Just. 

8 Conscia culpae conspectum lucemque fugit. Ov. 

9 Philosophia detrahit solicitudines, et pellit timorem. 

Cic. 

THE ABLATIVE CASE AFTEE THE VERB. 

Quodvis verbum, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 101. Valpy's, 
p. 97. Ruddiman's, Rule 55. — Quibuslibet verbis, fyc. Eton 
Grammar, p. 103. Valpy's, p. 97. Ruddiman's, Rule 
65. 

Note. Words in the ablative case governed by fung or, &c. are 
generally construed as the accusative, without any sign. 

The cause, manner, &c. are put in what case after the verb? The 
price of things? Verbs of abounding, &c. require what case? What 
case is placed after fungor, fruor, &c. ? Are they construed with the 
signs of the ablative case? A substantive with a participle depend- 
ing on no other words, are put in what case ? W hich is the word go- 
verning ? the word governed ? 

ORDER, &C. 

3 Specta'to men'tem hominis, non fron'tem. 

4 Sed prop'era, nee (tu) differ te in ventu'ras ho'ras : Qui non est 
(ap'tus) hod'ie, e'rit mi'nus ap'tus eras. 

b Qui comnrit'tit se im'probo hom'ini tutan'dum to be defended, 
dum reqni'rit auxil'ia, in'venit exit'ium. 

6 Si li'vor volu'erit obtrecta're (me'am) cu'ram my skill, ta'inen 
non erip'iet consciei/tiam lau'dis. 

7 Roma'ni cognominaveYunf or e're orn'nes su'os re'ges Cae'sares 
que Augus'tos. 

8 Con'scia cul'pae fu'git conspec/tnm que lu'cem. 

9 Philoso'phia de'trahit solicitu'dines, et pel'lit timo'rem. 



95 

1 Mors mea n& careat lachrymis. En. 

2 Quod caret alterna requie, durabile non est ; 

Haec reparat vires, fessaque membra novat. Ov. 

3 Cincinnatus, caesis hostlbus, liberavit exercitum. Eut. 

4 Neque unqudm sine aliqua lectione apud Atticum 

coenatum est, ut non minus animo, quam ventre, 
convlvae delectarentur. Nep. 

5 Usus est Thrasybulus non minds prudentia quam for- 

th udine. Nep. 

6 Concordia res parvse crescunt, discordia maxima? di- 

labuntur. Sal. 

7 Britanni utuntur aut aere, aut annulis ferreis ad cer- 

tum pondus examinatis, pro nummo. Cczs. 

8 Sint procul a nobis juvenes, ut fcemina, compti ; 

Fine coli modlco forma virilis amat. Ov. 

9 Este procul lites, et amarae praelia linguae; , 
Dulcibus est verbis mollis alendus amor. Ov. 

10 Viginti talentis unam orationem Isocrates vendidit. 

Ptin. 
Which is the word governing ? which the word governed ? 

order, &c. 

1 Ne let not me'a mors ca'reat lach'rymis. 

2 Quod ca'ret alter'ua, re'quie, non est durab'ile ; haec (re'quies) 
rep'arat vi'res, que no'vat fes'sa mem'bra. 

3 Cincinna'tus, cassis hos'tibus, libera'vit exer'citum. 

4 Ne'que un'quam ccena'tum est (verb imper.) nor was there ever a 
supper a'pud At'ticum, si'ne al'iqua lectio'oe, nt convi'vae delecta- 
ren'tur non mi'nus an'imo, quam ven'tre. 

5 Thrasybu'Ius u'sus est non mi'nus pruden'tia, quam fortitu'dine. 

6 Respar'vae cres'cunt concor'dia, max'imae dilabun'tur discor'dia. 

7 Britan'ni aut utun'tur ae're, aut an'nulis fer'reis, examinatis, 
ad cer'tum pon'dus, pro num'mo. 

8 Juv'enes Ut young men comp'ti, ut fce'mina, sint be pro'cul a 
no'bis : viri'iis foi y ma a'mat co'li med'ico fi'ne. 

9 Li'tes quarrels es'te be ye pro'cul, et prae'lia ama'rae lin'gua? : 
niol'lis a'mor alen'dus est dul'cibus verbis. 

10 Isoc'rates ven'didit u'nam oratio'nem vigin'ti talen'tis. 



96 



VERBS PASSIVE. 

Passivis additur, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 104. Valpy's, 
p. 105. 

1 Nihil recte fieri potest ab irato. Cic. 

2 Boni viri res nunquam a Deo negligentur. Cic. 

3 Arrimis tenduntur insidiae a voluptate. Cic. 

VERBS OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Verbis quibusdam, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 104. Valpy's, 
p. 109. Ruddiman's, Rule 44. 

4 Solent mendaces luere pcenas maleftci. Pitted. 

5 Animus debet imperare, corpus vero servlre. Sal. 

6 In quatuor partes Honestum dividi solet ; prudentiam, 

justitiam, fortitudinem et temperantiam. Cic. 

7 Ut ager, quamvis fertilis, sine cultura fructuosas esse 

non potest ; sic sine doctrina animus. Cic. 

8 Usus attamen exemplo multa docere potest. Ov. 

9 Possunt, quia posse videntur. Virg. 

10 Ficta omnia celeriter, tanquam flosculi, dccldunt, nee 

simulatum potest quidquam esse diuturnum. Cic. 

What case do verbs passive govern, when followed in English by 
the preposition by ? When two verbs come together, in what mood 
is the latter placed ? fVhich is the word governing? the word governed ? 
J 

ORDER, &C. 

1 Ni'hil po'test fi'eri rec'te ab ira'to (hom'ine). 

2 Res bo'ni vi'ri nun'quam negligentur a De'o. 

3 Insid'iae tendun'tur are laid an'imis/or souls a volopta'te. 

4 Menda'ces so'lent lufcre pce'nas malef'ici. 

5 An'imus de'bet impera're, ve'ro corpus servi're. 

6 Hones'tnm so'let Jiv'idi in quat'uor parses, (in) prnden'tiam, 
justit'iam, fortitiid'inenVet temperau'tiam. 

7 Ut a'ger, quam'vis fer'tilis, non po'test es'se frtictuo'sns si'ne 
cultu'ra, sic an'imus (non po'test es'se fructuo'sus) si'ne doctri'na. 

8 At'tamen u'sns po'test doce're mul'ta exem'plo. 

9 Pos'sunt, they are able, qui'a viden'tur pos'se. 

10 Om'nia fic'ta all feigned or pretended things celer'iter de'eidunt, 
tan'quam flos'culi blossoms, nee qnid'quam simula'tum po'test es'se 
diutur'num. 



97 



GERUNDS AND SUPINES. 

Gerundia et svptna, fyc, Eton Grammar, p. 105. Val- 
py's, p. 111. Ruddiman's, Rule 45 — 54. 

1 Definltur iracundia, ulciscendi libido. Cic. 

2 Occurrunt animo pereundi mille figurae ; 
Morsque minus pcenae, quam mora mortis, habet. Ov. 

3 Difficile erat intellectu, utrum Atticum amlci magis 

vererentur, an amarent. Nep. 

4 Superanda omnis fortiina ferendo est. Virg. 

5 Immedicabile vulnus 

Ense recidendum ; ne pars sincera trabatur. Ov. 

6 Orandum est, ut sit mens sana in corpore sano. Juv. 

7 Difficile dictu est, quantopere conciliet animos homi- 

num comitas affabilitasque sermonis. Cic. 

8 Nulli nocendum ; si quis vero laeserit, 
Mulctandutn simili jure Phced. 

What cases do gerunds and supines govern ? What is the construc- 
tion of the gerund in di? The gerund in do, and dum? How are 
must and ought rendered in Latin? When is the active supine used 
instead of the infinitive mood? When is the passive supine used? 
Which is the word governing? the word governed'! 

Is the o long or short in mortis, Example 2 ? Why? 

In the same Example, is the second e in pereundi long or short? 
Why? Where is the accent in mortis? where in pereundi? Why? 

ORDER, &C. 

1 Iracun'dia defini'tur (es'se) libi'do ulciscendi. 

2 Mil'le figi/rse perenn'di occur'runt at/into ; que mors ha'bet 
mi'nus poc'naj quam mo'ra mor'tis. 

S E'rat it was diffi'cile intellec'tn, u'trum ami'ci ma'gis vereren'- 
tur At'ticum, an ama'rent. 

4 Om'nis fortn'na superan'da est feren'do. 

5 Immedicat/ile vul'nus reciden'dum (est) en'se ; ne since'ra pars 
traha'tur. 

6 Oran'dum est (no'bis) ut sa'na mens sit in sa'no cor^pore. 

7 Est diffi'cile dic'tu, quantop'ere com'itas que affafoil / itas scr- 
mo'nis concil'iet an'imos hom'imim. 

8 Nocen'dum (est) ntil'li we must do no injury to any one; ve'ro si 
quis lae'serit (il'lnm), mulctan'dum (es'se) sim'ili ju're. 

K 



98 



NOUNS OF TIME AND PLACE. 

Qua significant, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 106. Valpy% 
p. 107. Ruddiman's Rule 56—63. 

Omne verbum, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 107. Valpy's, 
p. 108. Ruddiman's, Rule 55. 

1 Plato uno et octogesimo anno scribens mortuus est. 

Cic. 

2 Condiunt iEgypti mortuos, et eos domi servant. Cic. 

3 Meditare, quaeso, dies et noctes. Cic. 

4 Athenis adversus ingratos actio constituta fuit. 

Val. Max. 

5 Fanum Neptuni est Taenari, quod violari nefas putant 

Graeci. Nep. 

6 Dionysius tyrannus, Syracusis expulsus, Corinthi 

pueros docebat. Cic. 

7 Sardinia abest ab Africa ducenta millia passuum. 

Plin. 

8 .Accepi Rom& fasciculum literarum. Cic. 

Part of time is put in what case? Duration of time requires what 
case? Names of what places are put in the genitive case? Of what 
in the ablative? Motion to a place? Motion from a placer Which 
is the word governing ? t lie word or words governed ? 

ORDER, &C. 

1 Pla'to mor'tuus est scri'bens u'no et octoges'imo an'no. 

2 TEgyp'ti con'diunt mor'tuos, et ser'vant e'os oVmi. 

3 Medita're quse'so (per) di'es et noc'tes. 

4 Athe'nis at Athens ac'tio constitn'ta fu'it adver'sus ingra'tos. 

5 Fa'num Neptu'ni est Tap.'nari, quod Grae'ci pu'tant ne'fasflcrime 
viola'ri. 

6 Dionys'ius tyran'mis, expul'sns Syracn'sis, doce'bat pu'eros 
Corin'thi. 

7 Sardin'ia ab'est ab Africa ducen'ta mil'iia pas'suuni. 

8 Acce'pi fascic'ulum litera'rum Ro'm&. 



99 



VERBS IMPERSONAL. 

Impersonalia nominatwum, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 108. 
Valpy's, p. 101. Ruddiman's, Rule 39—43. 

1 Ex malis minima oportet eligere. Cic. 

2 Peccare licet nemini. Cic. 
S Decet te vera proloqui. Plaut. 

THE CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES. 

Participia regunt, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 109. Ruddi- 
man's, Rule 45. 

4 Utociilus, sic animus, sese ndn videns, alia cernit. Cic. 

5 Curandum est ut appetitus rationi obedientes praebe- 

amus. Cic. 

6 Virtus est amans sui. Cic. 

7 Deus effugit oculos, visendus est cogitati5ne. Cic. 

THE CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. 

En et ecce, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 110. Valpy's, p. 
113. Ruddiman's, Rule 66. 

8 E x n miserse mibi. Ter. 

9 Vivere naturae convenienter oportet. Hor. 
10 S&t faut5rum habet, qui recte facit. Plaut. 

What do you observe of verbs impersonal? What case does inte- 
rest, fyc. govern? Which verbs govern a dative case? What cases do 
participles govern ? What case does the adverb en, fyc. govern? Do 
some adverbs govern the same cases as the words from which they 
are derived ? Which is the word governing ? the word governed 1 

ORDER, &C. 

1 Opor'tet (te) elig'ere min'ima ex ma'Hs. 

2 Li'cet nem'ini pecca're. 

3 De'cet te pro'loqui ve'ra. 

4 Ut oc'ulus (non vi'dens se'se) cernit a'lia, sic an'imus non vi'dens 
se'se (cer'nit a'lia). 

5 Curand'um est ut praebea'mus appeti'tus obediences ratio'ni. 

6 Vir'tus est a'mans su'i. 

7 De'us effugit oc'ulos, visen'dus est cogitatio'ne. 

8 En mis'eraj mi'hi. 

9 Opor'tet (nos) viv'ere convenien'ter natu'rae. 

10 Ha'bet sat fauto'rnm, qui fa'cit rec'te. 

k 2 



100 

THE CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

Conjunctiones copulative, Sfc. Eton Grammar, p. 111. 
Valpy's, p. 115—117. Ruddiman's, Rule 75 and 76. 

1 Corpus vas est, aut aliquod animi receptaculum. Cic. 

2 Cumque minus firmum nil sit, quam ventgs et unda, 

In ventis et aqua spes mea semper erit ? Ov. 

3 . Probitas laudatur, et alget. Juv. 

4 Omne animal id agit, ut seipsum conservet. Cic. 

THE CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 
Prepositio subaudzta, fyc. Eton Grammar, p. 113. Val- 
py's, p. 114 and 115. Ruddiman's, Rule 68—72. 

5 Homo constat corpore et anima. Cic. 

6 Amicitia nullo loco excluditur, Cic. 

7 Docemur auctoritate legum coercere cupiditates, 

nostra tueri, ab alienis mentes, oculos, manus ab- 
stinere. Cic. 

THE CONSTRUCTION OF INTERJECTIONS. 

0, exclanantis, Ifc. Eton Grammar, p. 115. Valpy's, 
p. 118. Ruddiman's, Rule 73. 

8 O faustum et felicem diem ! Ter. 

9 O vitae philosophia dux! O virtutis indagatrix, ex- 

pultrixque vitiorum ! quid omnind vita hominum 
sine te esse potuisset ? tu urbes peperisti ; tu dis- 
sipatos homines in societatem vitas convocasti. Cic. 

What is the office of conjunctions ? Do they require verbs to be 
in particular moods? What do you observe of prepositions? What 
cases do interjections govern ? Which is the word governing? the word 
governed? 

ORDER, &C. 

1 Cor'pus est vas, aut al'iquod receptac / uluni an'imi. 

2 Cum'que nil sit mi'nns nVmum, quam ven'tns et un'da, me'a 
spes shall my hope e'rit be sem'per in ven'tis et a'qua? 

3 Prob'itas lauda'tur, et al'get. 

4 Om'ne an'imal a'git id, ut conser'vet seip'sum. 

5 Ho'mo constat (in) cor'pore et an'imi. 

6 Amicit'ia exclud'itnr nul'lo lo'co. 

7 Doce'mur auetorita'iele'gum coerce're cupidita'tes, tue'ri nos'- 
tra {bo'na) our own property, abstine'i e mei/tes, oc'ulos, roa'nus ab 
alie'nis (bo'nis). 

8 O faus'tum et felicem di'em ! 

9 O philoso'phia dux vi'tae ! O indaga'trix virtu'tis que expul'trix 
vitio'rum : quid potuis'set vi'ta hom'inum es'se omm'no si'ne te ? tu 
peperis'ti ur bes ; tu convoc&s'ti (for convocavis'ti) dissipa'tos hom'- 

iues in societa'tem vi'tae. 



101 



OF ELLIPSIS. 

The following observations may be useful. 

1. Every nominative case has a verb expressed or un- 
derstood, and every verb has a nominative. 

Quis est in schola ? Praeceptor (est). (Ille) decipit 
mult os. 

2. Every adjective agrees with some substantive, ex- 
pressed or understood ; as, 

Mortalis (homo), October (mensis), Oriens et occidens 
(sol), Meum est (officium), Omnia (negotia), Interest mea 
(officio,, negotia, or opera). 

Vendidit equum minimo (pretio). 

3. Every relative has a noun understood after it, with 
which it agrees in number, case, and gender. 

Est Deus qui (Deus) gubernat mundum. Quod (nego- 
tium) est honestum (negotium) id utile est. 

4. Every genitive case is governed by another substan- 
tive expressed or understood; as, 

Paululum (negotium) pecuniae. Avidus (de re, de causa, 
or de gratia) gloriae. Unus, alter, humanissimus (ex nu~ 
mero) sapientum. Est (officium) adolescentis. Me (pretio) 
pili aestimat. Accusal eum (de crimine) furti. Fidei (verba) 
reminiscitur. Quid (in urbe) Romas faciam ? 

5. Every accusative case is governed by a verb, parti- 
ciple, or preposition, expressed or understood ; as, 

Liber valet (ad) sex solidos. Redit (ad) domum. Pe- 
trus currit (cursum). Rogo patrem (ut daret mihi) pecu- 
niam. Induit (in) se calceos. 

6. Every ablative case is governed by a preposition ex- 
pressed or understood ; as, 

Frigidior (pr&) glacie. Discessit (a) Roma. 
Vir (cum or de) nulla fide. Plenus (cum) vino. Georgius 
regnat Dei (a) gratia. Nemo sapit (in) omnibus horis. 



Does every nominative case belong to a verb? Has every verb a 
nominative case ? Give some examples. Does every adjective be- 
long to a substantive? With what does the relative agree? Can you 
explain it? By what is every genitive case governed? Is every accu- 
sative case governed by a verb, participle, or preposition ? Give some 
examples. By what is every ablative case governed? 

K3 



102 



RULES FOR CONSTRUING, &c. 

A sentence is the expression of a thought. 
Sentences are divided into simple and compound. 
A simple sentence has in it but one nominative case, 
and one finite verb, either expressed or understood ; as, 

Fugit tempus. — Virg. Time jlies. 

If the verb be active, the sentence must not only have 
a nominative case, and a finite verb, but an accusative 
case ; as, 

Omnia vincit amor, Virg, 

. Love overcomes all things. 



RULES FOR CONSTRUING SIMPLE SENTENCES. 

Rule 1. First take the nominative case ; afterwards the 
verb ; and then the case governed by the verb. 

Rule 2. • Take the adjective or participle before the 
word with which it agrees, except when the adjective or 
participle governs some following word, then the adjective 
or participle is construed after the noun. 

Rule 3. A genitive case is taken immediately after the 
noun or word by which it is governed. 

Rule 4. The adverb must not be construed with a 
noun, but with the verb, participle, or adjective. 

Rule 5. The infinitive mood is generally taken after 
another verb. 

Rule 6. When several cases come after the verb, take 
the nominative or accusative case first, then the genitive, 
dative, or ablative. 

Rule 7. After a preposition, look for an ablative or ac- 
cusative case. 

The seven preceding rules for construing simple sen- 
tences are easily reduced to this 

GENERAL RULE. 

Some interjections, adverbs, &c. such as heu, quum,ja?n, 
&c. may be first taken. 



103 

The nominative, with its adjective or pronoun, must then 
be construed. 

After the nominative, must be taken the genitive case 
governed by the nominative, and to that genitive case 
must be added every word agreeing with it. 

The verb must be construed after the nominative and its 
dependents. 

The adverb, or word restraining or increasing the sense, 
must be taken after the verb : or, 

Next after the verb may come another verb of the infi- 
nitive mood. 

The cases which the verb go7;erns may be taken after the 
verb, first the nominative or accusative, then the genitive, 
dative, or ablative. 

After the cases governed by the verb, may follow the 
preposition and its noun, with every word depending on 
it. 

COMPOUND SENTENCES. 

A compound sentence has more than one nominative 
case, or one finite verb either expressed or understood ; or 
it consists of two or more simple sentences, connected by 
relatives or conjunctions; as, 

Omnia vincit amor, et nos cedamus amori. Virg, 

Love overcomes all things, and we can give way to love. 

Omnes se Britanni vitro inficiunt, quod caeruleum efFlcit 
colore m. Ca>$. 

All the Britons stain themselves with woad, which makes 
them of a blue colour. 



RULES FOR CONSTRUING COMPOUND SENTENCES. 

Rule 1. Generally take every word in a clause, and al- 
ways every word in a member on which you enter, be- 
fore you begin another, observing all the preceding rules 
respecting a simple sentence, as you construe each clause 
in succession. 

Rule 2. First take the nominative case or cases, after- 
wards the verb or verbs, and then the cases governed by 
the verb. 

Rule 3. All words signifying the same thing, or put in 



104 

apposition, and those which answer to each other, such as 
Talis — qualis; Tantus — quantus ; Sic — ut ; and Tarn — 
quam ; must be construed as near together as possible. 

Rule 4. The relative, in all its cases, must be construed 
as soon as possible after the antecedent. 

Rule 5. A clause is frequently inserted within another, 
explaining some part of it. The inserted clause must be 
construed as near as possible to that part of the sentence 
which it illustrates, and according to the rules for simple 
sentences. 

The rules for construing a compound sentence are re- 
duced to the following 

GENERAL RULE. 

First take the vocative cases, with some interjections and 
adverbs. 

Then the nominative cases, and words in apposition, with 
the relative, or other inserted clause depending on the.no- 
minative case. 

Then th* verb or verbs, with adverbs, infinitive moods, 
&c. 

After the verb, the words governed by it, and the words in 
apposition, with the relative or other inserted clauses de- 
pending on the word governed by the verb, preposition, 
&e. 

*%* These rules are fully illustrated by examples in " Latin 
Construing/' which is intended to follow this Introduction. 



the end. 



LATELY PUBLISHED BY 

W. S1MPKIN and R. MARSHALL, 

STATIONERS* HALL COURT, LUDGATE-STREET ; 

AND MAY BE HAD OF ALL BOOKSELLERS. 



ANGLO-SAXON. 

By the Rev. J. BOSWORTH, M. A. F.A.S. F.R.S.L. 

HONORARY MEMBER OF THE COPENHAGEN SOCIETY FOR 

ANCIENT LITERATURE OF THE NORTH, ALSO HONORARY 

MEMBER OF THE LONDON PHILOMATHIC INSTITUTION, 

And Vicar of Little Hoi^wood, Bucks. 



THE ELEMENTS OF ANGLO-SAXON GRAMMAR, 

with Notes illustrating the Structure of the Saxon, and 
the Formation of the English Language ; and a Gram- 
matical Praxis, with a literal English Version : to which 
are prefixed, Remarks on the History and Use of the 
Anglo-Saxon, and an Introduction on the Origin and 
Progress of Alphabetic Writing, with Critical Remarks 
by the Rev. Charles O'Conor, D.D., and exemplified 
by Engravings of Inscriptions and Fac-similes of Saxon 
and other Ancient Manuscripts. Price in boards, 16s. 
Large Paper, 20s. 

These are a few of the Testimonials given of this Grammar. 

u This work will prove a most valuable acquisition to the library 
of the philologer and antiquary. The Introduction, on the Origin 
and Progress of Alphabetic Writing displays considerable learning 
and ability." — Gentleman's Magazine. 

" The Philosophical Introduction discourses much and well about 
the Origin of Alphabetic Writing. — This excellent Grammar is not 
only the completest view of the Anglo-Saxon language which we 



106 Lately Published by 

have seen, but is also ornamented with curious speculative philoso- 
phy concerning topics of philology, and many parts of it may be 
read with amusement and instruction by persons who are not ambi- 
tious of acquiring the language, the rules of which it is destined to 
record."—- Monthly Review, 

" In the valuable work before us, Mr. Bosworth has stated so 
many motives to induce us to pursue this branch of literature, that 
we feel more than ever interested in the originals and history of our 
Saxon ancestors. 

u If, indeed, heretofore we felt discouraged by the supposition 
that our progenitors were nothing better than a horde of savages, or 
wandering Scythians, who waged war with civilization, science, and 
Christianity ; or if we fancied that their language had neither attrac- 
tions nor merit ; or if we found a difficulty in procuring assistance 
for learning their language, and references to authors who wrote in 
the Saxon tongue : now, indeed, we can no longer complain that 
any thing has been omitted in order both to obviate prejudice, and 
remove difficulty. 

" The plates which accompany and illustrate the work we have 
introduced into the present Number of the Classical Journal, not 
merely because v\ e regard them as bearing testimony to the labour 
and pains which Mr. Bosworth has taken in illustrating the Anglo- 
Saxon language, and facilitating the acquirement of it ; but with a 
hope that they may attract the attention of the public to his mas- 
terly work, wnieh we expect, when more extensively circulated, will 
render Saxon literature a subject of as general interest as it deserves 
to be. 

" Respecting the originals of our Saxon ancestors, Mr. Bosworth 
affords us the most interesting information." 

ClassicalJournal, No. 61, vol. 31, p. 121. 

" If the reader is desirous to become acquainted with the original 
structure of the English tongue, or to possess a work resulting from 
deep penetration, and a thorough knowledge of ancient literature, 
he will find in Mr. Bosworth more than the writer can describe, 

" This work is a real treasure : it is not the result of mere specu- 
lative opinion, but of strict attention to the principles of Saxon li- 
terature, and a thorough knowledge of the subject. It is built of 
solid materials, founded on a firm basis, and polished by the erudi- 
tion of a scholar, the research of an antiquary, the elegance and in- 
genuity of a man of taste and talent, and the sound reasoning of a 
philosopher. The reader will be pleased to understand that Mr. 
Bosworth does not confine himself to an examination of the Saxon 
tongue, but lias much useful matter relative to the origin and pro- 
gress of writing the Hebrew, Gothic, and other ancient languages, 
and above all, the formation of the English. He has not contented 
himself with a compilation from the works of his predecessors, but 
has ransacked the stores of literature, and weighed them in the scales 
of justice. His Praxes are both instructive and entertaining, and 
especially his Analysis of the Saxon Poets, and his Quotations 
from the works of Alfred the Great, which carry the reader un- 



W. Simpkin and R. Marshall. 107 

awares from the busy pursuits of the present age, backward through 
the bustle of a thousand years, and almost persuade him that he is 
a Saxon.— Some persons may, perhaps, regard these words as hy- 
perbolical; but such have not read the Grammar itself, the in- 
trinsic value of which is such that a gentleman's library cannot be 
complete without it." — Martin's Philological Gr. 

" The Anglo-Saxon Grammar is a Treatise of intrinsic merit, and 
of great learning. — The Engravings of Inscriptions and Fac-similes 
of Saxon and other Ancient Writings are beautiful — the Preface 
abounds with information, rich and varied— the Definitions, Rules, 
and Examples, are lucid and concise — the Notes judicious — and the 
Praxis truly excellent." 

Edwards's Prometheus Chained, Greek and English. 

A COMPENDIOUS GRAMMAR of the PRIMITIVE 
ENGLISH, or ANGLO-SAXON LANGUAGE; a 
knowledge of which is essential to every modern English 
Grammarian, who would fully understand the true ori- 
gin and idiom of his own Language, being chiefly a 
selection of what is most valuable and practical in the 
Elements of the Anglo-Saxon Grammar, with some ad- 
ditional observations. 8vo. Price 6s. 

u We may conscientiously recommend the whole to the serious 
perusal of all who are desirous of having pointed out to them the 
means of improving their comprehension and mastery of the English 
Tongue. We understand, with pleasure, that the author has it in 
contemplation to edit a Saxon Dictionary. The work could not, 
we suspect, be in better hands." — Panoramic Miscellany, 



Preparing for Puhlicalion^^'By the same Author. 

1. A COMPENDIOUS ANGLO-SAXON DICTION- 
ARY, with Explanations in English. One large vol. 
8vo. — This work is preparing with as much expedition 
as is consistent with correctness. 

2. The ANGLO-SAXON GOSPELS. 

3. ANGLO-SAXON READING ; or, Extracts from the 
most important Saxon Works, being the original Saxon 
to the passages literally translated into English, and con- 
tained in the valuable History of the Anglo-Saxons by 
S.Turner, Esq., F.A.S. F.R.S.L. 



108 Lately Published by 

Lately published by Simpkin and Marshall. 

The PRACTICAL MEANS of REDUCING the POOR'S 
RATE, encouraging Virtue, and increasing the Com- 
forts of the aged, afflicted, and deserving Poor, as well 
as repressing able-bodied Pauperism, by a proper ap- 
plication of the existing Laws, respecting Select Ves- 
tries and Incorporated Houses of Industry. By the 
Rev. J. Bosworth, M. A., &c. 8vo. Price Is. 6d. 

" In this well written pamphlet, a becoming deference is paid to 
the Legislature. We admire the modesty, which, with the clearest 
reasoning, and a detail of the most desirable practical results, does 
not advance a step without the sanction of the existing laws. We 
have, indeed, seldom seen so large and interesting a body of facts 
brought together, in so small a compass. The style is neat and per- 
spicuous, and every one concerned in the management of the poor 
must derive information from reading this pamphlet, and be pleased 
with the go^^d sense and feeling which pervade every part of it." 
Gentleman's Magazine for Dec. 1824. 

u We have never perused a pamphlet more replete with sound 
sense and practical information than the present. It is written 
with great perspicuity, and, from its useful and practical details, 
deserves the careful perusal of every one concerned in the manage- 
ment of the poor. There is nothing in it visionary : on the con- 
trary, the whole is built on the solid basis of experience and facts. 
It does not treat of what may be, but what has been done: and 
many places are named where theJPoor's Rate has been reduced to 
less than one fourth of its former amount, by a more efficient appli- 
cation of existing laws. Enough is here advanced to prove, that the 
oppressive burden of thl Poor's Rate does not arise from a defect 
in the principle of the Poor's Laws, but from their partial, defec- 
tive, and slovenly administration. The Ministers of Elizabeth's 
Augustan age were not such novices in legislation as to build upon 
an unsound foundation. They, in wisdom, equity, and humanity, 
made a provision for the actual wants of the " impotent, lame, and 
blind;'* but, at the same time, they steadily withstood voluntary 
idleness and fictious claims; hence, as Blackstone observes, ' when 
* the number of indigent persons was greatly increased, by withdraw- 
ing the alms of the monasteries, a plan was formed, in the reign of 
Queen Elizabeth, more humane and beneficial than even the feed- 
ing and clothing of millions, by affording them the means, with pro- 
per industry, to feed and clothe themselves. And the further any 
subsequent plans for maintaining the poor have departed from this 
institution, the more impracticable, and even pernicious, their vi- 
sionary attempts have proved.'"— Critical Gazette, Sept. 1824. 



W. Simpkin and R. Marshall. 109 

LATIN CONSTRUING; or, easy and progressive Les- 
sons from Classical Authors ; with Rules for translating 
Latin into English, designed to teach the Analysis of 
simple and compound sentences, and the method of 
construing Phsedrus and Nepos, as well as the higher 
classics, without the help of an English translation ; in- 
tended for the use of junior classes in schools, and of 
those who have not the advantage of regular instruc- 
tion, for whom the quantity of those syllables, on which 
the pronunciation depends, is marked. To which is 
added, a full account of the Roman Calendar, with 
Rules for reducing the English to the Roman time, and 
the Roman to the English. By the Rev. J. Bosworth, 
M. A., &c. The Second Edition, <2s. 6d. bound. 

It is the object of this little Work to point out to those who 
have a competent knowledge of Grammar, a general method of 
construing Latin, without the debilitating aid of English translations. 
When the nature of a sentence, and the order in which Latin words 
are arranged, have been fully explained, the pupil begins to construe 
the shortest sentence, and is gradually led forwards to sentences 
enlarged by simple words, till he comes to the most involved simple 
sentences. He is then introduced to compound sentences, and 
taught that they are enlarged by clauses, as simple sentences are 
by words. After attending to the rules in this little manual, illus- 
trated as they are by copious examples from the easiest and best 
Roman classics, the pupil will have no difficulty in taking up any- 
Latin author, and construing it with judgment and precision. 

" The Rules for Latin Construing are plain and easy/' 

New Monthly Magazine. 

Also, A CONCISE VIEW OF ANCIENT GEOGRA- 
PHY, with Biographical, Chronological, and Historical 
Notes, and seven neat Illustrative Maps: designed as 
an easy I%w>duetion to Dr. Butler's Sketch of Ancient 
Geography, with the proper names carefully accented 
to direct the pronunciation. By W. Bond, of Queen's 
College, Cambridge. * 12mo., 4s. 6d. 



5. M-'Creery, looks Court, 
Chancery Lane, LoDdou. 



LATIN CONSTRUING; 

OR, 

EASY AND PROGRESSIVE LESSONS 

FROM CLASSICAL AUTHORS ; 

WITH 

RULES 
FOR TRANSLATING LATIN INTO ENGLISH: 

Designed to teach the Analysis of Simple and Compound Sentences, 

And the Method of Construing Ph;edrus, and Nepos, as well as the higher 

Classics, without the help of an English Translation ; 

INTENDED 

For the use of Junior Classes in Schools, and of those who have not 

The advantage of Regular Instruction, for whom the Quantity of those Syllables 

On which the Pronunciation depends, is marked: 

TO WHICH IS ADDED 

& jFuIl account of tfjc l&omait Calenture, 



Rules for reducing the English to the Roman Time, and the Roman to 
th* English. 



BY 

THE REV. J. BOSWORTH, M. A. &c, 

VICAR OF LITTLE HORWOOD, BUCKS, 

AUTHOR OF AN INTRODUCTION TO LATIN CONSTRUING, &e. 

THE THIRD EDITION. 



Quod enim munus reipublicae majus melius ve afferre possumus, quam si 
docemus, atque erudimus juventutem ? — Cic. 



LONDON : 

PRINTED FOR W. SIMPKIN AND R. MARSHALL, 

stationers' hall court, ludgate street. 

1829. 



Orttteretr at Stationers* f^all. 



CHARLES WOOD AND SON, PRINTERS, 
Poppin's Court, Fleet Street. 



PREFACE. 



The following little Compilation was originally 
intended to have been published as a third part to 
"An Introduction to Latin Construing;" but 
it has been printed in a separate form, under the 
title of " Latin Construing," for the accom- 
modation of those who wish to use the one without 
the other. 

When a boy has made some progress in his 
Latin Grammar, it is customary for him to com- 
mence the reading of some easy Author. He 
generally begins to construe, without any previous 
knowledge of sentences, or the difference in the 
arrangement of Latin and English words ; it, there- 
fore, often happens, that a boy, who has learned 
Latin for some time, can scarcely construe the 
plainest sentence. He can frequently translate all 
the words separately ; but he can make nothing of 
them when taken together. This difficulty arises 
from the peculiar collocation of Latin words in a 
sentence. Though this arrangement must have 
been familiar to Roman children, it is so foreign 
to our idiom, that a boy is generally confused, and 
sometimes quite bewildered by it. Would not 
this confusion in a great measure be removed, if 



IV PREFACE. 

plain Rules, illustrated by copious examples, were 
given to reduce the Latin words into the English 
order? This is the object of the present compi- 
lation. It is intended, to point out to those who 
have a competent knowledge of Grammar, a ge- 
neral method of construing, before they take up a 
Latin author. No pretensions are made to offer 
Rules which will answer for the resolution of all 
sentences. The chief design is to teach young 
persons a general method of construing, and to 
show them the proper way of overcoming their 
difficulties. 

Great care has been taken not to confuse by 
teaching many things at a time, or by anticipating 
succeeding Rules : therefore, after the nature of a 
sentence has been explained, the pupil begins to 
construe the shortest simple sentences, and is gra- 
dually led forward to those enlarged by single 
words, till he comes to the most involved simple 
sentences that could be easily found in authors 
generally read by those who are learning Latin. 

The pupil is then introduced to Compound Sen- 
tences, and taught that compound sentences are 
enlarged by clauses, as simple sentences are by 
words. Is there not another advantage naturally 
resulting from the method here adopted ? While 
the pupil is learning the arrangement of words in 
a simple, and clauses in a compound sentence, 
must he not also imperceptibly acquire the princi- 
ples of Punctuation, and Composition ? 

When a boy perfectly understands the Rules in 
this book, he will be fully competent to enter upon 



PREFACE. V 

Eutropius # , Nepos, Phsedrus, Caesar, Ovid, &c. 
without the aid of Translations. A boy who has 
construed every part of this little work, has been 
accustomed to analyze sentences taken from Phas- 
drus, Nepos, and the higher Latin classics, and he 
will easily overcome any future obstacle. It is 
not said, he will meet with no difficulty : but it is 
affirmed, that a diligent use of his Dictionary and 
Grammar, with the application of the Rules in 
this little Manual, will soon enable a boy, of mo- 
derate parts, to construe his lessons with judg- 
ment and precision. It will, however, after all, 
require some mental exertion ; but this is one of 
the most desirable consequences of learning Latin. 
It generates a habit of attention, and insensibly 
produces a patience of literary labour. In short, 
besides preparing men for particular spheres of 
action, it is well calculated to bring into exercise, 
and to enlarge all the faculties of the mind. It 
laysf a broad and strong basis, on which any kind 
of useful and ornamental superstructure .may be 
afterwards raised. 

As far as possible, such illustrative examples are 
chosen, as express some historical fact, or moral 
sentiment; while, therefore, the teacher, in his 



* The very correct Editions of Eutropius, Nepos, Phaedrus, 
and Ovid, with English Notes, by the Rev. C. Bradley, are 
strongly recommended. There is also a cheap and very useful 
edition of Nepos, by Alex. Stewart, with short Notes, Index, 
&c. To those who are defective in quantity, or who have not 
much assistance, Mr. Stewart's Nej>os is particularly recom- 
mended, as it has the quantity of the words marked to direct 
the pronunciation. 

f Knox on Education, p. 9. 



VI PREFACE. 

arduous task of instruction, will derive pleasure 
from meeting with some of the best sentiments of 
his old classical friends, the pupil will be benefited 
by having many moral and useful truths deeply 
impressed on his mind. 

Probably a more full account of the Roman 
Calendar is here given, than will be found in other 
school books. It will, at least, enable the pupil 
to understand the dates he may meet with, in his 
subsequent reading. The Roman division of the 
day will be useful for ascertaining the time of any 
transaction. Questions are added to excite the 
attention, and to direct the pupil to those things 
most deserving his notice. 

Originality is not to be expected in this little 
work, any more than in the Introduction to it. 
The Compiler is far more desirous to produce a 
short practical work to facilitate the labour of 
teachers, and the progress of learners, than one 
that would please the theoretical and visionary by 
its novelty. He has, therefore, freely taken what- 
ever he found adapted to his purpose, from those 
who have written on the subject, but servilely 
copied none. 



PREFACE 



TO 

THE THIRD EDITION. 



In the Introduction prefixed to this edition, an 
attempt has been made to explain the general 
manner of reading Latin in our Universities and 
public schools. They do not read Latin and 
Greek* merely by quantity, but by accent. In 
dissyllables, the accent is always on the former 
syllable, whether it be long or short. Words of 
more than two syllables are also read by accent, 
but it is regulated by the quantity of the penulti- 
mate syllable, which, when doubtful, has the quan- 
tity carefully marked throughout this edition. No 



* Young persons, renewing their acquaintance with Greek, 
or learning it when advanced towards maturity, without 
much viva voce assistance, if desirous of knowing the general 
manner in which Greek is read in England, will find the va- 
luable series of Greek Plays by T. W. C. Edwards, M.A. 
of the most essential service. This uniform edition of the 
Greek Drama, has the original Greek text very neatly and 
correctly printed from the best editions, with every facility 
that can be possibly desired by any student in Greek : the text 
is accompanied with a strictly literal English prose version, 
the scanning of each verse, the grammatical order of the 
words, with the English accentuation, and copious critical 
and explanatory notes. The same indefatigable gentleman is 
preparing an edition of Homer and other works on a similar 
plan. 



Vlll PREFACE. 

more difficulty can therefore exist in reading, with 
propriety, the classical extracts in this little work, 
than there would have been if every word had 
been accented. 

In this third edition the arrangement is more 
complete, and the whole is made much more easy. 
To accommodate those Tutors who teach in 
classes, the present arrangement will be retained 
in all future editions. 

Vicarage, Little Horwood, Bucks, 
August 17, 1829. 



INTRODUCTORY REMARKS 

ON THE 

MANNER IN WHICH LATIN IS READ 

IN OUR 

UNIVERSITIES AND PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 



On the Sound of the Letters in Latin. 

In Latin the diphthongs se and ce are sounded as e ; thus, 
mus& 2LX\&pcena are pronounced mu'-se mn&pe'-na. 

C is sounded, as in English, like s, before e, i,y, &* 
and as; and like k, before a, o, u, and consonants : thus, 
cicer is pronounced si'-ser ; emeus, se'-kus ; ccenaculum, 
se-nak'-u-lum; cuticula, ku-tik '-u-la ; and classicus, 
klas'-si-kus. 

The letter g is also sounded as in English. It is 
hard, like gin give, before a, o, u, and consonants ; and 
soft, like j, before e, i, and^, or another g followed by 
e: thus, galhis is pronounced gal'-lus; gutta, gut'»ta ; 
gigno, jig'-no ; gemma, j em' -ma ; agger, aj'-jer. 

Ch is always sounded like k; thus, chronica is pro- 
nounced kron'-i-ca. 



How are the diphthongs ce and ce sounded ? 

What is the sound of c before e, i, y, &, &c. ? What 
before a, o, u, &c. ? 

How is g sounded before a, o, u, &c. ? How before 
e, i, y, &c. ? 

Like what letter is ch sounded ? 

E 



The syllables ti, ci, si, xi, before a vowel are pro- 
nounced as in the English words nation, precious, inva- 
sion, noxious ; thus, pretium, concio, incisio, and anxie, 
are pronounced pre'-shi-um, con'-shi-o, in-cizh'-i-o, ank*- 
shi-e : but ti at the beginning of a word, and after s or 
x, is pronounced like ti in tidy or satiety ; as, istius, 
tnixtio, and timor, pronounced ist'-i-us, mix'-ti-o, and 
ti'-mor* 

The division of Words into Syllables. 

A Syllable is one distinct sound, and may be either a 
vowel, a diphthong, or one or more consonants with a 
vowel. 

In Latin the final vowel is always distinctly sounded ; 
indeed there are as many syllables in a word as there 
are vowels or diphthongs : as, difficillime, " Hora quota 
est ? Me miserum ! " which words are divided and 
read dif-fi-sil'-li-me, Ho'-ra kwo'-ta est ? Me wmV-c- 
rum I but when the letters c, h,g, q, or s, are followed 
by two vowels, they generally form only one syllable : 
as, cm, huic, lingua, qua, qui, quo, suadeo, divided and 
read hi, hike, lin'*gwa, kwa, kwi, kwo, swa'-de-o. 

The following observations may be serviceable in di- 
viding words into syllables. 



How are ti, ci, &c. pronounced before a vowel? 
Give examples. 

How is ti pronounced at the beginning of a word, and 
after s f 

What is a syllable ? Is the final syllable always pro- 
nounced in Latin ? How do you pronounce cui, lingua, 
&c? 



1. A single consonant, between two vowels, must be 
joined to the latter vowel; as, bo'-nus, a'-mo, ho'-mo, 
&c. ; except the accent falls on the last syllable but 
two (antepenult), then this syllable generally takes the 
following consonant ; as, ar-tif-i~cem, Tar-quin'-i-us, 
po-pu-lab'-i-tur, &c. ; and x is joined to the vowel 
going before it ; as, ex'-ul, ax'4s, &c. Compound 
words must also be resolved into their constituent parts ; 
as, ab'-est, in'-e-o, &c. 

2. Two consonants, between two vowels, are to be 
separated ; as, il'-le, an'-nus : but, when the two conso- 
nants can begin a word, they may be sometimes joined 
to the following syllable ; as, e-bri'-e-tas, du-pli-ca'-vit. 

General Rules J or Quantity. 

1. One vowel before another, or before h, followed 
by a vowel, is short : as, meus, nihil, &c. 

2. The diphthongs #, os, au, eu, ei, are all long : as, 
hce'-dus, poe-na, &c. 

3. A vowel before two consonants, or before^', x, and 
z, is long : as forma, major, &c. 

Every penult not falling under these rules, is 
marked thus : 

w over a vowel, shows that syllable to be short. 
" over a vowel, denotes that syllable to be long. 



What is the first rule for dividing words into sylla- 
bles ? What is the second ? 

Is one vowel before another long or short ? Is a diph- 
thong long? Is a vowel, before two consonants, long 
or short ? What is the mark for a short syllable ? 
A long ? 

b2 



Rules for Accent*. 

Rule I. — In pronouncing Latin words of two sylla- 
bles, the accent or stress of the voice is always on the 
former syllable, whether it be long or short ; as, hu'-jus, 
ho' -ram, mu'-sa, bo'-nus, pa' -r ens, &c. 

Rule II. — In words of three or more syllables, when 
the last syllable but one (penult) is long, that syllable 
has the accent : as, ma-gls'-ter, mu-sa'-rum, ma-gis-tro'- 
rinn, do-mi-no' -ram, vi-rwn'-que, &c. : if the last sylla- 
ble but one be short, the accent is on the preceding (an- 
tepenult) syllable : as, dom'-i-nus, fil'-i-us, op'-e-ris, 
o-per'-i-bus, me-li-or'-i-bus, &c. 

Latin is read by accent, which, in words of three or 
more syllables, is regulated by the quantity of the last 
syllable but one. When the quantity of the last sylla- 
ble but one is known, either by the general rules, or by 
the mark over it, you may ascertain where to place the 
accent by the two preceding rules. The stress of 



What is accent ? What is the mark for accent ? Where 
is the accent or stress of the voice in Latin words of 
two syllables ? 

Where is the accent in words of three or more sylla- 
bles ? Where when the last syllable but one is short ? 
Give an example. Which is the penult syllable ? Which 
the antepenult ? Where is the accent when the last syl- 
lable but one is long ? Give an example. 

How is Latin read ? How do you know which sylla- 
ble to accent ? 



* The teacher will observe, that accent is here used in its 
generally received acceptation, its original meaning may be 
seen in the " Elements of Anglo-Saxon Gr." p. 220, n. 8. 



the voice is on the first syllable of o'-pus, pro'-bat, 
ha'-bet, Ro'-mani) Ne'-ro, mo'-ra, vi'-res, po'-ma 9 &c 5 
because they are words of two syllables. The accent 
is on the antepenult or last syllable but two in ar-tif-i- 
cem, ex-or'-di-um, Tar-quin'-i-us, &c, because the pe- 
nult or last syllable but one is short : it is on the 
penult or last syllable but one in in-cen'-dit, du-pli-ca!- 
vit y Sec, because that syllable is long. 

Examples to illustrate the Rules for Accent, 
and the Division of Syllables. 

1. O'-pus ar-tif-i-cem pro'-bat. 

2. Im-pe'-ri-um ha'-bet ex-ord'-i-um. 

3. Ro'-mam in«cen'-dit Ne'-ro. 

4. Mo'-ra dat vi'-res, 

5. Tar-quin'-i-us nu'-me-rum du-pli-ca'« 

vit. 

6. Po'-ma dat au-tum'-nus. 

7. Ma-te'-ri-em su-pe-ra'-bat o'-pus. 

8. Rex bel'-lum ges'-sit 



Which syllable is accented in opus, probat, Ro?nam 9 
&c. ? Why ? Which in artificem, imperium, &c? Why ? 
Which in duplicavit, incendit, &c. ? Why ? 



INTRODUCTORY REMARKS 



IN EXPLANATION OF 



SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES. 



m 

A Sentence is the expression of a thought. 
An assemblage of words, expressing a perfect thought, 
or making complete sense, and distinguished at the end 
by a period, or full-stop, marked thus (.), is called a 
Sentence, from the Latin word, Sententia, a thought 

When a question is asked, a note of Interrogation is 
used, marked thus (?) : as, 

Hora quota est ? Hor. 

What hour is it ? 
A note of Admiration, marked thus (!), is used when 
wonder, or some sudden passion, is excited : as, 

Me Miserum ! Ter. 

Wretched me ! 

Sentences are divided into Simple and Compound. 
A simple sentence has in it but one nominative case, 



What is a sentence ? What is put at the end of a sen- 
tence ? 

Make a note of interrogation. When is it used? 
Make a note of admiration. When is it used ? 
How are sentences divided ? 



and one finite* verb, either expressed or understood : 
as, 

Fugit tempus* Virg. 

Timeflies. 

Cadunt umbrae. Virg. 

The shadows fall. 

These are sentences, because they express perfect 
thoughts, or make complete sense. 

If the verb be active, the sentence must not only have 
a nominative case, and finite verb, but an accusative ; 
because, without this accusative case, no complete sense 
would be communicated. If we say, Ohsequium parti — 
Complaisance procures ; and Amor vincit — Love over- 
comes; it is manifest the sentences are imperfect ; but 
if the accusative cases, amicos — friends ; and omnia — 
all things, be subjoined, they will be perfect sentences, 
because complete sense is conveyed : as, 

Obsequium amicos parit. Ter. 

Complaisance procures friends. 

Studia solatium praebent. Cic. 

Learning affords comfort. 



How many nominative cases and verbs may a simple 
sentence contain ? 

If the verb be active, what must be added to the sen- 
tence? Why? 

Is the i in studia, solatium, and omnia, long or short? 
Why short ? Where is the accent in studia, solatium, 



* A finite verb is that to which number and person belong : 
a verb is called finite, to distinguish it from verbs of the 
infinitive mood. 



8 

Omnia vincit amor. Virg. 

Love overcomes all things. 

Though a simple sentence can have but one nomina- 
tive case, and one finite verb, it may contain a verb in 
the infinitive mood, with other words, and still continue 
a simple sentence : as, 

Vir optimus difficillime alios esse improbos 
suspicatur. Cic. 

A very good man hardly suspects others to 
be wicked. 

Heu, quam difficile est crimen non prodere 
vultu ! Ov. 

Alas, how difficult it is not to betray a 
crime by the countenance ! 



and omnia ? Why on stu 9 la 9 and om ? Where is the 
accent on prcebent, vincit, and amor ? Why on prce 9 vin, 
and a ? 

May not a verb of the infinitive mood, and other 
words, be added to a simple sentence ? 



CHAPTER I. 



THE ANALYSIS OR METHOD 

OF 

CONSTRUING SIMPLE SENTENCES. 

The construction, or placing of Latin words in a sen- 
tence differs from the English. In our language, the 
words lie in direct* order ; but in Latin, the words to 
be first translated into English, are often found at some 
distance from the beginning of the sentence. You 
think the words are confusedly put together. They 
only appear so to you, who are unacquainted with the 
manner in which the Romans constructed their sen- 
tences. 



Are Latin words placed in the same order in a sen- 
tence as the English ? Where is the Latin word to be 
first taken often found ? 



* In English, the words are arranged according to the order, 
in which the understanding directs those ideas to be exhibited 
to the view of another. The nominative case, or the subject 
of action, is placed first ; the verb which denotes the action 
follows; and, after the verb, the object to which the verb 
refers : as, Learning affords comfort. 

The understanding and imagination are the powers of the 
mind, which chiefly influence the arrangement of words in a 
sentence. We have seen, that the English adopt that gram- 
matical arrangement which is dictated by the understanding. 
The Greeks and Romans, on the contrary, generally arranged 
their words according to the order in which they rose in the 
imagination. If a Greek or Roman had seen and desired a 
piece of money, and had expressed himself according to his 
immediate feelings, he would have first named the mone 



10 

In construing Latin, you have considerable difficulty 
in finding the order in which the words are to be taken. 
The following directions are given, with a desire to re* 
move this difficulty, which will be greatly diminished if 
you bear in mind that the separated words, in a Latin 
sentence, are collected in a proper order for translating 
into English, by observing the words which depend upon 
each other, and taking those together which agree in 
termination. 

When you have a sentence in Latin to construe, you 
should first read it carefully over, and notice the inflec- 
tions, or endings of nouns, pronouns, and verbs. Every 
word, with which you are not perfectly acquainted, 
must then be looked out in the Dictionary. The gene- 
ral meaning of every word being ascertained, you will 



What is a difficulty in construing Latin ? How may 
it be overcome ? 

What should you do first, when you have a sentence 
in Latin to construe ? What are you to notice ? 



which he desired. His mind would have been next carried to 
himself. The action, by which his desires must have been 
gratified, would finally have attracted his attention. He would 
have said, Argentum mihi cedo — Money me give. Though this 
arrangement prevailed in the Latin and Greek languages, this 
order was, in some degree, changed for the sake of harmony. 
Terence has the preceding sentence, Mihi argentum cedo. 
Phor. A. v, S. vii, 1. 42. To this the termination, which shows 
the relation of words, though separated, gave great liberty, 
and enabled them to adopt that arrangement which contri- 
buted most to harmony, without destroying the sense. With- 
out producing the least ambiguity, the Romans could say, Da- 
rium vicit Alexander — Darium Alexander vicit — Alexander 
Darium vicit — Alexander vicit Darium — Vicit Alexander Da- 
rium — or, Vicit Darium Alexander, for, Alexander conquered 
Darius. The Greeks and Romans, therefore, had a greater 
liberty than we have, in consulting the melody of their pe- 
riods by the arrangement of words ; but, if our language 
possess less harmony, it is more obvious and plain in its 
meaning. 



11 

easily discover the verb, as it always denotes being, ac» 
Hon, or passion ; or it may be known by its termination. 
The nominative case to the verb is found by asking 
the question, " Who, or what, with the verb ; and the 
word that answers to the question, is the nominative 
case to the verb * : " as, 

Venit dies. Virg. 

After this sentence has been carefully read over, and 
the meaning of each word found in the Dictionary ; if 
the verb have not been discovered at once by the termi- 
nation, it will be known to be venit, as it signifies to 
come. To find the nominative case, you ask, who or 
what comes, and the answer is, the day ; dies, the day, 
is, therefore, the nominative case. The sentence is 
then construed — Dies, the day ; venit, comes. 

When the verb is active, it will require an accusative 
ease, which may be discovered by the termination ; or 
rather, " the substantive, which answereth to the ques- 
tion ivhom or what, made by the verb, shall commonly 
be the accusative case : " as *f«> 

Opus artificem probat Phced. 

When this sentence has been carefully read over, and 
the signification of every word discovered ; you will see 



How do you discover the verb ? 

How do you find the nominative case to a verb ? 

How is the accusative case found ? 



* See Eton Grammar, with Dr. Mavor's Notes, ninth edi- 
tion, p. 59 ; Valpy, p. 80 ; and Ruddiman, p. 75. 
f See Eton Grammar, p. 59. 



12 

that, opus, the work, is the nominative case, and probat, 
proves, is the verb. To find the accusative case, you 
say, whom or what does the work prove ; the answer is, 
the workman ; therefore, arifitcem, the workman, is the 
accusative case. The sentence is then construed — 
Opus, the*work ; probat, proves; artiffcem, the work- 
man. 

A general rule for construing a simple sentence is 
easily derived from the preceding observations. 



RULE I. 



First take the nominative case, and afterwards 
the verb. 

1. Venit dies. Virg. 

2. Micat luna. Hor. 

3. Homo sapit. Plant. 

4. Animus valet. Sal. 

5. Crescit fama. Hor. 



Give the example, and explain the method of con- 
struing it. 

What do you take first ? What afterwards ? 

Which is the word agreeing ? The word with which it 
agrees* ? 

What is the first rule for construing a simple sen- 
tence ? Give the sense of it in your own words. 

Which is the nominative case f The verb ? 



* The questions in Italic should be applied to every example. 



13 



6. 


Cadunt umbrae. 


Virg. 


7. 


Frondent Silvae. 


Virg. 


8. 


Viget aetas. 


Sal. 


9. 


Parturit arbos. 


Virg. 


10. 


Corvus sedit. 


Eut. 


11. 


Culmina fumant. 


Virg. 


12. 


Fugit tempus. 


Virg. 


13. 


Lex manet. 


Cic. 


14. 


Labitur setas. 


Virg. 


15. 


Diligentia valet. 


Cic. 


16. 


Steterunt comae. 


Virg. 


17. 


Medicina paratur. 


Ov. 


18. 


Mala convaluere. 


Ov. 


19. 


Levatur hiems. 


Ov. 


20. 


Divitiae sunt incertae. 


Cic. 


21. 


Expetuntur divitiae. 


Cic. 



18. Mala the evils, convaluere for convaluerunt, from 
convalesco. 

When the yerb is active* it will admit of various 
cases after it, hence Rule II. 



* An active may be distinguished from a neuter verb, thus : 
if the accusative case of a personal pronoun can be placed 
next after the verb^ it is active ; if not, it is neuter : as, Luna 
micat, the moon shines ; you cannot place me, him, &c. after 
shines, and say ; the moon shines me ; micat, shines, is there- 
fore a neuter verb : but you can say opus probat, the work 
proves me, him, &c. : probat, proves, is therefore an active 
verb. 



14 



RULE II. 

First take the nominative case, afterwards 
the verb, and then the case governed by the 
verb. 

1. Opus artificem probat. Phced. 

2. Imperium habet exordium. Eut. 

3. Romam incendit Nero. Eut. 

4. Mora dat vires. Ov. 

5. Tarquinius numerum duplicavit. Eut. 

6. Poma dat autumnus. Ov. 

7. Materiem superabat opus. Ov. 

8. Rex bellum gessit. Eut. 

9. Formam populabitur setas. Ov. 

10. Vocem prsecludit metus. Phad. 

11. Vocem misit religio. Phced. 

12. Luna lumen prsebet. Ov. 

13. Brutus patriam liberavit. Cic. 

14. Matronae Brutumluxerunt. Eut. 

15. Sol duplicat umbras. Virg. 

16. Mora percoquit uvas. Ov. 

2. Imperium an empire, habet has, exordium a begin- 
ning. 11. Religio conscience. 



What is the second rule for construing a simple sen- 
tence ? 

Which is the nominative case f The verb ? The case 
governed by the verb ? 



15 

17. Terra herbas nutrit. Ov. 

18. Experientia est magister. Cic. 

19. Ebrietas est insania. Sen. 

20. Dux ego eram. Virg. 

21. Prudentia est seneetutis. Cic. 

22. Tu miserere sororis. Virg. 

23. Pompilius morbo decessit Eut. 

24. Europse succubuit Asia. Nep. 

25. Tu equo credite. Virg. 

26. Auxilio tempus eget. Virg. 

27. Latini pugna superati sunt. Eut. 

21. Pradentia, prudence, est, is the property, seneetu- 
tis, of old age. 22. Tu miserere, vet miser eris, from mi- 
sereor, to pity : {tuce understood) sororis, your sister. 
The cases governed by such verbs as miserere, Ex. 22, 
and eget, 26, are best construed without any sign, as if 
they were in the accusative. See " Introduction to 
Latin Construing/' page 91. 

Note 1. — If no nominative case be ex- 
pressed, it is understood in the verb, and 
must be supplied by a pronoun of the same 
number and person as the verb. 

1. Multitudinem recepit. Eut. 

2. Capiunt arma. Just. 

1. Me is the nominative understood to recepit. 2. 
llli the nominative to capiunt. 



How do you find the nominative case when it is not 
expressed ? Of what number and person will it be ? 



16 



3. Rem exposui. 

4. Revocate animos. 


Cic. 

Virg. 


5. Urbem ampliavit. 

6. Homo es. 


Eut 
Just. 


7. Percontatorem fugito. 


Hor. 


8. Timorem mittite. 


Virg. 


9. Responsum dedit. 
10. Curam dimittite. 


Virg. 
Ov. 


11. Consilia damus. 


Ter. 


12. Jubes me. 


Cic. 


13. Voluptate capiuutur. 

14. Diem perdidi. 

15. Expecta. 

16. Sapit. 

17. Adsum. 


Cic. 

Eut. 

Ter. 

Plant. 

Ter. 


3. Ego to exposal. 15. Expecta, 
16. Sapit, he is wise. 17- Adsum, 
present. 


wait thou, or wait. 
I am here, or I am 



Note 2. — The neuter verb sum is fre- 
quently understood in all its inflections : in 
construing it must be supplied. 

1. Tempus edax. Ov. 

2. Mens corpSre. Sal. 

1. Est is understood after tempus. 2. Est is under- 
stood after mens. 



What verb is frequently understood ? 



17 

3. Usus praeceptor. Cic. 

4. Ego Davus. Ter. 

5. Stylus magister. Cic. 

6. Imperator animus. Sal. 

7. Ebrietas insania. Sen. 

8. Medicina ars. Cic. 

9. Tarquinius Rex. Eut. 

10. Nupta soror. Eut. 

11. Decepta aviditas. Ph<zd. 

12. Pars decepta, Hor. 

4. Davus, a sly servant, and character in Terence. 
9. Fuit is understood. 10. Soror, the sister, nupta 
(fuisset). 11. Aviditas (fuit) decepta. 

A genitive case, whether placed before or after the 
verb, must depend upon some other word. 

RULE III. 
A genitive case is taken immediately after 
the noun, or word by which it is governed. 

The genitive case is generally governed 
by that word nearest to which it stands. 

1 . Gener Tarquinii collegit exercitum. Eut. 

2. Usus rerum est prseceptor. Cic. 



On what does a genitive case depend ? Where is it 
construed ? 

Which is the genitive case ? The word by which it is 
governed ? 



18 

3. Pars hominum decepta cupidine. Hor. 

4. Dignitas tribunSrum perseveravit. Eut. 

5. Popiilus Romae tribunos creavit. Eut. 

6. Matronae defensorem pudicitiae luxerunt. 

Eut. 

7. Fundamentum est justitise tides. Cic. 

8. Rerum vicissitudo est. Ter. 

9. Scientia est pabulum animae. Cic. 

10. Honor est praemium virtutis. Cic. 

11. Irse remedium dilatio est. Sen. 

12. Injuriarum remedium est oblivio. P.Syr. 

13. Atticus tulit pietatis fructum. Nep. 

14. Cultura animi philosophia esta. Cic. 

15. Societatis vinculum est ratio. Cic. 

16. Medicina est ars valetudinis. Cic. 

17. Imperator vitae mortalium animus est. 

Sal. 

18. Dux Romanorum ceperat Volscorum ci- 

vitatem. Eut. 

19. Philosoph5rum vita commentatio mortis 

est. Cic. 

3. Decepta (est) cupidine, with desire, from cupid-o, 
mis. 8. Est, there is, vicissitudo. 

The nominative case, as well as the case governed by 
the vera, may have its nature or quality specified by an 
adjective. The following Rule will show where the 



19 

adjective is to be construed, whether it be placed before 
or after the verb. 

RULE IV. 

Take the adjective, adjective-pronoun, or 
participle before the word with which it 
agrees ; except when the adjective or parti- 
ciple governs some following word, then that 
adjective or participle is construed after the 
noun. 

When you meet with an adjective, adjective-pronoun, 
or participle, you look through the sentence for a noun 
of the same number, case, and gender, and generally 
ending with the same letter, to which noun the adjec- 
tive belongs : or you ask the question who or what * 
with the adjective, and the answer is the substantive to 
the adjective. In the first example you say, Who or 
what divine ? the answer is, lex, law ; and, therefore, 
lex is the noun to which the adjective divina belongs. 

1. Lex divina manet. Cic. 

2. Labitur volatilis setas. Ov. 

3. Venit summa dies. Virg. 



Where is the adjective construed ? Is there any ex- 
ception ? What is it ? 

How do you find the substantive to the adjective ? 
Give an example. 



See Eton Grammar, p. 59. 



20 

4. Summa villarum culmina fumant Virg. 

5. Fugit irreparable tempus. Virg. 

6. Gallia omnis divisa. Cces. 

7. Magnse divitiae dilabuntur. Sal. 

8. Omnis partiirit arbos. Virg. 

9. Teneras mora percoquit uvas. Ov. 

10. Romanum imperium habet exordium. 

Eut. 

11. Romanse matronae defensorem pudici- 

tiae suae luxerunt. Eut. 

12. Sol crescentes decedens duplicat umbras. 

Virg. 

13. Experientia est magister optimus. Cic. 

14. Magnum est vectigal parsimonia. Cic. 

15. Terra salutares herbas nutrit. Ov. 

16. Degeneres animos timor arguit. Virg. 

17. Nero retibus aureis piscabatur. Eut. 

18. Mens sana corpSre sano. Juv. 

19. Vocem sancta misit religio. Phced. 

20. Ebrietas est voluntaria insania. Sen. 

21. Stylus optimus magister. Cic. 

22. Animus rector humani generis. Sal. 

6. Omnis Gallia, all Gaul or France, divisa (est). 
18. Est is understood after sana; sano corpore, in a 
sound body. 21. Stylus, the iron pen with which the 
Romans wrote on their tables of wax. It was brought 
to a sharp point at one end, to write with ; and the 
other was made broad like a spade to obliterate what 
they wished to alter. 22. Animus (est), &c. 



21 

23. Societatis humanae vinculum est ratio. 

Cic. 

24. Gener Tarquinii ingentem eollegit exer- 

citum. Eut. 

25. Omnium rerurn vicissitiido est. Ter. 

26. Ultio est animi exigui voluptas. Juv. 

27. Urbemexiguam Romulus constituit. Eut. 

28. Lingua mali pars pessima servi. Juv. 

29. Usus rerum est optimus praeceptor. Cic. 

30. Maximum irse remedium dilatio est. Sen. 

31. Tota pliilosophorum vita commentatio 

mortis est. Cic. 

32. Bona pars hominum decepta cupidine 

falso. Hor. 

28. Lingua (est) pessima pars mali servi. 

EXAMPLES 
Illustrating the latter part of Rule IV. 

If the adjective or participle governs some 

following word, that adjective or participle is 

construed after the noun with which it agrees. 

1. Aristides sequalis fuit Themistocli. Nep. 

1. Aristides fuit cequalis Themistocli. 

When the adjective or participle governs a] word, 
where is it construed ? 

Which is the adjective or participle f The noun with 
which it agrees ? 



22 

2. Cato cupidissimus literarum fuit. Nep. 

3. Conscia mens recti famae mendacia ri- 

det. Ov. 

4. Pecora natura ventri obedientia finxit. 

Sal. 

5. Aspice jucundo labentes murmiire rivos. 

Ov. 

6. Romulus invitavit viclnas urbi nati5nes. 

Eut. 

7. Homines cupidi rerum novarum. Cces. 

8. Iracundia est inimica consilio. Cic. 

9. Epaminondas erat studiSsus audiendi. 

Nep. 
10 Homini utilissimus est cibus simplex. 

Plin. 

11. Homo est praestantior feris. Cic. 

12. Ferae sunt expertes ratidnis. Cic. 

13. Invia virtuti nulla est via. Ov. 

14. Epaminondas erat veritatis diligens. Nep. 

2. Cato fuit cupidissimus, very fond, literarum. 
3. Mens conscia recti ridet. 4. Natura finxit pecora 
obedientia ventri. 5. Aspice rivos labentes jucundo mur* 
mure. 6. Romulus invitavit nationes vicinas, near urbi. 

7. Ho?nines (sunt) cupidi, desirous novarum rerum. 

8. Consilio, to reason. 12. Ferce sunt expertes, desti- 
tute rationis. 14. Epaminondas erat diligens veritatis. 






23 

Note I. — The noun is frequently under- 
stood. 

1. Sapiens est beatus. Cic. 

2. Omnia fert setas. Virg. 

3. Fortes fortuna adjuvat. Ter. 

4. Socrates sapientissfrnus judicatus est. 

Cic. 

5. Est difficilis cura rerum alienarum. Cic. 
,6. Bona cogitat. Cic. 

7. Mors omnibus est communis. Ov. 

8. Jovis omnia plena. Virg. 

9. Fallacia alia aliam trudit. Ter. 

1 0. Defatigatus. — Facta omnia. Ter $ . 

1 1 . Voluptate capiuntur omnes. Cic. 

12. Nihil amicitia prgestabilius est. Cic. 

13. Decipit frons prima multos. Phced. 

14. Nil mortalibus arduum est. Hor. 

15. Ingenii egregia facinora immortalia sunt. 

Sal. 

16. Rari boni. Juv. 

1. Homo is understood after sapiens. 2. Fert, 
bears away. 8. Omnia, all things (sunt) are plena Jovis 
from Jupiter. 10. Defatigatus (sum). — Omnia (sunt) 
facta. 16. Boni, good men (sunt) rari. 



Are not adjectives often placed without a noun ? 
What noun is understood when the adjective is mascu- 
line ? (See " Introduction to Latin Construing," p. 81.) 
What, when the adjective is neuter ? page 81. 



24 

17. Peru tiles Xenophontis libri sunt. Cic. 

18. Omnes recta consilia damus. Ter. 

19. Natura parvo contenta est. Cic. 

18. Omnes, we all damus , &c. 

In a simple sentence there may be excited in the 
mind a sudden emotion which is denoted by an inter- 
jection ; and the verb, participle, or adjective, may 
have the time, circumstance, quality, or manner of its 
signification, expressed by an adverb. 

RULE V. 

Interjections and adverbs may be construed 
where they best suit the sense ; but an inter- 
jection should be generally taken the first 
word in the sentence, and an adverb as near as 
possible to the verb, participle, or adjective. 



1. 


Ah ! quanto satius est. 




Ter. 


2. 


Turn victus est. 




Eut. 


3. 


Oh ! cohibete iras. 




Virg. 


4. 


Heu ! quam difficile est. 




Ov. 


5. 


Jam jam mora est. 




Virg. 


6. 


Nunc frondent silvse. 




Virg. 


7. 


Postea victi sunt. 




Eut. 


8. 


Deinde regnum Priscus accepit. 


Eut. 


4. 


Heu alas ! qudm difficile, how difficult, 


est. 



What is an adverb ? With what is it construed ? 



25 

9. Saepe summa ingenia latent. Plant. 

10. Sic stat sententia. Ov. 

11. Nero nullam vestem bis induit. Suet. 

12. Sicilia primo habuit nomen Trinacriae. 

Just. 

13. Interdum lachrymae pondera vocis ha- 

bent. Ov. 

14. Jejunus stomachus raro vulgaria temnit. 

Hor. 

15. Mens sapientis semper erit tranquilla. 

Cic. 

16. Nemo repente fuit turpissimus. Juv. 

17. Labitur occulte volatilis aetas. Ov. 

18. Titus causas Latine egit. Eut. 

19. Catilina maxime adolescentium familia- 

ritates adpetebat. Sal. 

20. Liberius vivendi fuit potestas. Ter. 

21. Facile omnes recta consilia damus. Ter. 

22. Jus summum saepe summa est malitia. 

Ter. 

23. Dictum sapienti sat est. Ter. 

13. Pondera, the effects. 17. Occulte impercepti- 
bly. 18. Egit pleaded, causas causes, Latine in Latin. 
19. Adpetebat for appetebat from appeto. 21. Omnes, 
we all, facile damus, &c. 



How do you know that omnes, Ex. 21, is to be con- 
strued we all ? See Rule II, note 1, p. 15. 



26 

24. Num ejus color pudoris signum usquam 

indicat ? Ter. 

25. Iterum Tarquinius Romam pene cepit. 

Eut. 

26. Dignitas tribun5rum militarium non diu 

perseveravit. Eut. 

27. Repente vocem sancta misit religio. 

Phced. 

28. Nunc omnis parttirit arbos. Virg. 

29. Non omnia posstimus omnes. Virg. 

30. Omnium rerum heus vicissitudo. Ter. 

31. Ultio semper est animi exigui voluptas. 

Juv. 

24. When a question is asked, the auxiliary, in Eng- 
lish, is put before the nominative case : as, Num color 
ejus, does his colour, usquam indicat signum pudoris ? 
25. Cepit, from capio. 30. Heus vicissitudo (est). 

A simple sentence can contain only one finite verb : 
but still, it may admit a verb in the infinitive mood. 

RULE VI. 

The infinitive mood is generally taken 
after another verb. 

1. Csesar etiam lachrjfmas fudisse dicitur. 

Eut. 

1. Fudisse from /undo. 



What do you mean by an iNfinitive mood ? Where is 
a verb of the infinitive mood construed ? 



27 

2. Heu, quam difficile est crimen non pro- 

dere. Ov. 

3. Animus debet imperare corpus. Sal. 

4. Librum scribere difficile est. Mart. 

5. Pars qusedam cerebri videtur animi prin- 

cipatum tenere. Cic. 

6. Humana potest memoria recordari. Eat, 

7. Parce pias scelerare manus. Virg. 

8. Druides magnum numerum versuum 

ediscere dicuntur. Cces. 

9. Naturam mutare pecunia nescit. Hot. 

10. Admoneri bonus gaudet. Sen. 

11. Nescit vox missa reverti. Hor. 

12. Nunquam satis laudari potest philoso- 

phia. Cic. 

13. Vir optimus difficillime alios esse im- 

probos suspicatur. Cic. 

14. Jubes me bona cogitare. Cic. 

7. Parce, forbear. 8. Druid-es, urn, the Druids, the 
priests of the ancient Gauls. 11. Vox, a word. 

Note 1. — If the infinitive mood be not 
governed by a verb, &c. you must take the 
accusative case before the infinitive, putting 
that before it, and construe the accusative 

Which is the infinitive mood ? The word by which it 
is governed ? 

c 2 



28 

case as if it were the nominative, and the 
infinitive mood generally as the same tense 
as the preceding verb, and the same number 
and person as the accusative case. 

1. Me commereri culpam scio # . Plant. 

2. Hominem principem reliquarum rerum 

voluit esse Deus. Cic. 

3. Miror te non scribere. Cic. 

4. Eos cives non esse necessarios. Eut. 

5. Omnem crede diem diluxisse supremum. 

Hor. 

6. Plato vinum pueris negandum esse 

putat. Sen. 

7. Sensi ego omni aetati mortem esse com- 

munem. Cic. 

8. Me liceat casus misereri insontis amici. 

Virg. 

2. Principem, the lord, reliquarum rerum, of other 
things or creatures. 



How do you construe an infinitive mood, not go- 
verned by another verb ? What case do you take first ? 
What is put before it ? Like what mood and tense do 
you then construe the infinitive ? 

Which is the accusative case ? The infinitive mood ? 



* Most of these sentences may be construed by the general 
directions in the preceding Rules; thus, 1. Scio I know, me 
myself, commereri to deserve, culpam blame. 2. Deus God, 
vriktit wished, hominem man, esse to be, principem reliqua- 
rum rerum. 



29 

9. Consoles se sciebant esse privates. Eut. 
10. Ne feras moleste te moneri. Cic. 

] 1. Traditum est Homerum caecum fuisse. 

Cic. 

10. Ne feras you cannot declare, te that you, moneri 
moleste. 

Note 2. — Me, te, se, ilium, &c. are often 
understood. 

1 . Reddere posse negabat. Virg. 

2. Forsan hsec olim meminisse juvabit. 

Virg. 

3. Juvat evasisse tot urbes. Virg. 

4. Juvat fugam tenuisse. Virg. 

5. Prohibent csetera Parcae scire. Virg. 

6. Deus festinare fugam ecce stimulat. 

Virg. 

1. Se is understood before posse. 2. Te, or some 
other pronoun, is understood before meminisse. 4. iVbs 
after juvat. 5. Parcce the fates, prohibent (te) scire. 
6. Ecce Deus stimulat (me) festinare. 

Note 3. — Esse, ox fuisse, is often omitted 
after participles. 
1. Sperat adolescens diu se victurum. Cic. 
1. Esse is understood after victurum. 



What pronouns are often understood before the in- 
finitive mood ? 

Are not esse and fuisse sometimes understood ? When ? 



30 

2. Catullus negaret se bellum compositu- 

rum. Nep. 

3. Legatos missuros dixerunt. Nep. 

4. Sperate Deos memores fandi. Virg, 

5. Suam quisque conditionem miserrimam 

putat. Cic. 

6. Turn magnum exitium imperio futurum. 

4. Sperate deos, that the gods (esse) are, he. fandi, 
of what is fit to be spoken, or right. 5. Suam condi- 
tionem that his own situation, esse is, miserrimam. 
6. Turn then that, magnum exitium futurum (esse). 

Note 4. — Sometimes an infinitive mood, 
depending upon no other word, is taken the 
first word in the sentence. 

1. Cupere omnia scire curios5rum est. Cic. 

2. Duci cupiditate scientiae summorum 

virorum est. Cic. 

3. Ingenuas didicisse fideliter artes 

Emollit mores. Ov. 

4. Tempestatem optare dementis est. Cic. 

5. Subvenire tempestati sapientis est. Cic. 

1. Cupere scire omnia est (pars the part, or property) 
curiosorum. 2. Duci cupiditate scientice est (pars the 
part, or property), &c. 4. Optare tempestatem est 
dementis. 5. Subvenire to give help, tempestati to 
affliction. 



31 

Verbs sometimes govern more than one case. 

RULE VII. 

When several cases come after the 
verb, take the nominative or accusative Jirst 
with its genitive case, if any, then the 
dative or ablative, with its genitive, 8$c. 

1. Cleopatra sibi aspidem admisit. Eut. 

2. Corvus unguibus Galli ociilos verbe- 

ravit. Eut. 

3. Pedibus timor addidit alas. Virg. 

4. Caesar Britannis mox bellum intulit. 

Eat. 

5. Claudius filio suo Britannici. nomen im- 

posuit. Eut. 

6. Themistocles omne tempus Uteris Persa- 

rum dedit. Nep. 

7. Bonis omnibus hostis fuit Nero. Eut. 

1. Cleopatra, queen of Egypt. 2. Galli, of the Gaul. 
6. Dedit applied, Uteris to the writings. 



What is the seventh rule ? Which case is immediately 
construed after the verb ? When is the dative or 
ablative taken ? 

Which is the accusative case ? The dative ? The ah* 
lative ? 



32 

8. Oderunt peccare boni virtutis amore. 

Hor. 

9. Plato vinum pueris vetat. Cic. 

10. Deus nobis haec otia fecit. Virg. 

11. Nee placidam membris dat cura quie- 

tem. Virg. 

12. Magister equitum Romse primus fuit 

Cassius. Ent. 

13. Tu silvestrem tenui musam meditaris 

avena. Virg. 

14. Palmam movet ordine nemo. Virg. 

15. Alcibiades parsimonia cultus omnes La- 

cedasmonios vincebat. Nep. 

16. Os homini sublime dedit Deus. Ov. 

17. Poenam misero mens conscia donat. 

Lucr. 

18. Gratiam tibi habeo maximam. Ter. 

19. Pausanias magnam belli gloriam turpi 

morte maculavit. Nep. 

20. Popiilus Romae sibi tribunos plebis 

creavit. Eut. 

21. Aspice curvatos pomorum pondere ra- 

mos. Ov. 

13. Tu meditaris, you play 5 silvestrem musam, tenui 
avena on a slender reed. 15. Vincebat surpassed, &c. 
'parsimonia by the frugality. 18. Habeo, I give. 



33 

22. Sol implet mundum luce sua. Ck. 

23. Deteriores sumus omnes licentia. Ter. 

24. Heu, quam difficile est crimen non pro- 

dere vultu ! Ov. 

25. Centum lumhubus caput Argus habebat. 

Ov. 

26. Dictator Romse primus fuit Lartius. Eut. 

A preposition and its case may be included in a sim- 
ple sentence : though prepositions are generally placed 
after the verb, they sometimes precede it. 

RULE VIII. 

After a preposition, look for an accusa- 
tive or ablative case. 

The preposition with its case, is generally 
construed towards the end of a sentence. 

1. Romanum imperium a Romulo exor- 

dium habet. Eut. 

2. Romanae matrdnae defensorem pudicitiae 

suae per annum luxerunt. Eat. 

3. Annum Numa descripsit in decern 

menses. Eut. 

3. Descripsit, divided. 



Where are the preposition and its case generally 
placed ? For what case do you look after a preposition ? 
Which is the preposition ? The case governed by it f 

c 5 



34 

4. Nirnium ad rem in senecta attenti su- 

mus. Ter. 

5. Fas est ab hoste doceri. Ov. 

6. Ut saepe summa ingenia in occulto la- 

tent ! Plaut. 

7. Druides a bello abesse eonsueverunt. 

Cces. 

8. Beatus esse sine virtute nemo potest. Cic. 

9. Animo cum hac carne grave certamen 

est. Cic. 

10. Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres. 

Cces. 

11. Pueri inter sese quam pro levibus noxiis 

iras gerunt ! Ter. 

12. Omnis in Ascanio cari stat cura pa- 

rentis. Virg. 

13. Diligentia in omnibus rebus plurimum 

valet. Cic. 

14. Ne existimes ullam sine labore esse vir- 

tutem. Sen. 

15. Csesar ad Tamesin exercitum duxit, Cces. 

4. Ad rem* to money. 6. Ut scepe how often, in 
occulto in obscurity. 7- Consueverunt from consuesco. 
8. Beatus, happy. 9. Grave certamen est animo, in 
the mind, cum hac carne, or, There is a great contest 
between the body and mind. 11. Quhm how, pueri 
do boys, gerunt iras inter sese jjro levibus noxiis! 
15. Tamesin, the river Thames which flows through 
London. 



35 

16. Intra fortunam quisque debet manere 

suam, Ov» 

17. Sine virtute amicitia esse non potest. Cfc. 

18. Potes hoc sub casu ducere somnos? 

Virg. 

19. Proba vita est via ad caelum. Cic. 

20. Galli in liberos vitae habent potestatem. 

Cces. 

21. Romulus Senatores nominavit propter 

senectutem. Eut. 

22. Urbem exiguam in Palatino monte Ro- 

mulus constituit. Eut. 

23. Socrates philosophiam devoeavit e cselo. 

Cic. 

18. When a question is asked, the nominative case 
in English comes after the verb, or between the auxi- 
liary and the verb ; as, Potes can you, ducere take, som* 
nos, &c. See page 58, No. 4, &c« 

Note 1. — If a word, governed by a pro- 
position, have a genitive case depending 
upon it, that genitive case is often elegantly 
placed between the preposition and the word 
which it governs ; but the preposition and its 
case must be construed by Rule VIII, and 



Are any words placed between a preposition and it? 
case ? In what instance does this take place ? 



36 

the genitive case after it according to 
Rule III. 

1. Omnes trahimur ad cognitionis cupidi- 

tatem. Cic. 

2. Omnes artes in veri investioatione ver- 

o 

santur. Cic. 

3. Expetuntur divitiae ad usus vitae neces- 

sarios. Cic. 

4. Post haec Annibal diffidere jam de belli 

ccepit eventu. Eut. 

5. Duci cupiditate scientiae ad magnarum 

rerum contemplationem summorum vi- 
rdrum est. Cic. 

6. Venit Csesar magnis itineribus in Ner- 

viorum fines. Cces. 

7. Priscus Tarquinius per Anci filios occi- 

sus est. Eut. 

8. Praenestini usque ad Romse portas bello 

venerant. Eut. 

9. Miltiades caeteras instilas sub Athenien- 

sium redegit potestatem, Nep. 

3. The genitive case, vitce, is here placed between 
the adjective necessarios and its substantive 2isus, which 
is governed by ad* 5. Duci cupiditate scientice ad con- 
templationem magnarum rerum est, &c. 



Which is the genitive case f Between what two words 
is it placed ? 



37 

10. De Magonis interitu duplex memoria 
prodita est, Nep. 

THE AMPLIFICATION OF SIMPLE SENTENCES. 

The manner of amplifying simple sentences by the 
addition of words, according 1 to the preceding rules, 
may be seen in the following examples. 

1 . Matronae luxerunt. 

Matronae defensorem luxerunt. 
Romance matronae defensorem luxerunt. 
Romanae matronae defensorem pudieitice 

luxerunt. 
Romanae matronae defensorem pudicitise 

suce luxerunt. 
Romanae matronae defensorem pudicitiae 
suae per annum luxerunt. Eut. 



Pausanias gloriam maculavit. 
Pausanias magnam gloriam maculavit. 
Pausanias magnam belli gloriam maculavit. 
Pausanias magnam belli gloriam turpi 
morte maculavit. Nep. 



3. Culmina fumant. 
Jhm culmina fumant. 
Jam summa culmina fumant. 



38 

Jam sumtna villarum culmina fumant. 
Jam sumraa procid villarum culmina fu- 
mant. Virg. 



4. Difficile est. 

Quam difficile est ! 
Hen, quam difficile est ! 
Heu, quam difficile est crimen nbnprodere ! 
Heu, quam difficile est crimen non pro- 
dere vultu ! Ov. 



Claudius insulas addidit. 

Claudius quasdam insulas addidit. 

Claudius quasdam insulas imperio addidit. 

Claudius quasdam insulas Romano impe- 
rio addidit. 

Claudius quasdam insulas ultra Brita/i- 
niam Romano imperio addidit. Eut. 



The eight preceding rules for construing a simple 
sentence, may be easily reduced to this 

GENERAL RULE. 

Some Interjections, Adverbs, &c. as heu, quilmt 
j&m, 6cc. may be first taken* 



39 

The Nominative, with its adjective, adjective-pro* 
noun, or participle, must then be construed. 

After the nominative, the Genitive case, governed 
by the nominative, must be taken, and to that genitive 
case must he added every word agreeing with it. 

The Verb must be construed after the nominative 
and its dependents. 

The Adverb, or word restraining or increasing the 
sense, must generally be taken with the verb ; or, 

Next after the verb may come another verb of the 
Infinitive mood. 

The cases which the verb governs may be taken 
after the verb ; first the accusative or nominative, then 
the dative, ablative, or genitive, with the adjective, 
or adjective-pronoun agreeing with the noun. 

After the cases governed by the verb, may follow the 
Preposition, and its Noun, with every word depending 
on it s 



CHAPTER II. 



The Analysis, or the Method of construing 
Compound Sentences. 

A compound sentence has more than one nominative 
case, or one finite verb, either expressed or under- 
stood ; or it consists of two or more simple sentences, 
connected by relatives or conjunctions : as, 

1. Omnia vincit amor, et nos cedamus amori. 

Virg. 
Love overcomes all things, and we can give 
way to love. 

2. Feliciter is sapit, qui alieno perictilo sapit. 

Plant. 
He is happily wise, who is wise at another's 
danger. 

The parts of a compound sentence are separated 
from each other by marks or stops. The smaller divi- 
sions of a sentence named clauses, are separated by this 
mark (,) called a comma, as in the preceding examples. 



What is a compound sentence ? By what words are 
simple sentences connected, to form a compound sen- 
tence ? 

What are the smaller parts of a compound sentence 
called ? By what are they separated ? Make a comma. 



41 

In each of these sentences, there are two clauses — the 
former connected by the conjunction et, and, — the 
latter by the relative qui, who. The greater divisions 
named members, are separated by this mark (;) called 
a semicolon ; or this (:) called a colon : as, 

3. Alexander Magnus nullam urbem obse- 
dit, quam non expugnaverit : nullam gentem 
adiit, quam non calcaverit. Just. 

Alexander the Great besieged no city, 
which he did not take : he came to no na- 
tion, which he did not subdue. 

In this sentence there are two members, divided by a 
colon ; and two clauses in each member, separated by 
commas, but connected by the relative quam, which. 

4. Omnes se Britanni vitro inficiunt, quod 
cseruleum efficit colorem ; atque hoc horri- 
biliore sunt in pugna aspectu. Cces. 

All the Britons stain themselves with 
woad, which produces a blue colour; and 
from hence they are of a more terrible as- 
pect in battle. 



What are the greater divisions of a compound sen- 
tence called ? Make a semicolon and colon. 

Give the third example. How many members are 
there in it? Point them out. How many clauses? 
Which are they ? 

How many clauses are there in the fourth example ? 
Name them in order. How many members? Point 
them out. 



42 

This sentence contains two members* divided by a se- 
micolon. The former member contains two clauses, 
connected by the relative quod, which, and the latter 
only one clause. 

THE CONSTRUING OF COMPOUND SENTENCES. 
If the construction of simple sentences be perfectly 
understood, there will not be much difficulty in con- 
struing compound sentences, as they are composed of 
two or more simple sentences, joined together by rela- 
tives or conjunctions. Every clause, in a compound 
sentence, would be a perfect simple sentence, if taken 
separately, and must be construed exactly as directed 
in the preceding Rules for Simple Sentences. The 
commas marking off the clauses, and the semicolon, or 
colon, dividing the sentence into members, should be 
carefully observed : they divide a long sentence into 
smaller parts, and are intended for resting places, 
while travelling through it. The whole attention should 
be given to the first clause ; and 5 when this is perfectly 
understood, the second should be taken, and thus pro- 
ceed from comma to comma, and colon to colon through 
the whole sentence. The following Rule is, therefore, 
necessary. It is a want of attention to it, which con- 
fuses you in construing your lessons ; but this and the 
following Rule, closely followed, will be found so com- 
prehensive as often to lead you pleasantly through very 
long sentences. # 

Of what are compound sentences composed? How is 
every clause of a compound sentence construed? What 
should be carefully noted? Why should the stops be 
noticed ? Upon what part of a sentence should the at- 
tention be first fixed ? What next ? What makes con- 
struing difficult ? 



43 



RULE I. 

Generally take every word in a clause, 
and always every word in a member on which 
you enter, before you begin another, observ- 
ing all the preceding Rules, respecting a 
simple sentence, as you construe each clause 
in succession. 

1. Percontatorem fugito ; nam garrulus 
idem est. Hor. 

2. Sincerum est nisi vas, quodcumque in- 
fundis acescit. Hor. 

3. Me nemo interpellate omnes diligunt 

Cic. 

4. Ut medicina sit ars valetudinis; sic 
prudentia sit vivendi. Cic. 

5. Ut natura ad aliquem morbum procli- 
vior ; sic animus alius ad alia vitia propen- 
sior. Cic. 



What is the first rule for construing a compound sen- 
tence ? Is every word in a member always taken before 
you begin another ? Is every word in a clause always 
or generally taken before you begin another? See 
Rule V, p. 59. What rules do you follow in construing 
clauses and members ? 

Is the first part of the sentence a clause, or a member f 
How do you know it is a clause ? Why is it a member ? 



44 

6. Obstupui, steteruntque comae, et vox 
faucibus haesit. Virg. 

7. Tu ne cede malis ; sed contra auden- 
tior ito. Virg. 

8. Naturales divitias dixit parabiles esse, 
quod parvo esset natura contenta. Cic. 

9. Diligentia in omnibus rebus plurimum 
valet : nihil est quod haec non ass£qui 
possit. Cic. 

10. Ubi socordiae te tradideris, nequid- 
quam deos implores ; irati, infestique sunt. 

Sal. 

11. Dictator autem Romae primus fiuit 
Lartius ; magister equitum primus Cassius. 

Eut. 

12. Principiis obsta: sero mediclnaparatur, 
Cum mala per longas convaluere moras. 

Ot. 

13. Poma dat autumnus : formosa est mes- 

sibus aestas : 

7. Tu ne do not you, cede yield, &c. 10. Ubi 
when, tradideris you shall have given up, te yourself, 
socordice, &c. 11. Fuit is understood after Cassius, by 
Note 2, page 16. 12. Cum mala convaluere for conva- 
luerunt. 

Divide diligentia (Example 9) into syllables. Is e 
long or short ? Why long ? Where is the accent ? 
Why is it on gen ? Where is the accent placed in re- 
bus ? Why is it on re ? 



45 

Ver prsebet flores : igne levatur hiems. 

Ov. 

14. Ut ager sine cultura fructuosus non 
est, sic sine doctrina animus ; ita est utraque 
res sine altera debilis ; cultura autem animi 
philosophia est. Cic. 

14. Sic animus {est) sine doctrina, 

RULE II. 

First take the nominative case or cases, 
with the adjective or adjectives, genitive case 
or cases, and other words agreeing with the 
genitive ; afterwards the verb or verbs, and 
then the cases governed by the verb. 

This is very similar to the first Rule given for con- 
struing a Simple Sentence. It differs, however, in di- 
recting two or more nominative cases, adjectives, or 
verbs, to be taken, and thereby proving the Sentence to 
be Compound. 

1. Prseclara facies, magnae divitioe, alia 
hujusmddi omnia dilabuntur; at ingenii 
egregia facinora immortalia sunt. Sal. 



What is the second Rule for a compound sentence ? 
How does it differ from the first Rule for simple sen- 
tences ? 

Which are the nominative cases ? The verb or verbs t 



46 

2. DivitiaD, bona valetudo, potentia, hon5- 
res, sunt incerta. Cic. 

3. Societatis humanae vinculum sunt ratio 
atque oratio. Cic. 

4. Temeritas, libido, et ignavia semper 
animum excruciant. Cic. 

5. Contentum suis rebus esse, maximae 
sunt certissimaeque divitise. Cic. 

5. Maxima diviticz que certissimcE sunt esse, &c. 

Note 1. — A vocative case or conjunction 
is often taken before the nominative case in 
compound sentences. See Rule V, page 24. 

1. Di, talem terris avertite pestem ! Virg. 

2. Eripe, nate, fugam, finemque impone 
lab5ri. Virg. 

3. Di, prohibete minas : Di, talem aver- 
tite casum. Virg. 

4. O dii immortales ! non intelligunt ho- 
mines quam magnum vectigal sit parsi- 
monia ! Cic. 

3. Di, O ye gods, prohibete, suppress, &c. Min~&, 
arum, threats. 



Where are vocative cases taken ? 
Which is the vocative case, adverb, conjunction, fyc. to 
be taken before the verb ? 



47 

5. pater, anne aliquas ad caelum hinc 
ire putandum est 

Sublimes animas ? iterumque ad tarda 
reverti 

Corpora? Virg. 

6. Da jungere dextram, genitor. Virg. 

7. Sceleste, spiritu eulpam lues 

Olim quum adscriptas venerit pcense dies. 

Phced. 

5. pater, O father, anne putandum est, is it to be 
imagined, aliquas sublimes animas, &c. 6. Genitor, O 
father, da permit (me). 

Note 2. — The nominative case is fre- 
quently understood in one clause, and must 
be generally supplied by the nominative of 
the other. 

1. Dido consilium vultu tegit, ac spem 
fronte serenat. Virg. 

2. Britanni plerique frumenta non serunt, 

1. Consilium, her design, &c. serenat, clears up, spem, 
hope, &c. 

When a nominative case is not expressed in a latter 
clause, how is it found ? When no nominative is ex- 
pressed in the first clause, how is it found ? See Note 1 , 
page 15. 

What is the nominative case understood ? What person 
is it ? 



48 

sed lacte et carne vivunt ; pellibusque sunt 
vestiti. Cces. 

3. Cincinnatus togam prsetextam accepit ; 
et liberavit exercitum. Eat. 

4. Themistocles de instantibus verissime 
judicabat; et de futuris callidissime conji- 
ciebat. Nep. 

5. Omne animal id agit, ut seipsum con- 
servet. Cic. 

6. Atticus mendacium neque dicebat, ne- 
que pati poterat. Itaque ejus comitas non 
sine severitate erat, neque gravitas sine faci- 
litate : ut difficile esset intellectu, utrum eum 
amici magis vererentur, an amarent. Nep. 

7. Numa annum descripsit in decern men- 
ses, prius sine aliqaa computatione confu- 
sum ; et infinita Romse templa constituit. 

Eut. 

8. Priscus numerum senat5rum duplicavit ; 
Circum Romse aedificavit; ludos Romanos 
instituit. Eut. 



4. De instantibus (rebus), concerning present things. 
8. Circum, the Circus, a large enclosed place in Rome, 
where the people assembled to see chariot races, and 
contests of agility and strength, such as running, leap- 
ing, wrestling, throwing the discus, &c. 



49 

9. ScipiSnem dicere soiitum scripsit Cato, 
" Nunquam se minus otiosum esse, quam 
cum otiosus : nee minus solum, quam cum 
solus esset." Cic. 

10. Cum in ccena recordatus fuisset, Titus, 
nihil se illo die cuiquam prsestitisse, dixit, 
" O amici, hodie diem perdidi." Eut. 

11. Epaminondas erat prudens, tempori- 
bus sapienter utens : adeo veritatis diligens, 
ut ne joco quidem mentiretur. Studiosus 
audiendi : ex hoc enim facillime disci arbi- 
trabatur. Nep. 

12. Temporibus certis maturam rusticus 

uvam 
Deligit ; et nudo sub pede musta fluunt : 
Temporibus certis desectas alligat herbas ; 
Et tonsam raro pectine verrit humum. Ov. 

13. Labitur occulte, fallitque, volatilis 

aetas. Ov. 

14. Nero imperium Romanumet deforma- 

vit, et diminuit. Eut. 

9. Cato scripsit Scipionem that Scipio, solitum (esse) 
was accustomed, dicere se, &c. — Because when Scipio 
was alone, he constantly employed himself in reading 
and thinking. 12. Rusticus deligit, gathers, from 
del~\go, igis, egi, ectum. Temporibus certis, at proper 
seasons. Raro pectine, with a wide rake. 13. Vola- 
tilis cetas labitur occulte que fallit. 14. Et deformavit, 
both, &c, et diminuit, and, &c. 



50 

15. Studia adolescentiam alunt, senectu- 
tem oblectant, secundas res ornant, adversis 
perfugium preebent ; delectant domi, non 
impediunt foris, pernoctant nobiscum, pere- 
grinantur, rusticantur. Cic. 

Note 3. — A verb, and sometimes a no- 
minative case and verb, when once expressed 
in the sentence, may be understood in other 
clauses. They must be supplied in constru- 
ing as the sense requires. 

When two words are joined together by a conjunction, 
the w T ords understood need not be always supplied, as 
the sense will be evident without filling up the ellipsis. 
We can say, Titus was called the love and delight of the 
human race : delicice, delight, may be considered the 
nominative joined by the conjunction, et, to amor, love ; 
but in reality it follows dicebatur ; and if the worcls un- 
derstood be supplied, the sentence will stand — Titus 
dicebatur amor, et Titus dicebatur delicice, &c. 

1. Amor et delicise humani generis Titus 
dicebatur. Exit. 

What may be understood ? Are they always supplied ? 

When are the words understood to be supplied ? 

If et delicice were taken out of the first Example, 
would the remainder be a simple or compound sen- 
tence ? Why ? Can you supply the words omitted be- 
tween et and delicice, and make a complete simple 
sentence ? 

What is the verb understood f Fill up the ellipsis. 



51 

2. Titus poemata et tragoedias Grsece com- 
posuit. Eut. 

3. Manlius captivos et Asdrubalem Ro- 
mam reportavit. Eut. 

4. Pan curat oves, oviumque magistros. 

Virg. 

5. Venit sumraa dies, et ineluctable tem- 
pus. Virg. 

6. Candida pax homines, trux decet ira 
feras. Ov. 

7. Si genus humanum et mortalia temnitis 
arm a ; 

At sperate deos memores fandi atque ne- 
fandi^ Virg. 

8. Domitianus Dominum se, et Deum, 
appellari jussit. Eut. 

9. Hsec novalia miles habebit ? Barbarus 
has segetes 1 Virg. 

10. Torva lesena lupum sequitur, lupus 
ipse capellam. Virg. 

11. Romanae matronae defensorem pudi- 



3. Ad is understood before Romam. 4. Pan, the 
god of shepherds, hunters, &e. : magistros avium, the 
shepherds. 7« Sperate, expect : fandi, of right, from 
fandus, participle, proper to be spoken. Nefandi, of 
wrong, from ne, not, and fandus. 9. Habebit is under- 
stood after Barbarus. 10, Sequitur is understood after 
ipse. 

d 2 



52 

citise suae, quasi communem patrem, per an- 
num luxerunt. Eut, 

12. Multi mortales dediti ventri, atque 
somno. Sal. 

13. Discite justitiam, et non temnere 
divos. Virg. 

14. Omnes sibi malle melius esse, quam 
alteri. Ter. 

15. Nihil loci est segnitise, neque socor- 
diae. Ter. 

16. Magnos homines virtute metimur, non 
fortuna. Nep. 

17. Gutta cavat lapidem non vi, sed ssepe 
cadendo : 

Sic vir fit doctus non vi, sed saepe legends 

18. Consumit ferrum, lapidemque, vetus- 
tas. Ov. 

19. Nee laehrymis crudelis amor, nee gra- 
mina rivis, 

Nee cytiso saturantur apes, nee fronde 
capellae. Virg. 

20. Victus, cultusque corporis ad valetudi- 
nem referatur, et ad vires, non ad volupta- 
tem. Cic* 

12. Sunt, after dediti. 14. Omnes, that all, malle esse 
meliits sibi, quemi alteri. 19. Saturatur is understood 
after crudelis amor, and saturantur in the other clauses. 



53 

21. Nunc omnis ager, nunc omnis parturit 
arbos. Virg. 

RULE III. 

All words signifying the same thing, or 
put in apposition, and those which answer to 
each other, such as, Talis, qualis ; Tantus ? 
quantus; Sic, ut ; aw^Tam, quam; must be 
construed as near together as possible. 

1. Brutum Romanae matronae, defensorem 
pudicitiae suae, quasi communem patrem, per 
annum luxerunt. Eut. 

2. Lucius Tarquinius Superbus, septimus 
atque ultimus regum Romanorum, templum 
Jovi in Capitolio aedificavit. Eut. 

3. Post Tullum Hostilium, Ancus Mar- 
cius, Numae ex filia nepos, suscepit impe- 
rium. Eut. 

4. Assentatio, vitiorum adjutrix, procul 
amoveatur ab amicitia. Cic. 

5. Atticus habebat avunctilum, Quintum 



What do you mean by words put in apposition ? 
Where are they to be construed ? 

Where is the accent in Brutum (Example 1) ? Why 
on Bru ? Where in Romance ? Why ? 

Which are the words put in apposition ? 



54 

Caecilium, equitem Romanum, familiarem 
Lucii Luculli, divitem, difficillima natura. 

Nep. 

6. Galli Mercurium, omnium inventorem 
artium, ferunt. Cces. 

7. Cimon, Miltiadis filius, Atheniensis, 
saepe quum ali'quem offensum fortuna videret 
minus bene vestitum, suum amictilum dedit. 

Nep. 

8. Brutus patriam liberavit, prseclarus 
auctor nobilitatis tuse. Cic. 

5. Familiarem, the friend. 6. Galli, the Gauls, 
ferunt, call, Mercurium, Mercury, inventorem, the in- 
ventor, &c. 7- Offensum, ill-treated : suum amiculum, 
his upper garment or cloak. 

Note 1. — When one word answers to 
another, it is better to defer taking the former 
word, till the other can be conveniently con- 
strued with it : such as, talis, qualis ; tam, 
quam ; prius, quam ; &c. 

1. Tale tuum carmen nobis, divine poeta, 
Quale sopor fessis in gramine. Virg. 

1. Begin with the vocative, Divine poeta tuum car- 
men (est) nobis tale, quale sopor {est) fessis (hominibus) in 
gramine. 



How do you take words that answer to each other ? 
Which are the words answering to each Qther ? 



55 

2. Tarn ego homo sum, quam tu. Plant. 

3. Omnia prius verbis experiri, quam 
armis, sapientem decet Ter. 

4. In Milti&de erat cum summa humanitas, 
turn mira comitas. Nep. 

5. Cineas, legatus Pyrrhi, dixit, regum se 
patriam vidisse ; scilfc&t tales illic esse 
omnes, qualis unus Pyrrhus apud Epirum et 
reliquam Graeciam putaretur. Eut< 

6. Expetuntur autem divitiae cum ad usus 
vitee necessarios, turn ad perfruendas volup- 
tates. Cic* 

7. Agri fertiles plus afferunt quam acce- 
pere. Cic< 

3. Decet sapientem experirl omnia verbis priits qwm 
armis. 

RULE IV. 

The relative, ivith its clause, must be con- 
strued as soon as possible after the antece- 
dent. 

The relative, in all its eases, is mostly taken the first 
%vord in its own clause. 



What is a relative ? Is it used to connect sentences ? 
Can there he a relative in a simple sentence ? 

Where must the relative and its clause be construed ? 
Which word is construed first in a relative clause ? 



56 

1. Nihil est liberale, quod non justum. Cic. 

2. Feliciter is sapit, qui perictilo alieno 
sapit. Plant. 

3. Omnes se Britanni vitro inficiunt, quod 
cseruleum efficit colorern ; atque hoc horribi- 
liore sunt in pugna adspectu. Cas. 

4. Nemo reperitur, qui sit studio nihil 
consecutus. Quint. 

5. Nova Romse dignitas est creata, quee 
Dictatura appellatur, major quam Consu- 
lates. Eut. 

6. Deorum numero eos solos Germani du- 
cunt, quos cernunt, et quorum opibus aperte 
juvantur, Solem et Vulcanum et Lunam. 

Cas. 

7. Omnes oderunt eos, qui sunt imme- 
mores beneficii ; et omnes amant animum 
gratum, et memorem beneficii. Cic. 

8. An non imitari agros fertiles debemus, 
qui multo plus afferunt quam accepere ? Cic. 

9. Primus ad sapientiam gradus est seip- 

3. Inficiunt, stain, se, themselves, vitro, with woad. 
6. Vulcanum, fire. 8. An non debemus imitari, ought 
we not to resemble : qui, which, &e., accepere (for ac- 
ceperunt), &e. 



Which is the relative clause ? Which word is the an- 
tecedent ? 



57 

sum noscere, quod, ut difficillimum est om- 
nium, ita utilissimum. Cic. 

10. Sicilia a principio patria Cyclopum 
fuit : Cocalusregnuminstilaeoccupavit; post 
quern singulae civitates in tyrannorum impe- 
rium concesserunt, quorum nulla terra fera- 
cior fuit. Just. 

1 1 . A varitia pecunise studium habet, quam 
nemo sapiens concuplvit. Sal. 

12. Britanniae Claudius inttilit bellum, 
quam nullus Romanorum post Julium Cae- 
sarem attigerat. Eut. 

13. Felix, quern faciunt aliena perictila 
cautum. Hor. 

14. Romanum imperium a Romiilo exor- 
dium habet, qui cum Remo fratre uno partu 
editus est. Eut. 

15. Chreme tantumne a re tua est otii tibi, 
Aliena ut cures, ea quae nihil ad te attinent? 
Homo sum : humani nihil a me alienum 

puto. Ter. 

10. Oj/c/op-es, um, pi. m. The Cyclops : they assisted 
Vulcan in making Jupiter's thunder-bolts. 11. Con- 
cupivii, from concupisco. 13. Felix (est), he is a 
happy man, quern aliena pericula faciunt, &c. 15. 
Chreme estne tantum otii tibi a tuti re, business, ut cures 
Uliena, other persons' affairs, ea quce attinent nihil ad te? 
Homo sum : puto nihil humani, of human nature, alie- 
num, strange or foreign, mihi m 

d 5 



58 



Note 1. — The antecedent is frequently 
understood, and may generally be supplied 
by a pronoun of the same gender as the 
relative : thus, Quod, that which ; Qui, he, 
or, they who. 

1. Quod honestum, id utile est. Cic. 

2. Quicquid praecipies, esto brevis. Hor. 

3. Qui pauca requlrunt, non multis exci- 
dunt. Plant. 

4. Quod reipublicae majus meliusve afferre 
possumus, qu&m si docemus, atque erudimus 
juventutem ? Cic. 

5. Quern fidum invenies, si tuis hostis 
fueris ? Sal. 

6. Invitat culpam, qui peccatum praet£rit. 

Virg. 

4. Quod what, possumus can we, afferre bring, reipub- 
licce, &c. 5. Quern alienurn, what stranger, invenies, will 
you find j &e. tuis, to your own (friends) : thus, when 
a question is asked, you may also observe that, in 
English, the nominative is placed between the auxiliary 
and the verb : as, possumus afferre, can %ve bring, and 
internes,, will you find. See page 35, note to No. 18. 



When the antecedent is not expressed, how is it sup- 
plied ? What pronoun is the antecedent to the relative ? 

Is the e in honestum (Example 1) long or short? 
Why ? Where is the accent ? Why on nes ? 

A question being asked in English, where is the no- 
minative case placed ? 



59 

7. Skt habet fautorum semper, qui rect& 
facit. Plant. 

8. Quae tibi promitto, sanctissim& obser- 
vabo. Cic. 

9. Quod praeclarum est, idem arduum est. 

Cic. 

10. Qui est particeps rationis et orationis, 
est praestantior quam ferae. Cic. 

11. Dimidium facti, qui ben& coepit, habet. 

Hor. 

10. Qui, he who, &c. 11. Qui bend ccepit, habet 
dimidium facti. 

RULE V. 

A clause is frequently inserted within 

another, explaining some part of it. The 

inserted clause must he construed as near as 

possible to that part of the sentence which it 

illustrates, and according to the Rules for 

simple sentences. 

The principle of inserting one clause within another 
is very extensive ; and, when fully understood, will re- 
move many difficulties in construing. 

In the first Rule, you were not directed always, but 
generally, to take every word in one clause on which 



Is one clause often inserted within another ? 
Where is the inserted clause to be construed ? 
Is this Rule of much service? 



60 

you enter before you begin another, because of the ex- 
ceptions introduced by the present Rule ; for, when 
there is no inserted clause, the first Rule is universally 
applicable. Though it is advisable to take the inserted 
clause as soon as convenient after the words which it 
illustrates, it may be sometimes construed in different 
places. In the first sentence, the inserted clause, cum 
valemus, may be construed at the beginning, middle, or 
end of the sentence. We can say, When we are well, 
we all, &c. ; or, We all, when we are well, &c. ; or, 
We all can easily give good directions to the sick, when 
we are well. 

It may be useful to omit the inserted clause, printed 
in italics, in construing the following examples the first 
time ; and then it will be easily seen where the inserted 
clause or clauses may be best construed. 

1. Facile omnes, cilm valtmus, recta con- 
silia segrotis damus. Te?\ 

2. Qui non vetat peccare, cum possit, 
jubet. Sen. 

3. Opprime, dian nova sunt, subiti mala 
semiua morbi. Ov. 

4. Alcibiades, quitm tempos posceret, la- 
boriosus in vita. Nep. 



Does it not make an exception to the first Rule in 
compound sentences ? Explain it. 

In how many places may the inserted clause be some- 
times construed ? Give several examples. 

Which is the inserted clause ? 



61 

5. In vestitu, sicut in plerisque rebus, me- 
diocritas optima est. Cic. 

6. Inops, potentem ditm vult imitari, perit. 

Phced. 

7. Forma honesti, si oculis cerneretur, 
mirabiles amores, ut ait Plato, excitaret 
sapient iae. Cic. 

8. Cincinnatus, cum in opere et arans 
esset inventus^ Togam Prsetextam accepit. 

Eut. 

9. Darius, cum ex Europd in Asiam redis- 
set, classem quingentarum navium compa- 
ravit. Nep. 

10. Datis, etsi nbn locum cequum vide- 
bat suis, confligere cupiebat. Nep. 

11. Pater Pomponii Attici, prout ipse 
amabat literas, omnibus doctrlnis tilium eru- 
divit. Nep. 

12. Equites, quilm est usus, omnes in 
bello versantur. Cces. 

13. Utager, quamvis fertilis, sineeultura 

6. Perit from pereo, perivi, peril, and peri. 7. In 
this sentence there are two inserted clauses, ut ait 
Plato, and si oculis cerneretur. Togam Pratextam, a 
long white gown, fringed with purple, worn by magis- 
trates as a mark of distinction. 12. Omnes equites. The 
equites or knights were that order of men among the 
Gauls, which conducted all warlike affairs. An eques 
among the Romans was engaged in war, and had his 
rank between the senators and commonalty. 



62 

fructu5sus esse non potest : sic sine doctrina 
animus. Cic. 

14. Nil opus est, dixit Romulus, certa- 
mine ullo. Ov. 

15. Est philosophia, si interpretari velis, 
studium sapientiae. Cic. 

16. iEgroto, dum ariima est, spes est. Cic. 

17. Ficta omnia celenter, tanquhm flos- 
culi, decidunt. Cic. 

18. Camissares, quod et manu fortis, et 
hello strenuus, habuit provinciam Ciliciae. 

Nep. 

Note 1. — The ablative absolute is fre- 
quently inserted within another clause. 

The participle is construed after the word 
with which it agrees. 

The ablative absolute is best taken first, but it may 
be construed, either before or after the other parts of a 
sentence, as best suits the sense. 

1. Fabrichis, metis SamnitWus et Luca- 
nis, triumphavit. Eut. 



Where is the ablative absolute inserted ? 
In the ablative absolute which word must be first 
construed ? 

Is the ablative absolute an inserted clause ? 
Where may it be construed? 
Which is the ablative absolute ? 



63 

2. Lucius Quintius Cincinnatus, cum in 
opSre et arans esset inventus, sudbre deterso, 
Togam Prsetextam aceepit ; et, cczsis hosti- 
bus, liberavit exercitum. Eut. 

3. Heu, nihil inv'itis fas quenquam fidere 
Divis ! Virg. 

4. Annibal, relicto in Hispanid fratre 
Asdrubale, Pyrenaeum transiit. Eut. 

5. Nihil, exceptd virtute, amicitia prses- 
tabilius est. Cic. 

6. Pompeius ad Judseam transgressus, 
duodecim miltibus Judceorum occisis, Hiero- 
solymam, caput gentis, tertio mense cepit. 

Eut. 

7. Nemo nocens, sejudice, absolvitur. 

Juv. 

8. Anno ab urbe condlta sexcentesimo 
octogesimo nono, Marco Tullio Cicerone, 
Caio Antonio consulibus, Lucius Sergius 
Catilina, nobilissimi gen&ris vif, sed ingenii 
pravissimi, ad delendam patriam conjuravit, 
cum quibusdam clans quidem sed audacibus 
viris. Eut. 

9. Tu nihil invitd dices, faciesve, Minervd. 

Hor. 

3. Divis invitis, heu nihil fas (est) it is not right, 
quenquam fidere. 



64 

10. Caesar, bellis civilibus toto orbe com- 
positis, Romam rediit. Eut. 

Note 2. — A relative clause is often in- 
serted. 

Observation I. — If the nominative case be 
the antecedent, the inserted relative and its 
clause are taken immediately after that nomi- 
native case. 

This and the following" observation on the relative 
clause, are comprekended in Rule IV, which must be 
closely followed in construing the Examples. 

It would be better first to construe the sentence with- 
out the inserted clause, printed in italics ; and, in the 
second reading, to take the relative clause immediately 
after the antecedent. 

1. Leve fit, qitod benk Jertur, onus. Ov. 

2. Exemplum, litem quod lite resolvit, nil 
agit. Hor. 

3. Homo, qui est parficeps rationis et 
2. Exemplum, the example, quod, &c. 



Is a relative clause often inserted ? 

Where is the relative construed when the nominative 
case is the antecedent ? If the relative clause be 
omitted, will not some sentences become simple? By 
what rules are relative and other clauses construed? 
See Rule I, p. 43. 

Which is the antecedent ? What case is it ? 



65 

orationis, est prasstantior quam ferae, quae 
sunt experles rationis et oratiSnis. Cic. 

4. Romanum imperium, quo ah exordio 
ullum fere minus humana potest memoria 
recordari, a Romiilo exordium habet. 

5. Antonius, qui Asiam et Orientem tent- 
bat, Cleopatram Reginam JEgypti duxit 
uxorem. Eut. 

Observation II. — If the antecedent be 
governed by another word, the inserted rela- 
tive clause, printed in italics, must be passed 
over, and not taken till you can construe the 
antecedent. 

1. Camillus Volscorum civitatem, qua 
per septuaginta annos helium gesserat, vicit. 

Eut. 

2. Hoc quoque sit Attici bonitatis exem- 
plum, quod cum Gellio Canio, quern pue- 
rum in ludo cognovtrat, adeo conjuncte vixit, 
ut ad extremam aetatem amicitia eorum ere- 
verit. Nep. 

3. Deus omnium rerum, quas natura de- 

2. Quod adeo conjuncte vixit cum Gellio Canio, quern 
cognoverat puerum in ludo, at school, &c. 



If the relative refer to a word governed by a verb, 
where are the relative and its clause to be construed ? 



66 

siderat, abundantiam et copiam nobis sup- 
peditat. Cic. 

4. Miltiades cseteras instil as, quce Cycla- 
des nominantur, sub Atheniensium redegit 
potestatem. Nep. 

5. Cimon testatum suffrages, quod illi 
Ostracismum vocant, decern annorum exilio 
mulctatus est. Nep. 

6. Homines, qucefacere ipsi nbn possunt, 
in altero rect& fi£ri judicant. Cic. 

7. Festinare nocet, nocet et cunctatio 

saep& : 
Tempore qaceque suo qui facit, ille sapit. 

Ov. 

8. Meos amicos, in quibus est studium, 
jubeo, ut a fontibus potius hauriant, quam 
rivtilos consectentur. Cic. 

5. Cimon mulctatus est exilio decern annorum suffragiis 
testarum, quod illi vocant ostracismum. Ostracismum 
was so called, from the custom of the Athenians writ- 
ing on shells the name of the person they wished to be 
banished. They cast these shells into an urn provided 
for the purpose. If the number of shells amounted to 
6,000, the suspected citizen was banished from Athens 
for ten years, but his property was not confiscated. 
6. Homines judicant {negotia) fieri recti in altero, quce 
(negotia) ipsi non possunt facer e. 7« Me qui facit qu&- 
que (negotia) suo tempore, sapit. 



In example 4, and 6, what is the antecedent? 
What case is it ? Why f 



67 



Observation III. — Another clause is some- 
times inserted within the relative clause. 
This inserted clause, here printed in italics, 
is construed by Rule V. 

1. Responsum est a senatu, eos cives non 
esse necessarios, qui, cum armati essent, 
capi potuissent. Eut. 

2. Turn Pyrrhus, admirans Fabricium, 
dixisse fertur : " Ille est Fabricius, qui diffi- 
cilius ab honestate, quam sol a cursu suo, 
averti potest." Eut. 

3. Lucius Quintius Cincinnatus dictator 
est factus ; qui, agrum quatuor jugerum 
possidetis, manibus suis colebat. Eut. 

4. Est profecto deus, qui, quce nos geri- 
mus, auditque et videt. Plant. 

1. The relative clause, qui capi potuissent, admits of 
cum armati essent after the relative. 2. The relative 
clause, qui difficilius ab honestate averti potest, has a 
clause inserted within it, which must be construed by 
Rule V. 4. Profectb deus est, qui et videt que audit 
(negotia) qua nos gerimus. These sentences should 
be first construed without the clause inserted within the 
relative clause. 



May not a clause be inserted within the relative clause ? 
Which is the relative clause ? Which is the clause in- 
serted within it ? 

Which is the antecedent ? What case is it ? 



68 

5. Ira furor brevis est ; animum rege, qui, 
nisi par et, imperet. Hor. 



THE AMPLIFICATION OF COMPOUND SEN- 
TENCES. 

Compound sentences are amplified by the 
addition of clauses, as simple sentences are 
by words. 

1. Datames Thyum agebat. 

2. Datames, agresti amiciilo circumdatus, 
Thyum agebat. 

3. Datames, agresti duplicique amiciilo 
circumdatus, Thyum agebat. 

4. Datames, agresti duplicique amiculo 
circumdatus, hirtaque tmiicd } Thyum agebat. 

5. Datames, agresti duplicique amiculo cir- 
cumdatus, hirtaque tunica, gerens in capite 
galeam venatoriam, Thyum agebat. 

6. Datames, agresti duplicique amiculo 
circumdatus, hirtaque tunica, gerens in ca- 
pite galeam venatoriam, dextrd manu cla- 
vam, Thyum agebat. 

7. Datames, agresti duplicique amiculo 
circumdatus, hirtaque tunica, gerens in ca- 
pite galeam venatoriam, dextra manu clavam, 
sinistra copulam, Thyum agebat, 



69 

8. Datames, agresti duplicique amiciilo 
circumdatus, hirtaque tunica, gerens in ca- 
pite galeam venatoriam, dextra manu clavam, 
sinistra coptilam, qua vinctum ante se Thyum 
agebat. , 

9. Datames, agresti duplicique amiculo 
circumdatus, hirtaque tunica, gerens in capite 
galeam venatoriam, dextra manu clavam, 
sinistra coptilam, qua vinctum ante se Thyum 
agebat, ut si Jeram bestiam captam duceret. 

Nep. 



1. Mardonius fugatus est. 

2. Mardonius, satrapes regius, fugatus est. 

3. Mardonius, satrapes regius, natione 
Medus, fugatus est. 

4. Mardonius, satrapes regius, natione 
Medus, regis gener, fugatus est. 

5. Mardonius, satrapes regius, natione 
Medus, regis gener, in primis omnium Per- 
sarum, fugatus est, 

6. Mardonius, satrapes regius, nati5ne 
Medus, regis gener, in primis omnium Per- 
sarum, et manufortis, fugatus est. 

5. In primis, amongst the chief. 6. Manu fortis, 
brave in action. 



70 

7. Mardonius, satrapes regius, natione 
Medus, regis gener, in primis omnium Per- 
sarum, et manu fortis, et consilii plenus, fu- 
gatus est. 

8. Mardonius, satrapes regius, natione 
Medus, regis gener, in primis omnium Per- 
sarum, et manu fortis, et consilii plenus, 
cum ducentis miltibus peditum, fugatus est. 

9. Mardonius, satrapes regius, natione 
Medus, regis gener, in primis omnium Per- 
sarum, et manu fortis, et consilii plenus, 
cum ducentis millibus peditum, quos viritim 
legerat, fugatus est. 

10. Mardonius, satrapes regius, natione 
Medus, regis gener, in primis omnium Per- 
sarum, et manu fortis, et consilii plenus, cum 
ducentis millibus peditum, quos viritim lege- 
rat, et viginti millibus eqmtum, fugatus est. 

11. Mardonius, satrapes regius, natione 
Medus, regis gener, in primis omnium Per- 
sarum, et manu fortis, et consilii plenus, cum 
ducentis millibus peditum, quos viritim lege- 
rat, et viginti millibus equitum, haud ita 
magna manu Grcecid, fugatus est. 

7. Consilu, of good sense. 11. Fugatus est GrcEcid, 
was driven from Greece, haud ita magna manu, by 
not near so great an enemy. 



71 

When two clauses are placed at the begin- 
ning , and one at the end, the whole sentence 
will he, 

Illustrissimum est prselium Pausaniae apud 
Platseas ; namque, illo duce, Mardonius, sa- 
trapes regius, natione Medus, regis gener, in 
primis omnium Persarum, et manu fortis, et 
consilii plenus, cum ducentis millibus pedi- 
tum, quos viritim legerat, et viginti millibus 
equitum, haud ita magnS, manu Grsecia, fu- 
gatus est; eSque ipse dux cecidit praelio. 

Nep. 

1. Romanum imperium a Romulo exor- 
dium habet. 

2. Romanum imperium, quo ah exordio 
ullum fere minus humana potest memoria 
recordari, a Romulo exordium habet. 

3. Romanum imperium, quo rieque ab ex- 
ordio ullum fere miniis, neque incrementis 
toto orhe amplius, humana potest memoria 
recordari, a Romulo exordium habet 

This is the Jirst member of the sentence 
which is connected with the following by the 
relative qui. 

1. Qui cum Remo fratre uno partu editus 
est. 



72 

2. Qui, quantum putatus est, cum Remo 
fratre uno partu editus est. 

3. Qui, Vestalis virginis JiUus, quantum 
putatus est, cum Remo fratre uno partu 
editus est. 

4. Qui, Vestalis virginis filius et, quantum 
putatus est, Martis> cum Remo fratre uno 
partu editus est. 

The whole sentence together is — 

Romanum imperium, quo neque ab exor- 
dio ullum fere minus, neque incrementis toto 
orbe amplius, humana potest memoria recor- 
dari, a Romtilo exordium habet ; qui, Ves- 
talis virginis filius et, quantum putatus est, 
Martis, cum Remo fratre uno partu editus 
est. Eut. 

1. Cum, antiquitate generis, unus # om- 
nium maxime floreret ; 

2. Cum, et antiquitate generis, et gloria 
majorum, unus omnium maxime floreret ; 

3. Cum, et antiquitate generis, et gloria 
majorum, et sud modestid, unus omnium 
maxime floreret ; 



* The punctuation of the very correct edition of " Nepos," 
by the Rev. C. Bradley, is here adopted. Miltiades, Cimonis 
filius, Atheniensis, is a complete sentence ; and unus agrees 
with Miltiades understood. 



73 



Here the first member of the sentence 
ends: it is joined with the following by the 
conjunction que. 

1. Ut de eo bene sperare cives possent 
sui. 

2. Ut nbn jam solum de eo bene sperare, 
sed etiam confidere, cives possent sui. 

3. Edque esset cetate, ut non jam solum 
de eobene sperare, sed etiam confidere, cives 
possent sui. 

4. Eaque esset setate, ut non jkm solum 
de eo bene sperare, sed etiam confidere, cives 
possent sui, talemfuturum, qualem cognitum 
judicarunt ; 

The third member is not so involved as the 
two preceding members^ 

1. Accidit, ut Athenienses Chersonesum 
colonos vellent mittere. 

The three members together, with tlie in- 
troductory sentence, will stand thus : — 

Miltiades, Cimonis filius, Atheniensis. 



74 

Cum, et antiquitate generis, et gloria ma- 
jorum, et sua modestia, unus omnium maxi- 
me floreret ; eaque esset aetate, ut non jam 
solum de eo bene sperare, sed etiam confi- 
dere cives possent sui, talem futurum, qua- 
lem cognitum judicarunt ; accidit, ut Athe- 
nienses Chersonesum colonos vellent mittere. 

Nep. Mil 



The Rules for construing a Compound Sentence are 
reduced to the following 

GENERAL RULE. 

First i take the vocative cases with some interjec- 
tions and adverbs. Then the nominative cases and 
words in apposition, with the relative or any other in- 
serted clause, depending on the nominative case. 

Then, the verb or verbs, with adverbs, infinitive 
moods, &c. 

After the verb, the words governed by it, and the 
words in apposition, with relative or other inserted 
clauses depending on the word governed by the verb. 



Is e in modestia, a in maxime, i in gloria, omnium 
and mittere, long or short? Why? Where is the ac- 
cent in modestia, maxime, gloria, &c. ? Why ? Where 
in sua, esset, solum, &c ? Why ? 



CHAPTER III. 



MISCELLANEOUS EXTRACTS. 

Of Gaul. 

Gallia 1 est omnis divisa in partes tres : 
quarum 2 unam inc51unt Beiges ; aliam Aqui- 
tani s ; tertiam 4 , qui lingua nostra Galli ap- 
pellantur. Hi omnes lingua, institutes 5 , le- 
gibus inter se differunt. Gallos ab Aquita- 
nis Garumna flumen 6 , a Belgis Matrona et 
Sequana dividit. — Una 7 pars, quam Gallos 

1. 0?nnis Gallia, all Gaul, or France, divisa est, &c. 

2. Quarum (partium) Beiges incolunt unam (partem). 

3. Aquitani (incolunt) aliam (partem). 4. (Incolunt), 
they inhabit, tertiam (partem) qui appellantur Galli 
nostra lingua. 5. This sentence is very clear, et is un- 
derstood before legibus. 6. Dividit is understood (see 
Note 3, page 50), after Garumna jlumen, the river 
Garonne. 7- Una pars quam (partem) dictum est, it 
has been said, Gallos that the Gauls, obtinere, possess 
(or inhabit), &c. 



What was France called by the Romans ? Into how 
many parts was it divided ? Name the parts. In what 
did they differ ? 

e 2 



76 

obtinere dictum est, initium capit a flumine 
Rhodano; continetur 8 Garumna flumine, 
Oceano, finibus Belgarum. — Belgce ab ex- 
tremis Galliae finibus oriuntur ; pertinent 9 ad 
inferiorem partem fluminis Rheni. — Aqui- 
tania a Garumna flumine ad Pyrenaeos mon- 
tes pertinet. Cces. 

8. Continetur, it is bounded, Garumna, &c. 9. 
(Belgce) pertinent, reach. 

Alexander and Diogenes. 

Diogenes 1 Alexandre* roganti, ut diceret 
si quid sibi opus esset, " Nunc quidem pau- 

1. Alexander was the son of Philip king of Macedon. 
Diogenes, a cynic philosopher, was born in Pontus 
about 414 years before Christ. He was very austere 
in his life, and is said to have taken up his residence in 
a tub. 

After the nominative case Diogenes, you look for its 
verb : it cannot be diceret, because that belongs to the 
clause, ut diceret si quid sibi opus esset, which must be 
taken together. You look forward in the sentence, 
and find inquit, which, not agreeing with any nomina- 
tive case in the clause where it is placed, is the verb 
agreeing with Diogenes. Therefore, to find the prin- 
cipal verb in the sentence, is only to pass over every 
clause which has a nominative case and verb in it, till 
you come to the verb belonging to the first nominative 



How was the province bounded which the Galli in- 
habited? What were the boundaries of the Belgce? 
What was the extent of Aquitania ? 

Who was Alexander ? Diogenes ? How did he 
live ? What did he say to Alexander ? 



77 

liilum," inquit, "a sole absis." Offecerat 
videlicet 2 apricanti. Et hie quidem dispu- 
tare solebat, quanto regem Persarum vita 
fortunaque superaret. Sibi 3 nihil deesse; 
illi nihil satis unquam fore. Cic. Tus. 

case. You then say, Diogenes inquit, said, Alexandra 
roganti, to Alexander asking* (him), ut diceret, that he 
would say (or to say), si quid esset opus, &c. 2. Vi- 
delicet, it appears, offecerat, &c. 3. Sibi, to himself 
(Diogenes); illi, to him (Darius, king of Persia). 

The Temperance of the Lacedczmonians. 

Dionysius 1 negavit se jure illo nigro, quod 
ccenae caput erat, delectatum, Turn is 2 , qui 
coxerat; "minime mirum, condimenta enim 
defuerunt." Quae tandem 3 , inquit ille ? 
" Labor, sudor, cursus, fames, sitis ; his 
enim rebus Lacedaemoniorum eptilse condi- 
untur." Persarum a Xenophonte victus ex- 
ponitur 4 , quos negat ad panem adhibere 
quidquam praeter nasturtium. Cic. 

1. Dionysius negavit se, that he, delectatum, was 
pleased, illo jure nigro ; then construe the inserted re- 
lative clause, quod camce, &c, which was passed over 
according to Observation II, page 65. 2. Inquit, he 
said, is understood after is, by Note 3, page 50. 3. 
Tandem, I pray you. 4. Exponitur, is described. 



For what were the Lacedsemonians remarkable? 
What is the best seasoning for food? What did they 
use instead of bread ? 



78 

Titus Pomponius Atficus. 
Atticus patre usus est 1 diligente, indul- 
gente, et, ut turn erant tempora, diti, impri- 
misque studioso literarum. Hie 2 , prout ipse 
amabat literas, omnibus doctrinis, quibus 
puerilis setas impertiri debet, filium erudivit. 
Erat autem in puero, prater docilitatem in- 
genii, summa suavitas oris ac vocis, ut non 
solum celerit&r acciperet, quae tradebantur, 
sed etiam excellenter pronuntiaret ; qua ex 
re in pueritia 3 nobilis inter eequales ferebatur, 

1. Usus est, had, diligente, a kind, indulgente, et, ut turn 
tempora erant, diti patre. These adjectives all belong to 
the substantive patre, and are to be construed before it, 
fey Rule IV, p. 19, and Rule II, p. 45. They are con- 
strued like accusative cases without any sign. See 
Introduction to Latin Construing, page 91. 'Hue im- 
primis studioso, and particularly fond. 2. Hie, he, the 
father of Atticus, &c. In this sentence there are two 
inserted clauses ; one of which is to be taken before the 
verb erudivit, and the other after it. See Observa- 
tion II, p. 65. Hie is known to be the nominative case 
to erudivit, because in looking forward to the following 
clauses, each clause has a nominative case and verb, till 
we come to erudivit, which has no nominative ; hie 
is therefore the nominative case to the principal 
verb erudivit. The sentence is then construed, 
Hie, prout ipse amabat literas, erudivit filium o?nni- 
bus doctrinis ; then the inserted relative clause, 
quibus puerilis cetas debet, &c. 3. Ferebatur, he was 
considered, nobilis, famous, in pueritia, in childhood. 



Of what was the father of Atticus fond ? Did he in- 
struct his son ? In what ? For what was Atticus re- 
markable ? 



79 

clariusque explendescebat, quam generosi 4 
condisciptili ammo 5 aequo ferre possent ; ita- 
que incitabat omnes studio suo. Nep. 

4. Generosi condiscipuli, his high-spirited school- 
fellows. 5. Animo aequo, without emulation. 

Anacharsis the Scythian. 

An 1 Scythes Anacharsis potuit pro nihilo 
pecuniam ducere ; nostrates philosophi facere 
non poterunt ? Illius epistola fertur his ver- 
bis : " Anacharsis Hannoni salutem 2 . Mihi 
amictus est Scythicum tegmen ; calceamen- 
tum, solorum callum ; cubile, terra ; pulpa- 
mentum, fames ; lacte, caseo, carne vescor. 
Quare 3 ut ad quietum me licet venias. Mu- 
nera 4 autem ista, quibus es delectatus, vel 
civibus tuis, vel diis immortalibus dona." 

Cic. 

I. An Anacharsis Scythes potuit, was Anacharsis the 
Scythian able, ducere, to esteem. 2. Salutem is governed 
by mittit, or some other verb understood. 3. Quare, 
wherefore, licet ut venias ad me, to me, quietum, 
at leisure. 4. Munera ista may be the nominative or 
the accusative plural. It cannot be the nominative, 
because there is no plural verb to agree with it. Mu- 
nera is, therefore, the accusative governed by dona, 
give thou. 



Who was Anacharsis ? To whom did he write ? What 
was the clothing of Anacharsis ? Shoes ? Bed, &c. ? 



80 
A Letter from Pliny. 

CAIUS PLINIUS (1) FABIO JUSTO SUO 

Salutem. 

Olim nullas mihi epistolas mittis. " Nihil 
est," inquis, " quod scribam." At hoc ipsum 
scribe, nihil 1 esse quod scribas : vel 2 solum 
illud, unde incipere priores 3 solebant, Si 
vales, benk est ; ego valeo. Hoc mihi suff li- 
cit ; est enim maximum. Ludere me putas : 
Serio peto 4 . Fac sciam 5 quid agas : quod 

1. Caius Caecilius Plinius Secundus, surnamed the younger, 
was the nephew of Pliny the elder, who wrote the Natural 
History, and adopted Pliny the younger for his son and heir. 
Caecilius Plinius was one of the most polite gentlemen and 
writers of the age in which he lived. He was in so great 
esteem with Trajan, that this prince promoted him to the 
highest offices in the state. He was governor of Bithynia in 
Syria, and, at a time when Trajan had sent instructions to 
persecute the Christians of his province, he wrote to the Em- 
peror in their favour, on which account the persecution 
ceased. His Epistles are written with great purity and ele- 
gance, and the reader everywhere discovers that affability, 
condescension, and philanthropy, which so strikingly marked 
the advocate of the Christians. These letters are esteemed 
by some equal to the voluminous epistles of Cicero. He was 
born at Novo Comum in Italy, and died, in the 52d year of his 
age, about A.D. 113. 

1. Esse, that there is, nihil quod scribas. 2. Vel 
(scribe) illud solum. 3. Priores, ancestors. 4. Serio 
peto, I am serious, or Believe me, I am in earnest. 5. 
Fac, take care (ut) sciam, that I may know, or inform 
me, quid agas. 



Who was Pliny? In what age did he live? With 
whom was he in favour ? To whom did he write ? What 
was the result of his writing to the Emperor Trajan ? 
Where was Pliny the younger born, and when did he die ? 



81 

sine solicitudine summa nescire non possum. 
Vale. 

On Homer. 

Traditum est Homerum caecum fuisse. 
At quae regio, quae ora, qui locus Graeciae, 
quae species formae, quae pugna, quae acies, 
quod remigium, qui motus hominum, qui 1 
ferarum non ita expictus est, ut, quae 2 ipse 
non viderit, nos ut videremus effecerit? Quid 3 
ergo aut Homero ad delectationem animi, ac 
voluptatem, aut cuiquam docto, defuisse un- 
quam arbitramur ? Cic. 

1. 2ui (motusj ferarum, &c. 2. The inserted rela- 
tive clause, quce ipse, &c. is not taken till the other 
clause, tit effecerit nos ut videremus, is construed. (See 
Observation II, page 65). 3. Quid ergo arbitramur, 
&c. what, therefore, do we think, &c. 

Knowledge of Ourselves. 

Cum, " NOSCE TE," dicit Apollo, hoc 
dicit, Nosce animum tuum : nam corpus qui- 
dem quasi vas est, aut aliquod animi recep- 
tactilum. Ab animo tuo quidquid agitur, id 
agitur a te. Cic, 



Was Homer blind ? What did he describe ? Had not 
he much pleasure ? Have not all learned men ? 

What did Apollo say? What is the meaning of 
8 Know thyself?" What is the body ? 

e5 



§2 



Description of the Britons. 

Britanni frumenta non serunt, sed lacte et 
carne vivunt : pellibusque sunt vestiti. Ora- 
nes verb se Britanni vitro inficiunt, quod cae- 
ruleum efFicit colorem ; atque hoc horribi- 
lidre sunt in pugna adspectu : capilloque 
sunt promisso ; atque omni parte corporis 
rasa, prseter caput et labrum superius. Cces. 

Of Britain. 

In Britannia hominum est infinita multi- 
tudo ; pecoris magnus numerus. Utuntur 
aut sere, aut annulis ferreis ad certum pondus 
examinatis, pro nummo. Nascitur ibi plum- 
bum 1 album in mediterraneis regionibus, in 
maritimis ferrum 2 : sed ejus exigua est copia. 
LepSrem et gallinam, et anserem gustare fas 
non putant. Hsec tamen alunt ? animi volup- 

1. Plumbum album, lead of a white colour, or tin. 
2. Nascitur is understood after ferrum. 



Did the ancient Britons sow corn ? On what did they 
live ? How were they clothed ? What colour did they 
stain their bodies ? With what ? Why ? How did they 
wear their hair ? What part did they leave unshaved ? 
Were the ancient Britons numerous ? What substi- 
tute had they for money ? What did Britain produce ? 
What did they think it unlawful to eat ? Why did they 
keep them ? 



83 

tatisque causa. Loca sunt temperati5ra 5 
qukm in Gallia ; remissioribus frigonbus. 

Cces. 

The Inhabitants of Gaul or France. 

In omni Gallia, eorum hominum, qui 1 all- 
quo sunt numero atque honore, genera sunt 
duo : alteram est Druidum ; alt&rum Equi- 
tum. 

DruKdes rebus divlnis intersunt, sacrificia 
publica ac privata procurant, religi5nes 2 in- 
terpretantur. Ad hos magnus adolescentium 
numerus, discipline causa, concurrit. Non- 
nulli annos vicenos in disciplina permanent. 
Neque fas esse existimant, ea Uteris man- 
dare: quod neque in vulgus disciplmam 
efferri velint ; neque 3 eos, qui discunt, Uteris 
confisos, minus memorise studere: quod fere 
plerisque acddit, ut prsesidio 4 literarum, di- 

1. This inserted relative clause must not be con- 
strued till its antecedent hominum, &c. and the word 
on which hominum depends, have been taken. See Ob- 
servation 11, page 65. 2. Interpretantur religiones they 
explain their superstitions. 3. Neque, nor, eos, that 
those, qui discunt — , confisos, trusting, Uteris, to writ- 
ing, minus studere memories * 4. Prcesidio, by the as- 



What were the chief orders of men in Gaul ? What 
was the office of the Druids? How long did some 
pupils remain under instruction? Did they commit 
their doctrines to writing ? Why ? 



84 

ligentiam in perdiscendo, ac memoriam re- 
mittant In primis hoc volunt persuadere : 
non interire animas^ sed ab aliis post mortem 
transire ad alios. 

Alterum genus, est Equitum. Ii 5 , quum 
est usus, atque aliquod bellum incidit, omnes 
in bello versantur. Atque 6 e5rum ut quis* 
que est genere copiisqne amplissfrnus ; ita 
plurimos circum se ambactos 7 clientesque 
habet. Cces. 

sistance, literarum, of writing, remittant diligentiam ac 
memoriam in perdiscendo. 5. Ii omnes, are known to be 
the nominative ease to the verb versantur, because 
both the other clauses have verbs agreeing with their 
respective nominatives. 6. Atque ut quisque eorum est 
amplissimus genere, &c. 7- Atnbact-us, i, a retainer, or a 
superior military attendant. 

Superstition of the Gauls. 

Natio est omnis Gallorum admodum dedita 
religionibus 1 . Atque ob earn causam qui 
sunt affecti gravionbus morbis ; aut pro vie- 
ttmis homines immolant, aut se immolaturos 
vovent. Administrisque ad ea sacrificia Drui- 

" . Religionibus, to superstitions. 



What did they particularly teach ? Which was the 
other order of men ? What was their employ ? 

To what were the Gauls addicted ? Did they sacri- 
fice human victims ? Who officiated in these sacrifices ? 



85 

dibus utuntur. Alii immani magmitudine 
simulacra habent ; quorum contexta vimini- 
bus membra, vivis hominibus complent ; qui- 
bus succensis, circumventi flamma, exani- 
mantur homines. Supplicia eorum, qui in 
furto, aut latrocinio, aut aliqua noxa sint 
comprehensi, gratiora diis immortalibus esse 
arbitrantur ; sed quum ejus generis copia de- 
ficit, etiam ad innocentium supplicia descen- 
dunt. Deum maxime Mercurium colunt 2 : 
hujus sunt plurima simulacra : hunc omnium 
inventorem artium ferunt: hunc viarum at- 
que itinerum ducem : hunc ad qusestus pecu- 
niae mercaturasque habere vim maximam ar- 
bitrantur. Post hunc 3 , Apollinem, et Mar- 
tem, et Jovem, et Minervam. De his ean- 
dem fer&, quam reliquse gentes, habent opi- 
nionem : Apollinem morbos depellere ; Mi- 
nervam operum atque artificiorum initia 
transdere; Jovem imperium caelestium te- 
nere ; Martem bella regere. Cces. 

2. Colunt, they worship. 3. Hunc, Mercury governed 
by ferunt understood. 



Describe the manner in which the victims were 
burned. What was the name of their chief god ? Whom 
did the Gauls consider as the inventor of arts ? What 
god did they hold in esteem next to Mercury ? Over 
what is Apollo said to preside ? What Minerva ? What 
Japiter ? Mars ? 



86 



The Battle of Marathon. 

Darius 1 autem, cum ex Europa in Aslam 
redisset, hortantibus amicis, ut Graeciam in 
suam redigeret potestatem, classem quingen- 
tarum navium comparavit, eique Datim prae- 
fecit, et Artaphernem ; hisque 2 ducenta pe- 
ditum millia, et decern equitum dedit. Prae- 
fecti 3 regii, classe ad Euboeam 4 appulsa, 
celerit&r Eretriam 5 ceperunt; omnesque ejus 
gentis cives, abreptos in Asiam, ad regem 
miserunt. 

Ind& ad Attfcam 6 accesserunt, ac suas 
copias in campum Marathona" deduxerunt. 

1. Darius, king of Persia. Darius is the nomina- 
tive case to comparavit, which is not construed till the 
three intervening clauses are construed according^ to 
preceding Rules. Me, he (Darius), is the nominative 
case understood to all the verbs in that member of the 
sentence. 2. Hue, and, dedit, he (Darius) gave. 3. 
Attention should be paid to the inserted clauses in this 
sentence. 4. Euboeam, Eubcea, a large island in the 
jEgean sea. 5. Eretriam, Eretria, a town in the is- 
land of Euboea. 6. Atticam, Attica, a country of 
Greece. 7- Marathona (the Greek accusative case), 



Who was Darius ? What fleet did he fit out ? What 
was the number of horse ? Of the foGt ? To whom 
did he give the command? To what part did they 
sail ? Where is Eubcea ? What town did they take ? 
In what plain did the Persians draw up their army ? 
Where is Marathon ? 



87 

Is 8 abest ab oppi'do circiter millia passuum 
decern. Hoc tumultu, Athenienses 9 , tarn 
propinquo tamque magno permoti, auxilium 
nusquam, nisi a Lacedaemoniis 10 , petiverunt. 
Domi autem creati decern praetores, qui ex- 
ercitui prseessent ; in eis, Miltiades. Hoc in 
tempore, nulla civitas Atheniensibus auxilio 
fuit prseter Plateeenses : ea mille misit mili- 
tum. Itaque horum adventu, decern millia 
armatorum completa sunt, qua3 manus mira- 
bili flagrabat pugnandi cupiditate. 

Deinde postero die sub montis radicibus, 
acie e regione instructa, nova arte, vi summa 
praelium commiserunt. Namque arbores 
multis locis erant stratee, hoc consilio, ut et 
montium tegerentur altitudine, et arborum 
tractu 11 equitatus hostium impediretur, ne 
multitudine clauderentur. Datis, etsi non 

of Marathon, a village in Attica. 8. Is, that (plain). 
9. Athenienses, the inhabitants of Athens, the most 
celebrated city of Greece. 10. Lacedatmoniis, the in- 
habitants of Lacedsemon, or Sparta, in Greece. 11. 
Tractu arborum, by the laying of trees. 



Who were the Athenians ? Who was chosen their 
general ? Who assisted the Athenians ? Who were 
the Lacedsemonians ? Point out Marathon, Athens, 
and Lacedsemon on the map. How many men had the 
Athenians? What scheme did the Athenians adopt to 
prevent the Persians surrounding them ? 



88 

locum aequum videbat suis, tamen fretus 
numero copiarum suarum, confligere cupie- 
bat ; edque magis, quod, priusquam Lace- 
doemonii subsidio venirent, dimicare utile 
arbitrabatur. 

Itaque in aciem peditum centum, equitum 
decern millia produxit, praeliumque commisit. 
In quo tanto plus virtute valuerunt Athe- 
nienses, ut decemplicem numerum hostium 
profligarent, adeoque perterruerunt, ut Persae 
non castra, sed naves, peterent. Qua pugna 
nihil adhuc est nobilius ; nulla enim unquam 
tarn exigua manus tantas opes prostravit. 

Nep. 
Introduction to Sal lust. 

Omnis 1 homines, qui sese student prae- 
stare cseteris animalfbus, summa ope niti de- 

1. Salhist, a Roman historian, was born at Anritur- 
num in Italy. He died about thirty-four years be- 
fore Christ. Omnis is put for omnes, the accusative 
case plural. Omnis, or omnes homines, is either the 
nominative or accusative plural ; the construction of 
the sentence must determine. Homines, here, is evi- 
dently the accusative governed by decet. After Decet 
omnis homines, you take the relative clause, qui sese 



How many soldiers did Datis lead to battle ? What 
number of the enemy did the Athenians rout ? To 
what place did the Persians retreat ? 

Who was Sallust ? Where was he born ? What ought 



89 

cet, ne vitam silentio transeant 2 , veliiti pecora, 
quae natura prona, atque ventri obedientia 
finxit. Sed nostra omnis vis in ammo et cor- 
pore sita est : animi imperio 3 , corporis ser- 
vitio magis utimur : alterum nobis cum dis, 
alterum cum belluis commune est. 4 Quo 
mihi rectius videtur, ingenii, qukm virium 
opibus gloriam quaerere; et quoniam vita 
ipsa, qua fruimur, brevis est, memoriam nos- 
tri quam maxume longam 5 efficere. Nam 
divitiarum et formae gloria, fluxa atque fra- 
gilis est; virtus clara, aeternaque habetur. 

Sal. 



student, &c. See Observation II, p. 65. Then niti 
summd ope. 2. Ne transeant, that they should not 
pass, &c. 3. Magis utimur, we generally employ, 
imperio, the authority, rule, or power, animi, of the 
mind {et, and), servitio, the service, corporis. 4. 2nd, 
for which cause, or wherefore, videtur rectius mihi 
qucerere gloriam opibus, by the power, ingenii quam, 
than, virium, of strength. 5. Videtur rectius is under- 
stood before efficere, to make, memoriam nostri, our 
memory, quam maxume longam, as lasting as possible. 
Maxume is put for maxime. 



man to do ? After what do cattle seek ? In what is 
our ability seated ? What have we in common with 
the brutes? What with God? What is the conclu- 
sion? What should we do, since life is short? What 
is fleeting ? What is durable ? 



90 



Pliny's 1 Account of the Primitive Christians. 

CAIUS PLINIUS TRAJANO IMPERATORI 

Salutem. 

Christian! affirmabant, hanc fuisse sum- 
mam vel culpse suae, vel erroris, quod essent 
soliti state die ante lucem convenire : car- 
menquc 2 Christo, quasi Deo, dicere secum 
invicem ; seque 3 sacramento non in scelus 
aliquod obstringere, sed ne furta, ne latroci- 
nia, ne adulteria committerent, ne fidem falle- 
rent, ne depositum appellati abnegarent : 
quibus peractis morem sibidiscedendi fuisse, 
rursusque coeundi ad capiendum cibum, pro- 
miscuum tamen, et innoxium : quod ipsum 
facere desisse post edictum meum, quo se- 
cundum mandata tua hetserias esse vetueram. 
Quo magis necessariam credidi, ex duabus 
ancillisj quae ministrae 4 dicebantur, quid esset 

1. For an account of Pliny, see page 80, note 1. 
2. Que, and (soliti essent, they were accustomed), dicere 
invicem secum carmen Christo, &c. 3. Que (soliti essent J 
non obstringere se sacramento in aliquod scelus, sed ne~ 
committerent, &c. 4. These females, like Phoebe ; most 



Who was Pliny ? At what time did he live ? What 
did the first Christians say to Pliny about themselves ? 
How did they worship Christ ? Why did they bind them- 
selves by an oath? Did they obey the edict of Pliny? 
Were two females put to the rack? Did Christianity 



91 

veri et per tormenta quserere. Sed nihil 
aliud inveni, quam superstitionem pravam et 
immodicam, ideoque, dilata cognitione, ad 
consulendum te decurri. Visa est enim mihi 
res digna consultatione, maxime propter peri- 
clitantium numerum. Multi enim omnis 
aetatis, omnis ordinis, utriusque sexus etiam, 
vocantur in periculum, et vocabuntur. Neque 
enim civitates tantum, sed vicos etiam atque 
agros superstitionis istius contagio pervagata 
est. Plin. 

probably not only attended to the poor and sick, but to 
all the females who came to worship God. 

A Scene from Terence 1 . 

SPEAKERS. 
Demea, an old man, and father to JEschinus. 
iEschmus, a youth, son of Demea. 
Syrus, servant to JEschinus. 
Micio, an old man, brother to Demea, 

Sy. Factum est, quod jussisti, Demea. 

1 . Terence was a native of Carthage in Africa ; he 
was celebrated for his comedies, and is said to have died 
about 159 years before the Christian sera. Begin with 



spread when its professors were persecuted ? Did it 
extend to villages as well as towns ? 

Where was Terence born ? At what time is he said 
to have died ? 



92 

De. Frugi homo es 2 . Ego 8 hodie, mea 
quidem sententia, judico, Syrum fieri, esse 
sequum, liberum ? 

Mi. Istunc liberum? quodnam ob factum ? 

De. Multa 4 . 

Sy. O noster Demea, vir bonus est : ego 
istos vobis usque a puSris curavi ambos se- 
dulo ; docui, monui, bene praecepi semper, 
quae potui, omnia. 

De. Res apparet. 

Sy. O lepidum 6 caput ! 

De. Prodesse aequum est : alii meliores 
erunt. Postremo hie 6 vult fieri. 

ML Visne tu hoc fieri ? 

JEs. Cupio. 

Mi. Si quidem tu vis ; Syre eho, accede 
hue ad me, liber esto. 

Sy. Bene facis. Omnibus gratiam habeo 7 , 
et seorsum tibi prseterea, Demea. 

De. Gaudeo. 

Ms. Et ego, 

Sy. Credo. Utinam 8 hoc perpetuum fiat 

the vocative case Demea. 2. Es frugi homo. 3. Ego 
judico hodie, mea sententia quidem, esse, that it is, cequum, 
Syrum fieri liberum. 4. (Ob) multa (facta). 5. le- 
pidum caput ! O charming fellow ! 6. Hie (Mschinus) 
vult, wishes it, fieri, to be done. 7« Habeo, I give, 
gratiam, my acknowledgement or thanks, omnibus, to all, 
et pr&terea tibi seorsum, Demea. 8. Utinam hoc gau- 



93 

gaudium, Phrygiam ut ux5rem meam una 
mecum videam liberam. 

De. Optimam quidem mulierem, a me 9 
argentum, quanti est, sumito. 

Sy. Dii 10 tibi, Demea, omnes semper om- 
nia optata offerant. 

Mi. Syre, processisti hodie pulchre. 

De. Si quidem porro, Micio, tu tuum 
officium facies, atque huic aliquid paululum 
prae manu dederis, unde utatur : reddet tibi 
cito. 

Mi. Istuc vilius. 

JEs. Frugi homo est. 

Sy. Reddam hercle : da modo. 

2Es. Age, pater. 

Mi. Post consiilam 11 . 

De. Faciet. 

Sy. O vir optime. 

2Es. pater mi festivissime. 

Mi. Quid istuc? quae res tarn repente 
mores mutavit tuos ? 

De. Dicam tibi, si voltis 12 , quae vos prop- 
ter adolescentiam minus videtis, magis im- 

dium fiat perpetuum, ut videam meam uxorem Phrygiam 
liberam unh cum me. 9. Sumito argentum a me, quanti 
(pretii) est. 10. Demea, omnes dii, may all the gods, 
semper offer ant omnia optata tibi. 11. Post consulam 
{de hdc re). 12. Voltis for vultis. 



94 

pense cupitis, consulitis parum, haec repre- 
hendere et corrigere me ; ecce me, qui id 
faciam vobis. 

JEs. Tibi, pater, permittimus : plus scis, 
quid facto opus est. 

Ms. Istuc recte 13 . Plaudite 14 . 

Ter. Adel. act. v, sc. 7. 

13. Istdc recti, that is well. 14. Speaking to 
the spectators, he says, Plaudite, clap your hands, 
or give us your applause. 

Of Hope. 

Spes alit agricolas, spes sulcis credit aratis 
Semina, quae magno fcenore reddat ager. 
Haec 1 laqueo volticres, haec captat arundine 
pisces, 
Cum tenues hamos abdidit ante cibus. 
Spes etiam valida solatur compede vinctum. 
Crura sonant ferro, sed canit inter opus. 

Tib. 
1 , Hcec, hope. 

Of Beauty. 

Forma bonum fragile est : quantumque ac- 
cedit ad annos 



To what does hope encourage the farmer ? Birds ? 
Fishes ? What supports a man in bonds ? 



95 

Fit minor, et spatio ! carpitur ipsa suo. 
Nee viol se semper, nee hiantia lilia florent ; 

Et riget amissa spina relicta rosa. 
Et tibi jam cani venient, formose, capilli ; 

Jam venient rugae, quae tibi corpus arent. 
Jam molire 2 animum, qui duret, et adstrue 
formae : 
Solus ad extremos permanet ille rogos. 

Ov. 

1. Spatio suo, by its continuance. 2. Jam molire, 
now cultivate. 

A Storm. 

Me miserum, quanti monies volvuntur aqua- 
rum ! 
Jam jam tacturos sidera summa putes. 
Quantae diducto subsidunt aequore valles ! 

Jam jam tacturos Tartara nigra putes. 
Quocunque aspicias, nihil est nisi pontus et 
aer ; 
Nubibus hie tumidus, fluctibus ille minax. 



Is beauty durable ? How is it destroyed ? What is 
said of the violet ? Rose ? If beauty be so transient, 
what ought you to do ? Why ought you to cultivate 
the mind ? 

In the storm, how high were they raised ? The 
water being removed, how low were they brought? 
What could be only seen ? 



96 

Inter utrumque fremunt immani turbine 
venti. 
Nescit, cui domino pareat, unda maris. 

Ov. 

Of Delay. 

Cur, 

Quae lsedunt oculos, festinas demere ; si 1 

quid 
Est animum, differs curandi tempus in an- 
num ? 
Dimidium facti, qui ccepit, habet. Sapere 2 

aude : 
Incipe. Vivendi recte qui prorogat horam, 
Rusticus 3 expectat dum defluat amnis; at 

ille 4 
Labitur, et labetur in omne volubilis aevum. 

Hot. 

1. Si est quid (quod Icedit) animum, differs, &c. 2. 
Aude, dare, sapere, to be wise : incipe, begin. 3. (Is 
est ut) rusticus, be is like the rustic (qui, who), ex- 
pectat dum, &c. 4. Ille, the river. 



What is said of the wind ? Of the water ? 

Do you not desire to remove any thing which gives 
pain to the eyes? Should you not do so with the 
mind ? When may you be said to have half done ? He 
who puts off reformation is like what? Will the 
rustic's expectation be answered ? Why will it not ? 
Why is he who defers reformation like the rustic ? 



&7 



Introduction to Phcedrus Fables. 

iEsopus 1 auctor, quam 2 , materiam reperit 
Hanc, ego polivi versibus senariis. 
Duplex libelli dos 3 est; quod risum movet, 
Et quod prudenti vitam 4 consilio monet. 
Calumniari si quis autem voluerit, 
Quod arbores loquantur, non tantum ferse, 
Fictis jocari nos meminerit fabulis. Phced. 

1 . Msopus, iEsop, was originally a Phrygian slave. He 
was a most deformed, but very wise man. and obtained his 
freedom on account of his genius. He lived about 500 
years before our Saviour, and excelled in conveying 
instruction by fables, written in Greek prose. Phce- 
drus, a Thracian slave, flourished about A. D. 20, and 
received his freedom from the Emperor Tiberius Ceesar. 
The fables of Pheedrus are distinguished for their sim- 
plicity and elegance. What iEsop had written in Greek 
prose, Phsedrus translated into easy and elegant Latin 
iambic verse. 

Auctor is put in apposition with JEsoj>us, and, there- 
fore, they are construed together. 2. Quam, referring 
to materiam, is taken after it, when the first clause is 
finished ; by Rule V, Observation II, p. 65. The next 
clause is then quam ego polivi versibus sena?iis, in 
verses of six feet. 3. Dos, the use. 4. Monet vitam, 
it directs our conduct. 



Who was iEsop? Phsedrus? Who was the in- 
ventor of these fables ? Who wrote them in Latin 
verse ? What is the use of these fables ? What reason 
does he give for supposing trees and beasts to speak ? 



98 



Brother and Sister. 

Praeeepto 1 monitus, saepe te consid£ra. 
Habebat quidam filiam turpissimam, 
Idemque insigni et pulchra facie filium 2 . 
Hi speculum, in cathedra matris ut positum 

fuit, 
Pueriliter ludentes, forte inspexerant. 
Hie 3 se 4 form5sum jactat ; ilia irascitur, 
Nee gloriantis sustinet fratris jocos, 
Accipiens (quid enim? 5 ) cuncta in contume- 

liam. 
Ergo ad patrem decurrit, laesura G invicem, 
Magnaque invidia criminatur filium, 
Vir 7 natus quod rem foeminarum tetigerit. 
Amplexus ille utrumque, et carpens osctila, 

1. Monitus (hoc) prcecepto, warned by this precept, 
or fable. 2. Filium is governed by habebat understood. 
See Rule II, Note 3, p. 50. 3. Hie, the latter, the 
son. 4. Se, that he (esse). See Rule V, Note 3, 
p. 29. 5. Enim quid? for what else could she do? 
6. LcEsura invicem, to vex him in her turn. 7» Natus 
vir, being born a male. 



What should a person often do who reads this fable ? 
How many children had the person ? Which was the 
handsomer ? With what was the sister vexed ? What 
did she do ? 



99 

Dulcemque in ambos caritatem partiens, 

" Quotidi£," inquit, " spectilo vos uti volo : 

Tu 8 formam ne corrumpas nequitise raalis; 

Tu 9 faciem ut istam monbus vincas bonis." 

Phced. 

8. Tu (fill) you (my son). 9. Tu (filia) you (my 
daughter). 

Introduction to Ovid's 1 Metamorphosis. 

In nova fert animus 3 mutatas dicere formas 
Corpora. Di 3 , coeptis, nam vos mut&stis et 

illas, 
Aspirate meis ; primaque ab origine mundi, 
Ad mea perpetuum deducite 4 tempora car- 
men. 

1. Ovid, a Roman poet, was born at Sulmo, in Italy, 
about forty years before Christ. 2. Animus fert, my 
mind proposes, or, I intend, dicere formas, &c. 3. Di, 
O ye gods, as the vocative case is taken first, then you 
pass over the clause nam vos 9 &c. ; there is no nomina- 
tive case to aspirate; you therefore supply it by a pro- 
noun of the second person, and say, do you favour, 
coeptis meis ; now the next clause, nam vos mutdstis, &c. 
4. Deducite, draw forth, perpetuum carmen, an unin- 



What did the father say to his son ? To his daugh- 
ter ? What may all learn from this fable ? 

Who was Ovid? Where was he born? At what 
time? What does Ovid say in the first sentence? 
Whose assistance does he then invoke ? 

f 2 



100 

Ante mare 5 , et terras, et, quod tegit omnia, 

caelum, 
Unus erat toto naturae vultus in orbe, 
Quern dixere Chaos, rudis indigestaque 

moles ; 
Nee 6 quicquam nisi pondus iners, congestS- 

que eodem 
Non bene junctarum discordiasemina rerum. 
Nullus adhuc mundo praebebat lumina 

Titan r ; 
Nee nova crescendo reparabat cornua Phoebe 7 : 
Nee circumfuso 8 pendebat in aere tellus, 
Ponderibus librata suis ; nee brachia longo 
Margine terrarum porrexfirat 9 Amphitrite ; 

terrupted, &c. 5. Begin with Ante mare, et, &c. ; after 
ccelum, take the inserted relative clause quod tegit 
omnia. After the next clause, take quern, which, dixere, 
they, &c. Rudisque indigesta moles, an unformed and 
confused mass. 6. Having- construed the first member, 
you proceed with this : Nee (erat) quicquam nisi iners 
pondus, que discordia semina rerum nbn bene junctarum 
que eodem congesta. 7« Titan, the sun ; Phoebe, the 
moon. 8. In aere circumfuso, in air surrounding it. 
9. Nee Amphitrite, nor had the sea, porrexerat, &c. 



What was the first appearance of the world ? What 
was it called ? Was there any sun ? What was he 
called ? What name does Ovid give the moon ? 
How was the earth supported ? What was the sea 
called ? 



101 

Quaque fuit tellus, illic et pontus et aer. 

Sic erat instabilis tellus, innabilis 10 unda, 

Lucis egens aer. Nulli sua forma manebat ; 

Obstabatque aliis aliud 11 , quia corpore inuno 

Frigida 11 pugnabant calidis, humentia 12 siccis, 

Mollia cum duris, sine pondere habentia 

pondus. Ov. 

Que and quh, where, fuit tellus, illic et pontus et aer. 
10. In this and the following clause, erat is understood. 
See Rule II, Note 2, p. 16. 11. See Rule IV, Note 1, 
p. 23. 12. See Rule II, Note 3, p. 50. 

Introduction to the JEneid of Virgil 1 . 

Arma, virumque cano, Trojae 2 qui primus ab 

oris 

Italian^ fato profugus, Lavinaque 3 venit 

Litora : multum ille 4 et terris jactatus et alto, 

1. Virgil, the prince of Latin poets, was born at 
Mantua, in the north of Italy, about sixty-nine years 
before Christ. After the first clause cano arma que 
virum, take the relative clause, qui, profugus fato, pri- 
mus venit ab oris Trojcc (in) Italiam que Lavina litora* 
2. Trojce, of Troy, a city of Asia Minor. 3. Lavina, of 
Lavinia, or Italy. Italy was called Lavinia, from La- 
vinia the daughter of king Latinus. 4. Ille, he, 



How are the earth and water described ? "What is 
said of things possessing different qualities, as cold, 
heat, &c. ? 

Who was Virgil ? Where and when was he born ? 
Who is particularly described in the iEneid ? Where 
is Troy? Was iEneas tossed about? 



102 

Vi superum, saevse memorem Junonis ob 

iram : 
Multa quoque et bello passus 5 , dum conderet 

urbem, 
Inferretque Deos Latio; genus und& Latl- 

num 6 , 
Albanique patres, atque altse mcenia Romse. 
Musa 7 , mihi causas memora, quo numfrie 

laeso, 
Quidve dolens Regina Deum, tot volvere 

casus 
Insignem pietate virum, tot adire labores 
Impulerit. Tantsene 8 animis cselestibus irae? 

(iEneas) multum jactatus {fuit) et terris, &c. 5. Et 
passus (est) quoque multa bello, dum, &c. 6. Unde {est) 
genus Latinum, &c. 7- Musa 9 O muse, memora, call 
to mind, causas mihi, then the relative clause quo, &c. ; 
after that take quidve Regina Deu??i dolens, impulerit 
virum insignem pietate volvere tot casus, adire, &c. 
8. Tantcene irce (sunt J, &c. 



By whose rage ? Does Virgil invoke the muse ? For 
what ? What is the question he asks ? 



CHAPTER IV- 

The Roman Calendar. 

A year is that space of time which elapses 
before the same season returns. By the Ro- 
mans, the year was divided into twelve moons 
or months : these, originally, had no appro- 
priate names, but were distinguished by their 
order of succession : as, the first moon, or 
month ; the second moon, or month, &c. In 
process of time, the months were designated, 
according to the names of some imaginary 
deity which they worshipped at the time, or 
according to the character of the season. 



What is a year? How did the Romans divide the 
year ? How were the months named at first ? How 
afterwards ? 



e 




, 


rifice. 
pand. 

ndar, 

itted. 

10th 




<D 






S! « . eo o a 




^3 






ti -d £ Uoj rt 




+■> 






c® g o s £ j 


ru 


. G 








EO 








»-• ^ <U 2 '"* 




^ 








+9 


w 






. S o o Q, •- feao 


"5 






1 


c ^ ^ G £ O Or" * 


. G» 


G 
O 




Z 


*d S -d 3 -g >"» * +* " C *• ■ ■ 

~*2 ., a; c Jr „t^ fl fi-h" 




S 




«U 


3 ^ 

5 « 


<D 




o 


S -G 


^G 

<+H 




o 

d 


3 H 
i 


o 






§ -*a-5 °Js * §• j? J 


: 3 


Eh 






C.>»cJ ~ ~ '_= to 5 »g T3 * 


i 'I 




CO 

83 




<^ 3~ <u „ ^r* ' o.je E 


=0.2 


O 

G 

Ctf 


O 

C/) 

G 




o • 2*1.5.3 o o c'~% c 
J gj-gj*§ § | | Sr- £ 


CD 


>-5 


.s 




3 7^: 


£ 




jp'S ^ 




= X 


•"d 






C3 

G 


G 














C^ ^3 


o 


m 


t^ 








. ^^-n . 




43 


^2 

G 


3 

S 


3 
O 

c3 










' : 




(U 


C ** 




"— » » 




. . c^j "d : 


^"^ 


'♦3 Ci 


CO 


o 
Pi 


CR ft) 


f" 

■aW 




5 «' CO ^ CO CO 




^ 


o 


.5 ,© 


. <M >j ■>» ra ""'^ ^ . • . . 


.s 


-— ; 




H-° 


^ 






11 

s & 




o 

a 


13 




** 


pnJ-^rr s ^c^j^'^^aj 


&* 


S 




a 


ZMBiMUM 


«c 


H 




1 


OJ 










— »c 


T3 




—■ c x: 




•♦-> 


XI 
<D 




» O "J* 


^OhO-OO-OOMW 


on 




— § 


COCOC0CO00COCCCOCOT^C0(M 


c3 


G 




i§« 


I I '. '. '. '. i* I ^ J 3 3 


>> 


G 
63 

CD 
^3 




'— t^ '^ 


: • • • - • « : n o ° o 


-G 




P| 


** C *s ' E • £ "3 its *3 > a o o 


^ 


-^ 




1*8 




G 




"23 
- s « 


1-Jc^CO^fOCCt^COC^O—^CQ 




*p* 




— - >» 


, -" HH 


_ 



105 

THE ALTERATION OF THE CALENDAR, &c. 

Julius Caesar, by the assistance of Sosi- 
genes, an astronomer of Alexandria, adapted 
these lunar months to the course of the sun. 
Each month had the same number of days 
assigned to it, as at the present time. The 
year thus divided was called the Julian year. 

The months, among the Romans, were not 
divided into weeks # , but into three unequal 
parts, called Calends, Nones, and Ides. The 
first day of every month was called Calends, 
(Calends, arum, pi. f. 1. a calendo) because 
the appearance of a new moon was called, 
or proclaimed to the people. The Nones 
(Non^, arum, pi. f. 1.) were so named, be- 



Who assisted Julius Caesar in reforming the Calendar ? 
What countryman was he ? What number of days was 
assigned to each month ? How were the months 
divided? What was the first day called? Why called 
Calends? Why were the next days called Nones? 



* " The custom of dividing time into weeks (hebdomades, v. — 
dae, vel septimanse) was introduced under the Emperors. Dio, who 
flourished under Severus, about A. D. 230, says, xxxvii, 18, it took 
place a little before his time, being derived from the Egyptians ; 
and universally prevailed. The days of the week were named 
from the planets, as they still remain: Dies Solis, Sunday; Dies 
Luna, Monday ; Dies Martis, Tuesday ; Dies Mercurii, Wednes- 
day ; Dies Jovis, Thursday ; Dies Veneris, Friday ; Dies Saturni, 
Saturday. See Adam's Roman Antiquities, p. 303. 

v 5 



106 

cause, counting inclusively, they were nine 
days from the Ides. 

The month is nearly divided by the Ides, 
(Idus, uum, pi. f. 4.) so called from the obso- 
lete word iduare, to divide. 

1. The Calends are the 1st day of every 
month. 

2. The Nones are on the 7th of March, 
May, July, and October, and on the 5th of 
all the other months. 

3. The Ides are always eight days after 
the Nones ; and, therefore, fall on the 15th 
of March, May, July, and October, and on 
the 13th of the rest. 

All that is necessary to be remembered is 
contained in these lines : 
Tu primam mensis lucem die esse Calendas. 
Sex Mains Nonas, October, Julius et Mars. 
Quatuor at reliqui ; dabit Idus quilibet octo. 
The Jirst day of the month they Calends call, 
May, March, October, July, six Nones fall ; 
In th' other eight months, four : eight Ides 
in all. 

Why was the other division of the month called Ides ? 
When are the Calends? When are the Nones in 
March, May, July, and October ? When in the other 
months ? When are the Ides in March, &c. ? When in 
the other months ? 



107 

On reckoning the Days of the Month 

In reckoning the days of their months, 
the Romans counted backwards. 

1. The Nones came after the Calends, or the 1st of 
the month ; and, counting backwards, they called Ja- 
nuary 2d Quarto Nonas Januarias, or Januarii ; or 
Quarto Nondrum Januarii, and by contraction IV. Non. 
Jan, (as in the Table), and so on backward ; Tertio, 
Pridie to the 5th of January, which was called Nonis 
Januariis, or Januarii ; or Nona? Januarii ; by con- 
traction Non. Jan. 

2. The Ides follow the Nones, and they are also counted 
backwards. The sixth of January is denominated 
Octavo Idus Januarias or Januarii, or Octavo Iduum Ja* 
nuarii, and by contraction, VIII. Id. Jan. (as in the Ta- 
ble) ; proceeding backwards, septimo, sexto, quinto, &c. 
to the 13th of January, which was called Idihus Janua* 
His, or Januarii, or Idus Januarii. 

3. The Calends were the third division, and always 
belonged to the following month ; for instance, the 14th 
of January was denominated the XIX. Cal. Feb. or in 
full, Decimo nono Calcndas Februarias, or Fehruarii, or 
Decimo nono Calendarum Fehruarii. This retrograde 
numbering was carried backward, Decimo octavo^ Decimo 
septimo, Decimo sexto, &c. to the 30th of January, which 
was denominated III. Cal. Feb. that is, the 3d day be- 
fore the Calends, or calling of the moon, on the first of 
February. The 31st of January was called Pridie Ca~ 
lendas Februarias, &c. ; that is, the day before they pro- 
claimed the first appearance of the moon for February. 

The following Table will not only show how the Romans 
divided their months, but that they used the names of the 
months both as nouns and adjectives. 



How did the Romans reckon ? Explain the method 
of reckoning the Nones by the Table, Then the Ides ; 
and, lastly, the Calends. 



21 



z = - 



<1 B 
^ bo 

W .5 



z .= 






22 s 



2q -^ -= 

^ r? £ 



o 



© 






co r» co C5 o — i 



Ph 



Hi n3 HH 



> > 



> S 



S e. -= 



> 






o -> 



3 v- -< i^ 5 

C fi O C3 Q . ^ 

O O Z ^ I— I nS _s 

^ E g Z > > > 



^ S K-, ~H 



§ S -i 



> > 5 £ 



fl 



u ■ z 



ZO 2- 






P. 



2-. ^ S 3 



ft 



c 

< 



ft 



ft 



$ 1 



O ,— I t— ! I — 1 



£ S eu Ss >>>>2C^2-2 



> B £ 



<^ <• ~s 

. ^ — i 
> ^ 



*H K? C 



OS 



< 

= ^2C 



5 *.! 









IB*. 



5 5^ gTS 

■^ rt * d a 
:s ^ © 2 c 



— S -^ rf 



! «» 



"5 ."« 



d 2 S'C 3.2 3 
rt.2 § 53 c "21 d 

d 3 «J 3 . C *-J 



-*' d 



5^9 



" = 



f^2^a J-3^-3 



-y: =3 



rfg 



.£ 3 5^ 



3 d**-a*-3 

1^-5 §.2 



-^"■^ rt -3 



— o- a -- ** a 



« -xs g ^ 3 2^ -^ r 23 ^2^ c- 






3 






^-- ^ 5 s> 



ft^ X 

I "5"^-d^ ^1 

St M 5» p S» rj 5> 

m c^ o> 






2rf 3 



5^& 
a an 



I S-c e»'jd 



c 






z 4 a 



'i—i f— I 



2 S 






■ ■fa 



£: 5 s £ > > > 



> & 



£ d 
a? d 

IS^ d 22l 
§§^^ 

S-2 3^ 

3^C22 
§ o c?3 

5> o> ^»3 






110 

OBSERVATIONS. 

It will be seen, by comparing the follow- 
ing extracts with the preceding Table, that 
the Romans had four and sometimes five 
ways of constructing that part of a sentence 
which expressed the date of any transaction. 
first, using the name of the month as an ad- 
jective, they said Quarto Nonas Januarias ; 
Quarto agreeing with die understood, and 
Nonas being governed by ante understood, 
as in the Table. Secondly, using the name 
of the month as a noun, it would be Quarto 
Nonas Januarii ; Quarto agreeing with die 
understood, and Nonas being governed by 
ante as in the first, and Januarii a noun in 
the genitive case governed by Nonas. 
Thirdly, with two genitive cases : as, Quarto 
Nonarum Januarii ; Quarto agreeing with 
die, and Nonarum governed by die under- 



How many ways had the Romans of expressing that 
part of a sentence where a date was mentioned ? Ex- 
plain the first. 

With what does the adjective Quarto agree ? What part 
of speech is Januarias, and with what does it agree ? 

Explain the second way, the third, and the fourth ; 
at the same time show by what each word is governed, 
or with what it agrees. 



1 J 1 

stood, and Januarii governed by Nonarum. 
Sometimes there is a fourth way of express- 
ing it, by the nominative case; as, Calender 
Januarice ; Januarice is an adjective agreeing 
with Calendce, a noun in the nominative plu- 
ral ; or, as in the second instance above, by 
the genitive case Calendce Januarii. So 
Nonce Januarice, or Januarii, &c. Fifthly, 
by the ablative case ; as, Calendis Januariis, 
and Nonis Aprilibus', here Calendis and 
Nonis are nouns in the ablative case, and 
Januariis and Aprilibus adjectives agreeing 
with them, 

EXAMPLES 

To he construed for the further illustration 
of the Roman Calendar. 

1. Nonis Aprilibus. Cic. 

2. Calendis Januariis. Plin. 

3. Calendis Octobrfbus. Cic. 

4. Mariusque, Calendis Januariis, magna 
gloria consul triumphavit. Sal. 

1. Nonis Jprilibus, on the Nones of, or belonging to 
April, or on the 5th of April. 

2. Calendis Januariis, on the Calends of January, or 
on the 1st of January. See Table, Col. I. 

3. Calendis Octobribus, on the Calends of, or belong- 
ing to October, or on the 1st of October. See Col. III. 

4. Que Marius consul magna gloria triumphavit Gal. 
Jan., on the 1st of January, See Table, Col. I. 



112 

5. His rebus gestis Idibus Jan. Cces. 

6. Nonae Decembres. Cic. 

7. Idus Martise consolantur. Cic. 

8. Romulus urbem exiguam in Palatino 
monte constituit, undecimo Calendas Maias. 

Eut. 

9. Pugnatum est sexto Idus Martias. 

Eut. 

10. Jovianus decessit imperii mense sep- 
timo, quarto decimo Calendas Martias. Eut. 

11. Circiter Cal. Jun. Sal. 

12. Rursiis in Nonas Februarias consilium 
csedis transtulerant. Sal. 



5. His, &c. Idibus Januariis, or Januarii. On the 
13th*of January. See Table, Col. I. 

6. Sometimes the nominative case is used instead of 
the ablative ; as Nonce Decembres, the Nones of Decem- 
ber, or the 5th of December. See Table, Col. I. 
Nonce nom. pi. Decembres, adj. nora. pi. 

7. Idus Martict, &c. The Ides of March, or 15th 
of March. See Table, Col. III. 

S. The names of the months are also used as adjec- 
tives in the following examples. The Ellipsis supplied, 
in this instance, it will be Undecimo (die ante) Calendas 
Maias, the 11th of the Calends of May, which in the 
Table, Col. II, is the 2 1st of April. Maias adj. ac. pi. 

9. Sexto {die ante) Idus Martias, the 10th of March. 
See Table, Col. III. 

10. Quarto decimo (die ante) Calendas Martias, the 
16th of February. See Table, Col. IV. 

11. Circiter Calendas Juntas, about the 1st of June. 
See Table, Col. II. Junias adj. ac. pi. 

12. In Nonas Februarias, the 5th of February, See 
Table, Col. IV. 



113 

13. Is dies erat a. d. V. Cal. Apr. Cces. 

14. iEmilius Paulus tertio Nonas Septem- 
bris dimicavit. Eut. 

15. Atticus pridie Cal. Apr. decessit. 

Nep. 

16. Ipse navem conscendit a. d. VI. Cal. 
Jan. Cces. 

17. HaecS. C. perscribuntur a. d. VII. Id. 
Januarii. Cces. 

18. Caesar pridie Cal. Januarii ab oppido 
Bibracte proficiscitur. Cces. 

19. Caesar a. d. III. Non. Jan. castra mo- 
vet. Cces. 

20. Servi transfugerunt a. d. III. Nona- 
rum Martii. Cces. 

13. The names of the months are used as nouns in 
the following examples : ante diem quintum Calendarum 
Aprilis, the 28th of March. See Table, Col. III. 

14. Tertio {die ante) Nonas Septemhris, the 3d of 
September. See Table, Col. II. 

15. Pridie Calendarum Aprilis, in Table, Col. Ill, 
the 31st of March. Aprilis, g. s. 

16. Ante diem sex turn Calendarum Januarii, in Table, 
Col. I, the 2/th of December. 

17. Haze consult d senatus perscribuntur ante diem sep- 
timum Iduum Januarii. In Table, Col. I, the 7th of 
January. 

18. Pridie Calendarum Januarii, in Table, Col. I, the 
31st of December. 

19. Ante diem tertium Nonarum Januarii, in Table, 
Col. I, the 3d of January. 

20. Ante diem tertium Nonarum Martii, in Table, 
Col. Ill, the 5th of March. 



114 

21. A. d. VII. Id, Mart. Brundisiumveni. 

Cces. 

21. Ante diem septimum Iduum Martii, in Table, 
Col. Ill, the 9th of March. 



The Roman Date being given, to find 
the English Time without referring to the 
Table, 

♦ RULE. 

In the Nones and Ides, take the given 
date from one more than the day of the 
month, on which the Nones and Ides happen ; 
and, in the Calends, take the given date 
from two more than the number of days in 
the preceding month, and the remainder will 
be the English time. 



© 



Example I. — What is the English date 
answering to V. Id. Jan. ? 

In January, the Ides are on the 13th ; one more 
makes 14, from which 5, the given date, being taken, 
leaves the 9th of January, the English date required. 

Example II. — What is the English date 
answering to VIII. Cal. Feb. ? 

The preceding month is January, in which there are 



When the Roman date is given, how do you find the 



115 

31 days ; 2 added make 33, from which 8 must he 
taken, and the remainder will be 25 ; so that the 25th 
of January will be the English time. 



The English Date being given, to find the 
Roman time without the use of the Table. 

RULE. 

The same as the preceding ; but in the 

Calends take the given date from two more 

than the number of days in the same month, 

and the remainder will be the Calends of the 

following month. 

Example I. — What is the Roman date 
answering to February 3d ? 

In February the Nones are on the 5th, one more 
makes 6, from which if 3 be taken, the remainder will 
be 3 ; so that 3, or III. Non. Feb. is the Roman date. 

Example II.— What is the Roman date 
answering to April 20th ? 

In April there are 30 days, 2 more will make 32 ; 
from which if you take 20, the remainder will be 12; 
and because May follows April, it will be XII. Cal. Ma. 
the Roman date. 



English time? Explain the Examples for Nones and 
Ides. For Calends. 

When the English date is given, will the preceding 
rule find the Roman date in Nones and Ides? Give ex- 
amples. What is the rule for finding the Calends 
answering to the English date ? Give several examples. 



116 

Example III. — What is the Roman date 
answering to February 15th ? 

There are 28 days in February, 2 more make 30, 
from which, when the given date 15 is taken, the re- 
mainder will be 15 ; and because March follows Fe- 
bruary, it will be XV. Cal. Mar. 

The Division of the Day and Night among 
the Romans. 

The dies naturalis, or the natural day of 
the Romans, was from the rising to the set- 
ting of the sun. They divided the day, at 
all seasons of the year, into twelve equal 
parts, called horte, hours. The Roman hours, 
therefore, would be much longer in summer 
than in winter ; and the only hour, which 
would exactly correspond with our time, 
throughout the year, would be our 12 o'clock, 
or noon : the Romans called this, hora sexta, 
the sixth hour, because they did not number 
their hours from mid-day, as we do ; but 
began at sunrise, and counted 1st, 2d, 3d, 
4th, &c. to the 12th hour, the setting of the 
sun. 

At the equinoxes, that is on the 21st of 



How did the Romans divide the day ? What did they 
call our 12 o'clock ? From what, did they calculate ? 



117 

March, and 23d of September, the Roman 
hours would exactly answer to our own, in 
the following manner. 

Roman, i, n, in, iv, v, vi. — vn, vin, ix, x, xi, xn. 
English, 7, 8 9, 10,11,12.-1, 2, 3, 4,5, 6. 
Morning. Afternoon. 

The first hour was called prima hora, about 
our 7 o'clock ; secunda hora, the second hour, 
about our 8 o'clock ; tertia hora, the third 
hour, about our 9 o'clock, &c. Thus the Ro- 
mans numbered their hours to sexta hora, or 
the sixth hour, which was exactly our 12 
o'clock; septhna hora, the seventh hour, 
about our 1 o'clock, and thus proceeding to 
undecima hora, the eleventh hour, about our 
5 or 6 o'clock ; and duodecima hora, the 
twelfth hour, about our 6 or 7 o'clock, ac- 
cording to the time of the sun's setting. 

The night was divided in the same man- 
ner. After the twelve hours of the day, the 
first hour of the night began : prima hora 
noctis, the first hour of the night, about our 
7 o'clock ; secunda hora, &c. to sexta hora 
noctis, the sixth hour of the night, answering 



What was Prima hora ? 

How was the night divided ? To what did the Roman 
Secunda hora noctis answer, &c. ? 



118 

exactly to our 12 o'clock, or mid-night. Sep- 
tima hora, the seventh hour, or 1 o'clock in 
the morning, calculating in the same manner 
to duodecimo, liora noctis, the twelfth hour 
of the night, about our 6 o'clock in the 
morning. 

The night was also divided into four 
watches, each consisting of three hours, 
which were of different lengths, at different 
times of the year, according to the hour when 
the day closed. When the night began at 
6 o'clock, from that time to 9 o'clock was 
the [first watch, called vigilia prima ; the 
second watch, vigilia secunda, was from 9 to 
12 o'clock; the third, vigilia tertia, from 
12 to 3 o'clock, and the fourth, vigilia 
quarta, from 3 to 6 o'clock in the morning. 

Examples for Construing. 

1. Quarta vix demum exponimur hora. 

Hor. 

2. Ad horam IX in anchoris exspectavit. 

Cces. 

I. Exponimur, we are set on shore, quarta hora, at 
10 o'clock. 2. Ad nonam horam, to 3 o'clock. 3. Ab 



The Romans divided the night into how many 
watches ? What was the first called? The second, &c. ? 



119 

3. Ab hora IV usque ad solis occasum. 

Ccbs. 

4. Philippus, ab officiis octFtvam circiter 
horam, redit. Hot. 

5. Hora circiter III ab antecursoribus de 
Crassi adventu certior est factus. Cces. 

6. Acceptis Uteris circiter hora XI diei. 

Cos. 

7. Post horam IX diei Csesar pervenit. 

Cces. 

8. Hora circiter VI ejusdem diei. Cces. 

9. Ab hora diei quinta usque ad solis oc- 
casum. Cces. 

10. A mane usqu& ad horam X diei. 

Cm. 

11. Postera die, circiter horam tertiam 
pervenit. SaL 

12. Luterius, hora noctis circiter X, sylves- 
tribus angustisque itineribus frumentum im- 
portare in oppidum instituit. Cess. 

quart fi hora, from 10 o'clock. 4. Circiter octavam ho- 
ram, about 2 o'clock. 5. Circiter tertid hora, about 9 
o'clock, factus est certior, he is made more certain, 
or he is informed. 6. Circiter undecimd hord diei, about 
5 o'clock in the evening. 7« Post nonam horam, after 
3 o'clock. 8. Circiter sextd hord, about 12 o'clock. 
11. Die is here feminine. 12. Circiter decimd hord 
noctis, about 4 o'clock in the morning. Sylvestribus que 



120 

13. Noctis hora prima omnes suos ad 
unura in castris incoltimes reduxit. C&s. 

14. Cum puer tuus ad me secunda fere 
vigilia venisset. Cic. 

15. Tertia fere vigilia exacta. Cic. 

angustis itineribus, by woody and narrow roads. 13. 
Prima hora noctis, 7 o'clock at night. 14. Fere sc- 
cundd vigilia, almost in the second watch, or near 
12 o'clock. 15. Fere tertia vigilia exacta, almost the 
third watch being passed, or it being almost 3 o'clock 
in the morning. 



THE END. 



CHARLES WOOD AND SON, PRINTERS, 

Poppin's Court, Fleet Street. 










4^ * "^^Hf^ # 'T, 









S\ 



°^ '"SHI," a o 



:* «*. 







A. 0,0 ^ 











°o 






'<U • " • A 1 " 




4 O 



* SfllKSS * ^n c£ * Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 

> i^ Br!^ ^. *" ^ ' * i Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 

\ yflhM^st » . V-* "" < Treatment Date: July 2006 

^b *^f.?. <v^ ** % PreservationTechnologies 

t 4 « "0* (\V oWo ^*^ A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 






°o 




** 



nil homson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724) 779-21 1 1 



. 









lH°* 









^ ^ *i 







*^ V 








c v • 




1 si**? 9 

O • A * A -A * 









0* :«&»' «fev* * 




■ 

1 ^H 



■ 

■ 



■ 






